MIRAGE - Mitsubishi Motors UK

MIRAGEOWNER’S MANUAL

MIRAGE - EN-UK - OA0X13E4

MIR

AG

E - E

N-U

K - O

A0

X1

3E

4

ForewordE09200104601

Thank you for selecting a MIRAGE as your new vehicle.This owner’s manual will add to your understanding and full enjoyment ofthe many fine features of this vehicle.It contains information prepared to acquaint you with the proper way to oper-ate and maintain your vehicle for the utmost in driving pleasure. MITSUBISHI MOTORS Europe B.V. reserves the right to make changes indesign and specifications and/or to make additions to or improvements inthis product without obligation to install them on products previously manu-factured.It is an absolute requirement for the driver to strictly observe all laws and reg-ulations concerning vehicles. This owner’s manual has been written in compliance with such laws and reg-ulations, but some of the contents may become contradictory with later amend-ment of the laws and regulations. Please leave this owner’s manual in this vehicle at time of resale. The nextowner will appreciate having access to the information contained in this own-er’s manual. Repairs to your vehicle:Vehicles in the warranty period:All warranty repairs must be carried out by a MITSUBISHI MOTORS Au-thorized Service Point. Vehicles outside the warranty period:Where the vehicle is repaired is at the discretion of the owner.

Throughout this owner’s manual the words WARNING and CAUTION ap-pear.These serve as reminders to be especially careful. Failure to follow instruc-tions could result in personal injury or damage to your vehicle.

WARNINGindicates a strong possibility of severe personal injury or death if in-structions are not followed.

CAUTIONmeans hazards or unsafe practices that could cause minor personal in-jury or damage to your vehicle.You will see another important symbol:

NOTE: gives helpful information. *: indicates optional equipment.

It may differ according to the sales classification; referto the sales catalogue.

Abbreviations used in this owner’s manual:LHD: Left-Hand DriveRHD: Right-Hand DriveM/T: Manual TransmissionCVT: Continuously Variable Transmission

Information for station serviceE09300102842

Fuel

Fuel tank capacity 35 litres

Fuel requirementsUnleaded petrol octane number (EN228)

95 RON or higherRefer to the “General information” section for the fuel selection.

Engine oil Refer to the “Maintenance” section for the selection of engine oil.Tyre inflation pressure Refer to the “Maintenance” section for the tyre inflation pressure.

© 2012 Mitsubishi Motors Corporation13OA0X13E4

BLC-13-001351

Table of contentsOverview/Quick guide

General information

Locking and unlocking 1

Seat and seat belts 2

Instruments and controls 3

Starting and driving 4

For pleasant driving 5

For emergencies 6

Vehicle care 7

Maintenance 8

Specifications 9

OA0X13E4

Instruments and controlsE08500100074

LHD

1. Instruments p. 3-022. Hazard warning flasher switch p. 3-183. Windscreen wiper and washer switch p. 3-19

Rear window wiper and washer switch p. 3-224. Ignition switch* p. 4-085. Supplemental restraint system (SRS) -airbag (for driver) p. 2-17

Horn switch p. 3-246. Steering wheel height adjustment p. 4-067. Auto Stop & Go (AS&G) OFF switch* p. 4-188. Headlamp levelling switch p. 3-169. Fuse box p. 8-15

10. Electric remote-controlled outside rear-view mirrorswitch* p. 4-07

11. Engine switch* p. 4-0912. Combination headlamps and dipper switch p. 3-14

Turn-signal lever p. 3-17Front fog lamp switch* p. 3-18Rear fog lamp switch p. 3-18

Overview/Quick guide

OA0X13E4

RHD

1. Instruments p. 3-022. Windscreen wiper and washer switch p. 3-19

Rear window wiper and washer switch p. 3-223. Engine switch* p. 4-094. Headlamp levelling switch p. 3-165. Electric remote-controlled outside rear-view mirror

switch* p. 4-076. Auto Stop & Go (AS&G) OFF switch* p. 4-187. Ignition switch* p. 4-088. Supplemental restraint system (SRS) -airbag (for driver) p. 2-17

Horn switch p. 3-249. Combination headlamps and dipper switch p. 3-14

Turn-signal lever p. 3-17Front fog lamp switch* p. 3-18Rear fog lamp switch p. 3-18

10. Hazard warning flasher switch p. 3-18


OA0X13E4

LHD

1. Supplemental restraint system (SRS)-airbag (for front passen-ger) p. 2-17

2. Heater* p. 5-033. Manual air conditioning* p. 5-034. Rear window demister switch p. 3-235. Automatic air conditioning* p. 5-066. Rear window demister switch p. 3-237. Glove box p. 5-368. Accessory socket p. 5-359. Parking brake lever p. 4-04

10. Cup holder (for the rear seat) p. 5-3711. Gearshift lever* p. 4-19

Selector lever* p. 4-2112. Cup holder (for the front seat) p. 5-3713. Fuel tank filler door release lever p. 0214. Key slot* p. 4-1415. Bonnet release lever p. 8-0416. Side ventilators p. 5-0217. Audio* p. 5-13

MITSUBISHI Multi Entertainment System*Refer to the separate “MITSUBISHI Multi Entertainment Systemowner’s manual”Digital clock* p. 5-20

18. Centre ventilators p. 5-02


OA0X13E4

RHD

1. Centre ventilators p. 5-022. Manual air conditioning* p. 5-033. Heater* p. 5-034. Rear window demister switch p. 3-235. Automatic air conditioning* p. 5-066. Rear window demister switch p. 3-237. Bonnet release lever p. 8-048. Fuel tank filler door release lever p. 029. Cup holder (for the front seat) p. 5-37

10. Parking brake lever p. 4-0411. Cup holder (for the rear seat) p. 5-3712. Gearshift lever* p. 4-19

Selector lever* p. 4-2113. Key slot* p. 4-1414. Accessory socket p. 5-3515. Glove box p. 5-3616. Side ventilators p. 5-0217. Supplemental restraint system (SRS)-airbag (for front passen-

ger) p. 2-1718. Audio* p. 5-13

MITSUBISHI Multi Entertainment System*Refer to the separate “MITSUBISHI Multi Entertainment Systemowner’s manual”Digital clock* p. 5-20


OA0X13E4

InteriorE08500200075

LHD

1. Sun visors p. 5-34Vanity mirror p. 5-34Card holder p. 5-34

2. Bottle holder p. 5-383. Room lamp p. 5-35, 8-214. Inside rear-view mirror p. 4-065. Head restraints p. 2-046. USB input terminal* p. 5-317. Heated seat switches* p. 2-038. Front seat p. 2-029. Supplemental restraint system (SRS) - side airbag (for front

seat) p. 2-2310. Jack* p. 6-0511. Rear seat p. 2-0312. Rear shelf panel* p. 5-3813. Luggage room lamp* p. 5-36, 8-2114. Manual window control* p. 1-1515. Supplemental restraint system (SRS) - curtain airbag p. 2-2316. Seat belts p. 2-05

Adjustable seat belt anchor* p. 2-0717. Electric window control switch* p. 1-1518. Electric window lock switch* p. 1-16


OA0X13E4

RHD

1. Inside rear-view mirror p. 4-062. Room lamp p. 5-35, 8-213. Sun visors p. 5-34

Vanity mirror p. 5-34Card holder p. 5-34

4. Bottle holder p. 5-385. Electric window lock switch* p. 1-166. Electric window control switch* p. 1-157. Seat belts p. 2-05

Adjustable seat belt anchor* p. 2-078. Supplemental restraint system (SRS) - curtain airbag p. 2-239. Manual window control* p. 1-15

10. Rear shelf panel* p. 5-3811. Luggage room lamp* p. 5-36, 8-2112. Rear seat p. 2-0313. Jack* p. 6-0514. Supplemental restraint system (SRS) - side airbag (for front

seat) p. 2-2315. Front seat p. 2-0216. Heated seat switches* p. 2-0317. Fuse box p. 8-1518. USB input terminal* p. 5-3119. Head restraints p. 2-0420. Steering wheel height adjustment p. 4-06


OA0X13E4

Luggage areaE08500300047

Type 1 Type 2

1. Tether anchorages for child restraint system p. 2-152. Spare wheel p. 6-123. Tools p. 6-054. Tether anchorages for child restraint system p. 2-155. Tools p. 6-05

Tyre repair kit p. 6-06


OA0X13E4

Outside (Front)E08500400107

1. Electric window control* p. 1-152. Outside rear-view mirror p. 4-073. Fuel tank filler p. 024. Locking and unlocking the doors p. 1-12

Keyless entry system* p. 1-03Keyless operation system* p. 1-04

5. Side turn-signal lamps p. 3-17, 8-206. Headlamps p. 3-14, 8-20, 8-217. Position lamps p. 3-14, 8-20, 8-218. Front turn-signal lamps p. 3-17, 8-20, 8-219. Front fog lamps* p. 3-18, 8-20, 8-22

Daytime running lamps* p. 8-20, 8-2210. Engine compartment p. 8-02, 9-13

Bonnet p. 8-0411. Windscreen wiper and washer p. 3-1912. Antenna p. 5-30


OA0X13E4

Outside (Rear)E08500400123

1. Tyre p. 8-09Tyre inflation pressures p. 8-10Wheel condition p. 8-11Tyre rotation p. 8-11Snow traction device (Tyre chains) p. 8-12Size of tyres and wheels p. 9-10

2. Stop and tail lamps p. 8-20, 8-233. Rear turn-signal lamps p. 3-17, 8-20, 8-234. Reversing lamps (passenger’s side) p. 8-20, 8-23

Rear fog lamp (driver’s side) p. 8-20, 8-235. Licence plate lamps p. 8-20, 8-246. Rear-view camera* p. 4-327. Tailgate p. 1-148. Rear window wiper and washer p. 3-229. High-mounted stop lamp* p. 8-20, 8-24

10. Rear spoiler*


OA0X13E4

Quick guideE08500500010

Lock and unlock the doors and tailgateE08500600040

Keyless entry system*Press the remote control switch, and all doors andthe tailgate will be locked or unlocked as desired.The remote control switch will operate within ap-proximately 4 m from the vehicle.

Keyless entry keyKeyless operation key

1- LOCK switch2- UNLOCK switch3- Indication lamp

Refer to “Keyless entry system*” on page 1-03.

Keyless operation system*When you are carrying the keyless operation key,if you press the driver’s door switch (A), or the tail-gate switch (B) within the operating range, thedoors and the tailgate are locked/unlocked.

The operating range is approximately 70 cm fromthe driver’s door switch and the tailgate switch.

Refer to “Keyless operation system*” on page1-04.

Around the driver’s seatE08500800068

LHD


OA0X13E4

RHD1-Wiper and washer switch

Except for vehicles equipped with rain sensor

MIST- Misting functionThe wipers will operate once.

OFF- OffINT- Intermittent (Speed sensitive)LO- SlowHI- Fast

Vehicles with rain sensor


OFF- OffAUTO- Auto-wiper control

Rain sensorThe wipers will automatically oper-ate depending on the degree of wet-ness on the windscreen.

LO- SlowHI- Fast

The washer fluid will be sprayed onto the wind-screen by pulling the lever towards you.Refer “Wiper and washer switch” on page 3-19.

2-Steering wheel height adjustment

LHD


OA0X13E4

RHD

A- LockedB- Release

1. Release the lever while holding the steeringwheel up.

2. Adjust the steering wheel to the desired posi-tion.

3. Securely lock the steering wheel by pullingthe lever fully upward.

Refer “Steering wheel height adjustment” onpage 4-06.

3-Engine switch*[For vehicles equipped with keyless operation sys-tem]

If you are carrying the keyless operation key, youcan start the engine. If you press the engine switchwithout depressing the brake pedal (CVT) or theclutch pedal (M/T), you can change the operationmode in the order of OFF, ACC, ON, OFF.

OFF- The indication lamp (A) on the en-gine switch turns off.

ACC- The indication lamp on the engineswitch illuminates orange.

ON- The indication lamp on the engineswitch illuminates green.

Refer “Engine switch” on page 4-09.

4-Combination headlamps

Type 1Rotate the switch to turn on the lamps.

OFF All lamps off

Position, tail, licence plate and instru-ment panel lamps on

Headlamps and other lamps go on

Rotate the switch to turn on the lamps.

Type 2


OA0X13E4

OFF All lamps off

AUTO With the ignition switch or the oper-ation mode is in ON, head-lamps, po-sition, tail, licence plate, and instru-ment panel lamps turn on and off au-tomatically in accordance with out-side light level. All lamps turn off au-tomatically when the ignition switchis turned to “OFF” position or the op-eration mode is put in OFF.



Refer “Combination headlamps and dipperswitch” on page 3-14.

4-Turn-signal leverThe turn-signal lamps flash when the lever is oper-ated

1- Turn-signals2- Lane-change signals

Refer “Turn-signal lever” on page 3-17.

5-Electric remote-controlled outside rear-view mir-rors*

To adjust the mirror position

L- Left outside mirror adjustmentR- Right outside mirror adjustment

1- Up2- Down3- Right4- Left

Refer “Electric remote-controlled outside rear-view mirrors” on page 4-07.

6-Electric window control*Press the switch down for opening the window,and pull the switch for closing.

Driver’s switch (Type 1)

Driver’s switch (Type 2) Driver’s switch (Type 3)

1- Driver’s door window2- Front passenger’s door window3- Rear left door window4- Rear right door window5- Lock switch

Lock switch (Type 1 and 2)If you press the switch (5), the passenger’sswitches cannot be operated. To cancel, press itonce again. Refer “Electric window control” on page 1-15.

7-Fuel tank filler door release leverOpen the fuel tank filler door.


OA0X13E4

The fuel tank filler is located on the rear left side ofyour vehicle.

Refer “Filling the fuel tank” on page 02.

Automatic transmission INVECS-IIICVT (Intelligent & Innovative VehicleElectronic Control System III)*

E08501000054

Selector lever operationThe CVT selects an optimum gear ratio automati-cally, depending on the speed of the vehicle andthe position of the accelerator pedal.

LHD

RHD

While depressing the brake pedal,move the selector lever through thegate.

Move the selector lever through thegate.

Selector lever positions

“P” PARKThis position locks the transmission to prevent thevehicle from moving. The engine can be started inthis position.

“R” REVERSEThis position is to back up.

“N” NEUTRALAt this position the transmission is disengaged.

“D” DRIVEThis position is used for most city and highway driv-ing.

“Ds” (DOWNSHIFT & SPORTY DRIVING)Use when engine braking is needed, or for high-power sport drive.

“L” (LOW)This position is for driving up very steep hills andfor engine braking at low speeds when drivingdown steep hills. Refer to “Automatic transmission INVECS-IIICVT (Intelligent & Innovative Vehicle Electron-ic Control System III)” on page 4-21.


OA0X13E4

InstrumentsE08501100039

1- Tachometer*The tachometer indicates the engine speed(r/min). The tachometer helps you to obtainmore economical driving and also warns youof excessive engine speeds (Red zone).

2- Multi-information display3- Speedometer (km/h or mph + km/h)4- Multi-information display switch

Refer to “Instruments” on page 3-02.

Multi-information displayAlways stop the vehicle in a safe place before oper-ating.

The following information is included on the multi-information display: odometer, tripmeter, meter il-lumination control, service reminder, fuel remain-ing, driving range and average fuel consumption, etc.

1- Information display2- Service reminder3- Frozen road warning*4- Fuel remaining display5- Selector lever position display*6- Gearshift indicator*

Refer to “Multi-information display” on page3-02.


OA0X13E4

Indication and warning lampsE08501300044

1- High-beam indication lamp ® p. 3-112- Electric power steering system (EPS) warning lamp ® p. 4-303- Turn-signal indication lamps/Hazard warning indication lamps ® p. 3-114- Front fog lamp indication lamp* ® p. 3-115- Rear fog lamp indication lamp ® p. 3-116- Door ajar warning lamp ® p. 3-147- Supplement Restraint System (SRS) warning lamp ® p. 2-258- High coolant temperature warning lamp (red) ® p. 3-139- Low coolant temperature indication lamp (green) ® p. 3-11

10- Oil pressure warning lamp ® p. 3-1311- Check engine warning lamp ® p. 3-1212- Charge warning lamp ® p. 3-1313- Brake warning lamp ® p. 3-12

14- Anti-lock brake system (ABS) warning lamp ® p. 4-2815- Multi-information display ® p. 3-0216- Seat belt warning lamp ® p. 2-0617- Active Stability Control (ASC) indication lamp ® p. 4-3118- Active Stability Control (ASC) OFF indication lamp ® p. 4-3119- ECO indication lamp* ® p. 3-1120- Auto Stop & Go (AS&G) OFF indication lamp* ® p. 4-1821- Auto Stop & Go (AS&G) indication lamp* ® p. 4-1522- ECO drive assist* ® p. 3-1123- For details, refer to “Warning activator” on page 1-09.

(if so equipped)24- For details, refer to “Warning activator” on page 1-09.

(if so equipped)


OA0X13E4

OA0X13E4

Fuel selection...................................................................................02Filling the fuel tank..........................................................................02Installation of accessories................................................................04Modification/alterations to the electrical or fuel systems................04Genuine parts...................................................................................05Safety and disposal information for used engine oil........................05Disposal information for used batteries...........................................05

General information

OA0X13E4

Fuel selectionE00200103249

Recommendedfuel

Unleaded petrol octane number(EN228)

95 RON or higher

CAUTIONl The use of leaded fuel can result in seri-

ous damage to the engine and catalyticconverter. Do not use leaded fuel.

NOTEl Your vehicles have the knock control system

so that you can use unleaded petrol 90 RONas an emergent measure in case unleaded pet-rol 95 RON or higher is not available on jour-ney, etc.In such a case, you don’t need to adjust theengine specially. In case of using unleadedpetrol 90 RON, the engine performance levelis reduced.

l Repeatedly driving short distances at lowspeeds can cause deposits to form in the fuelsystem and engine, resulting in poor startingand poor acceleration. If these problems oc-cur, you are advised to add a detergent addi-tive to the gasoline when you refuel the vehi-cle. The additive will remove the deposits,thereby returning the engine to a normal con-dition. Be sure to use a MITSUBISHIMOTORS GENUINE FUEL SYSTEMCLEANER. Using an unsuitable additivecould make the engine malfunction. For de-tails, please contact a MITSUBISHIMOTORS Authorized Service Point.

l Poor quality petrol can cause problems suchas difficult starting, stalling, engine noiseand hesitation. If you experience these prob-lems, try another brand and/or grade of petrol.If the check engine warning lamp flashes,have the system checked as soon as possibleat a MITSUBISHI MOTORS AuthorizedService Point.

E10 type petrolE00203200019

The petrol engines are compatible with the E10type petrol (containing 10 % ethanol) conformingto European standards EN 228.

CAUTIONl Do not use more than 10 % concentration

of ethanol (grain alcohol) by volume.Use of more than 10 % concentrationmay lead to damage to your vehicle fuelsystem, engine, engine sensors and ex-haust system.

Filling the fuel tankE00200202575

WARNINGl When handling fuel, comply with the safe-

ty regulations displayed by garages andfilling stations.

l Gasoline is highly flammable and explo-sive. You could be burned or seriously in-jured when handling it. When refuelingyour vehicle, always turn the engine offand keep away from flames, sparks, andsmoking materials. Always handle fuel inwell-ventilated outdoor areas.

l Before removing the fuel cap, be sure toget rid of your body’s static electricity bytouching a metal part of the car or thefuel pump. Any static electricity on yourbody could create a spark that ignitesfuel vapour.

l Perform the whole refueling process(opening the fuel tank filler door, remov-ing the fuel cap, etc.) by yourself. Do notlet any other person come near the fueltank filler. If you allowed a person tohelp you and that person was carryingstatic electricity, fuel vapour could be ig-nited.

l Do not move away from the fuel tank fill-er until refueling is finished. If youmoved away and did something else (forexample, sitting on a seat) partwaythrough the refueling process, you couldpick up a fresh charge of static electricity.

l If the tank cap must be replaced, use onlya MITSUBISHI MOTORS original part.

General information

02 OA0X13E4

Fuel tank capacity35 litres

Refueling1. Before filling with fuel, stop the engine.2. The fuel tank filler is located on the rear left

side of your vehicle.Open the fuel tank filler door by pulling therelease lever located on the side of the driv-er’s seat.

3. Open the fuel tank filler tube by slowly turn-ing the cap anticlockwise.

A- RemoveB- Close

CAUTIONl Since the fuel system may be under pres-

sure, remove the fuel tank filler tube capslowly. This relieves any pressure or vac-uum that might have built up in the fueltank. If you hear a hissing sound, wait un-til it stops before removing the cap. Oth-erwise, fuel may spray out, injuring youor others.

4. While filling with fuel, hang the fuel capcord on the hook located on the inside of thefuel tank filler door.

5. Insert the gun in the tank port as far as it goes.

CAUTIONl Do not tilt the gun.

6. When the gun stops automatically, do not fillwith fuel any more.

7. To close, turn the fuel tank filler tube capslowly clockwise until you hear clickingsounds, then gently push the fuel tank fillerdoor closed.

General information

03OA0X13E4

Installation of accessoriesE00200301045

We recommend you to consult a MITSUBISHIMOTORS Authorized Service Point.l The installation of accessories, optional

parts, etc., should only be carried out withinthe limits prescribed by law in your country,and in accordance with the guidelines andwarnings contained within the documents ac-companying this vehicle.

l Installing electric components incorrectlycould lead to a fire. Please refer to Modifica-tion/alteration to the electrical or fuel sys-tems section within this owner’s manual.

l Using a cellular phone or radio set inside thevehicle without an external antenna maycause electrical system interference, whichcould lead to unsafe vehicle operation.

l Tyres and wheels which do not meet specifi-cations must not be used.Refer to the “Specifications” section for in-formation regarding wheel and tyre sizes.

l When fitting accessories, ensure that maxi-mum gross vehicle weight and maximumaxle weight are not exceeded.

Important points!Due to large number of accessory and replacementparts of different manufactures available in the mar-ket, it is not possible, not only for MITSUBISHIMOTORS, but also for a MITSUBISHI MOTORSAuthorized Service Point, to check whether the at-tachment or installation of such parts affects theoverall safety of your MITSUBISHI-vehicle.

Even when such parts are officially authorized, forexample by a “general operators permit” (an ap-praisal for the part) or through the execution of thepart in an officially approved manner of construc-tion, or when a single operation permit followingthe attachment or installation of such parts, it can-not be deduced from that alone, that the driving safe-ty of your vehicle has not been affected. Consider also that there basically exists no liabilityon the part of the appraiser or the official. Maxi-mum safety can only be ensured with parts recom-mended, sold and fitted or installed by aMITSUBISHI MOTORS authorized Service Point(MITSUBISHI MOTORS GENUINE replacementparts and MITSUBISHI MOTORS accessories).The same also pertains to modifications ofMITSUBISHI vehicles with respect to the produc-tion specifications. For safety reasons, do not at-tempt any modifications other than those that fol-low the recommendations of a MITSUBISHIMOTORS authorized Service Point.

Modification/alterations to theelectrical or fuel systems

E00200400368

MITSUBISHI MOTORS CORPORATION has al-ways manufactured safe, high quality vehicles. Inorder to maintain this safety and quality, it is impor-tant that any accessory that is to be fitted, or anymodifications carried out which involve the electri-cal or fuel systems, should be carried out in accord-ance with MITSUBISHI guidelines.

CAUTIONl If the wires interfere with the vehicle

body or improper installation methodsare used (protective fuses not included,etc.), electronic devices may be adverselyaffected, resulting in a fire or other acci-dent.

General information

04 OA0X13E4

Genuine partsE00200500499

MITSUBISHI MOTORS has gone to great lengthsto bring you a superbly crafted automobile offeringthe highest quality and dependability.Use MITSUBISHI MOTORS GENUINE Parts, de-signed and manufactured to maintain yourMITSUBISHI MOTORS automobile at top per-formance. MITSUBISHI MOTORS GENUINEParts are identified by this mark and are availableat all MITSUBISHI MOTORS Authorized ServicePoints.

Safety and disposal informationfor used engine oil

E00200600155

WARNINGl Prolonged and repeated contact may

cause serious skin disorders, includingdermatitis and cancer.

l Avoid contact with the skin as far as pos-sible and wash thoroughly after any con-tact.

l Keep used engine oils out of reach of chil-dren.

Protect the environmentIt is illegal to pollute drains, water courses and soil.Use authorized waste collection facilities, includ-ing civic amenity sites and garages providing facili-ties for disposal of used oil and used oil filters. If indoubt, contact your local authority for advice on dis-posal.

Disposal information for usedbatteries

E00201300032

Your vehicle contains batteriesand/or accumulators.Do not mix with general house-hold waste.For proper treatment, recoveryand recycling of used batteries,please take them to applicable col-lection points, in accordancewith your national legislationand the Directives 2006/66/EC.By disposing of these batteriescorrectly, you will help to savevaluable resources and preventany potential negative effects onhuman health and the environ-ment which could otherwisearise from inappropriate wastehandling.

General information

05OA0X13E4

OA0X13E4

Keys..............................................................................................1-02Key number tag............................................................................1-02Electronic immobilizer (Anti-theft starting system).....................1-03Keyless entry system*..................................................................1-03Keyless operation system*...........................................................1-04Doors............................................................................................1-12Central door locks*.......................................................................1-13“Child-protection” rear doors.......................................................1-14Tailgate.........................................................................................1-14Manual window control*..............................................................1-15Electric window control*..............................................................1-15

Locking and unlocking

OA0X13E4

1

KeysE00300102575

Key Keyless entry key

Keyless operation key

1- Master key2- Keyless entry key3- Keyless operation key4- Emergency key

WARNINGl When carrying a remote control key on

flights, do not press any switches on thekey while on the plane. If a switch is press-ed on the plane, the key emits electromag-netic waves, which could adversely affectthe plane’s flight operation.When carrying a remote control key in abag, be careful that no switches on thekey can be easily pressed by mistake.

NOTEl The key is a precision electronic device with

a built-in signal transmitter. Please observethe following in order to prevent a malfunc-tion.

• Do not leave in a place that is exposed todirect sunlight, for example on the dash-board.

• Do not disassemble or modify.• Do not excessively bend the key or sub-

ject it to strong impacts.• Do not expose to water.• Keep away from magnetic key rings.• Keep away from audio systems, personal

computers, TVs, and other equipmentthat generates a magnetic field.

• Keep away from devices that emit strongelectromagnetic waves, such as cellularphones, wireless devices and high frequen-cy equipment (including medical devices).

• Do not clean with ultrasonic cleaners orsimilar equipment.

• Do not leave the key where it may be ex-posed to high temperature or high humid-ity.

l The engine is designed so that it will notstart if the ID code registered in the immobil-izer computer and the key’s ID code do notmatch. Refer to the “Electronic immobilizer”section for details and key usage.

Key number tagE00312700024

The key number is stamped on the tag as indicatedin the illustration.Make a record of the key number and store the keyand key number tag in separate places, so that youcan order a key from your MITSUBISHIMOTORS Authorized Service Point in the eventthe original keys are lost.


1-02 OA0X13E4

1

Electronic immobilizer (Anti-theft starting system)

E00300201999

The electronic immobilizer is designed to signifi-cantly reduce the possibility of vehicle theft. Thepurpose of the system is to immobilize the vehicleif an invalid start is attempted. A valid start attemptcan only be achieved by using a key “registered” tothe immobilizer system.

NOTEl [Vehicles without keyless operation system]

In the following cases, the vehicle may notbe able to receive the registered ID codefrom the registered key and engine may notstart.

• When the key contacts a key ring or othermetallic or magnetic object

• When the key grip contacts metal of an-other key

• When the key contacts or is close to otherimmobilizing keys (including keys of oth-er vehicles) In cases like these, remove the object oradditional key from the vehicle key. Thentry again to start the engine. If the enginedoes not start, we recommend you to con-tact a MITSUBISHI MOTORS Author-ized Service Point.

l If you lose one of the master keys, the key-less entry keys or the keyless operation keys,contact a MITSUBISHI MOTORS Author-ized Service Point as soon as possible.Refer to “Keys” on page 1-02.To obtain a key, take your vehicle and all re-maining keys to a MITSUBISHI MOTORSAuthorized Service Point.If you need an extra spare key, take your ve-hicle and all the keys to a MITSUBISHIMOTORS Authorized Service Point. All thekeys have to be re-registered in the immobil-izer computer unit.For further information, please contact aMITSUBISHI MOTORS Authorized ServicePoint.

CAUTIONl Don’t make any alterations or additions

to the immobilizer system; alterations oradditions could cause failure of the immo-bilizer.

Keyless entry system*E00300302724

Press the remote control switch, and all doors andthe tailgate will be locked or unlocked as desired.

Keyless entry key Keyless operation key

1- LOCK switch2- UNLOCK switch3- Indication lamp

To lockPress the LOCK switch (1). All the doors and thetailgate will be locked. The turn-signal lamps willblink once. When they are locked with the roomlamp switch in the middle (•) position, the roomlamp also blink once.

To unlockPress the UNLOCK switch (2). All the doors andthe tailgate will be unlocked. If the room lampswitch is in the middle (•) position at this time, theroom lamp will come on for approximately 15 sec-onds and the turn-signal lamps will blink twice.


1-03OA0X13E4

1

NOTEl For vehicles equipped with the mirror retrac-

tor switch, the outside rear-view mirrors auto-matically retract or extend when all the doorsand the tailgate are locked or unlocked usingthe remote control switches of the keyless en-try system. Refer to “Starting and driving:Outside rear-view mirrors” on page 4-07.

l If the UNLOCK switch (2) is pressed and nodoor or tailgate is opened within approximate-ly 30 seconds, relocking will automaticallyoccur.

l It is possible to modify functions as follows:For further information, please contact aMITSUBISHI MOTORS Authorized ServicePoint.

• The time from pressing the UNLOCKswitch (2) to the moment of automaticlocking can be changed.

• Activating the operation confirmationfunction (blinking of the turn-signallamps) only during locking, or only dur-ing unlocking.

• The confirmation function (this indicateslocking or unlocking of the doors and tail-gate with the flash of the turn-signallamps) can be deactivated.

• The number of times the turn-signallamps are flashed by the confirmationfunction can be changed.

• On vehicles with keyless operation sys-tem, the buzzer sound can be activatedwhen a keyless operation is done.

l The keyless entry system does not operate inthe following conditions:

• The key is left in the ignition switch. (ex-cept for vehicles with keyless operationsystem)

• The operation mode is not in OFF. (vehi-cles with keyless operation system)

• The door or tailgate is open.l The remote control switch will operate with-

in approximately 4 m from the vehicle. How-ever, the operating range of the remote con-trol switch may change if the vehicle is loca-ted near a power station, or radio/TV broad-casting station.

l If either of the following problems occurs,the battery may be exhausted.

• The remote control switch is operated atthe correct distance from the vehicle, butthe doors and tailgate are not locked/un-locked in response.

• The indication lamp (3) is dim or doesnot come on.For further information, please contact aMITSUBISHI MOTORS AuthorizedService Point.

l If your remote control switch is lost or dam-aged, please contact a MITSUBISHIMOTORS Authorized Service Point for a re-placement remote control switch.

l If you wish to add a remote control switch,please contact a MITSUBISHI MOTORS Au-thorized Service Point.The following numbers of the remote controlswitches are available.

• Keyless entry key: up to 4 keys• Keyless operation key: up to 4 keys

Keyless operation system*E00305600601

The keyless operation system allows you to lockand unlock the doors and tailgate, start the engineand change the operation mode simply by carryingthe keyless operation key with you.The keyless operation key can also be used as thekeyless entry system remote control switch.Refer to “Starting” on page 4-12.Refer to “Keyless entry system” on page 1-03. The driver should always carry the keyless opera-tion key. This key is necessary for locking and un-locking the doors and tailgate, starting the engineand otherwise operating the vehicle, so before lock-ing and leaving the vehicle, be sure to check thatyou have the keyless operation key.

WARNINGl People with implantable cardiac pacemak-

ers or implantable cardiovascular-defib-rillators should not go near the exteriortransmitters (A) or the interior transmit-ters (B). The radio waves used by the key-less operation system could adversely af-fect implantable cardiac pacemakers orimplantable cardiovascular-defibrillators.


1-04 OA0X13E4

1

WARNINGl When using electro-medical devices other

than implantable cardiac pacemakers orimplantable cardiovascular-defibrilla-tors, contact the electro-medical devicemanufacturer ahead of time to determinethe affects of radio waves on the devices.Electro-medical device operations couldbe affected by radio waves.

You can limit the possible operations of the keylessoperation system. Please consult a MITSUBISHIMOTORS Authorized Service Point for details.

NOTEl The keyless operation key uses an ultra-weak

electromagnetic wave. In the following ca-

ses, the keyless operation system may not op-erate properly or may be unstable.

• When there is equipment nearby thatemits strong radio waves, such as: a pow-er station, a radio/TV broadcasting sta-tion or an airport.

• The keyless operation system is carried to-gether with a communications devicesuch as a cellular phone or radio set, orwith an electronic device such as a person-al computer.

• The keyless operation key is touching orcovered by a metal object.

• A keyless entry system is being used near-by.

• When the keyless operation key battery isworn out.

• When the keyless operation key is placedin an area with strong radio waves or noise.In such cases, use the emergency key.Refer to “To operate without using thekeyless operation function” on page1-07.

l Because the keyless operation key receivessignals in order to communicate with the trans-mitters in the vehicle, the battery continuallywears down regardless of keyless operationkey use. The battery life is 1 to 3 years, de-pending on usage conditions. When the bat-tery wears out, have it replaced aMITSUBISHI MOTORS Authorized ServicePoint.

l Because the keyless operation key continual-ly receives signals, strong radio wave recep-tion could affect battery wear. Do not leavethe key near a TV, personal computer, or oth-er electronic device.

Operating range of the keyless opera-tion system

E00305700543

If you are carrying the keyless operation key, enterthe operating range of the keyless operation sys-tem, and press the driver’s door switch, or the tail-gate switch, the ID code for your key is verified.You can only lock and unlock the doors and tail-gate, start the engine and change the operationmode if the ID codes of your keyless operation keyand the vehicle match.

NOTEl If the keyless operation key battery is wear-

ing out or there are strong electromagneticwaves or noise present, the operating rangemay become smaller and operation may be-come unstable.


1-05OA0X13E4

1

Operating range for locking and unlocking thedoors and tailgate

E00306200529

The operating range is approximately 70 cm fromthe driver’s door switch and the tailgate switch.

* : Forward direction

: Operating range

NOTEl Locking and unlocking are only possible

when the door or tailgate is operated whilethe keyless operation key is being detected.

l Operation may not be possible if you are tooclose to the front door, door window, or tail-gate.

l Even if the keyless operation key is within70 cm of the driver’s door switch or the tail-gate switch, if the key is near to the groundor high up, the system may not operate.

l If the keyless operation key is within the op-erating range, even someone not carrying thekey can lock and unlock the doors and tail-gate by pressing the driver’s door switch orthe tailgate switch.

Operating range for starting the engine and chang-ing the operation mode

E00306300272

The operating range is the interior of the vehicle.

*: Forward direction

: Operating range

NOTEl Even if it is within the operating range, if the

keyless operation key is in a small item hold-er such as the glove box, on top of the instru-ment panel, door pocket or in the luggagecompartment, it may be impossible to startthe engine and change the operation mode.

l If you are too close to the door or door win-dow, the engine may start even though thekeyless operation key is outside the vehicle.

To operate using the keyless operationfunction

E00305800977

Driver’s door switch

Tailgate switch

Locking the doors and tailgateWhen you are carrying the keyless operation key,if you press the driver’s door switch (A), or the tail-gate switch (B) within the operating range, thedoors and the tailgate are locked.The turn-signal lamps will blink once and the outerbuzzer will sound once.Also refer to “Locking and unlocking: Doors, Cen-tral door locks, tailgate” on pages 1-12, 1-13 and1-14.


1-06 OA0X13E4

1

Unlocking the doors and tailgateWhen you are carrying the keyless operation key,if you press the driver’s door switch (A), or the tail-gate switch (B) within the operating range, all thedoors and tailgate are unlocked.If the room lamp switch is in the middle (•) posi-tion at this time, the room lamp will turn on for 15seconds. The turn-signal lamps will blink twice andthe outer buzzer will sound twice.If the driver’s door switch is pressed and any of thedoors or tailgate is not opened within approximate-ly 30 seconds, relocking will automatically occur.Refer to “Locking and unlocking: Doors, Centraldoor locks, tailgate” on pages 1-12, 1-13 and1-14.

NOTEl The keyless operation function does not oper-

ate under the following conditions:• The keyless operation key is inside the ve-

hicle.• A door or the tailgate is open or ajar.• The operation mode is not in OFF.

l The time between unlocking and automaticlocking can be adjusted. Consult aMITSUBISHI MOTORS Authorized ServicePoint.

Operation confirmation when locking and un-lockingOperation can be confirmed as shown below. How-ever, the room lamp will illuminate only if theroom lamp switch is in the middle (•) position.

When locking: The turn-signal lampsblink once and the out-er buzzer sounds once.

When unlocking: The room lamp illumi-nates for approximately15 seconds, the turn-sig-nal lamps blink twice,and the outer buzzersounds twice.

NOTEl Functions can be modified as stated below.

For further information, please contact aMITSUBISHI MOTORS Authorized ServicePoint.

• Activating the operation confirmationfunction (blinking of the turn-signallamps) only during locking, or only dur-ing unlocking.

• Disabling the operation confirmation func-tion (blinking of the turn-signal lamps)and outer buzzer.

• Changing the number of blinks for the op-eration confirmation function (blinkingof the turn-signal lamps).

To lock/unlock without using the key-less operation function

E00306000165

Emergency keyE00307200467

The emergency key (A) can only be used to lockand unlock the front passenger’s door. To use theemergency key, unlock the lock knob (B) and re-move it from the keyless operation key (C).

NOTEl Only use the emergency key for emergen-

cies. If the keyless operation key batterywears out, replace it as quickly as possible sothat you can use the keyless operation key.

l The emergency key is built in the keyless op-eration key.

l After using the emergency key, always re-turn it into the original position.


1-07OA0X13E4

1

Locking and unlocking the front passenger’sdoorTurning the emergency key in the forward direc-tion locks the door, and turning it in the rear direc-tion unlocks the door. Also refer to “Locking andunlocking: Doors” on page 1-12.

1- Lock2- Unlock


1-08 OA0X13E4

1

Warning activatorE00305900691

In order to prevent vehicle theft or the accidental operation of the keyless operation system, the lamp and buzzer are used to alert the driver.

Lamp Buzzer Item Cause Note (Solution)

Blinks Outer buzzer sounds4 times. Inner buzzersounds.

Keyless operationkey take-out monitor-ing system

When the vehicle is parked with the opera-tion mode in any mode other than OFF, ifyou close the door after opening any of thedoors and taking the keyless operation keyout of the vehicle.

l If you take the keyless operation keyout of the vehicle through a windowwithout opening a door, this systemdoes not operate.

l It is possible to change the setting tomake the system operate if you takethe keyless operation key out from thevehicle through a window withoutopening a door. For further informa-tion, please contact a MITSUBISHIMOTORS Authorized Service Point.

l Even if you have the keyless operationkey within the engine start operatingrange, if the key and vehicle ID codescannot be matched, for example due tothe ambient environment or electro-magnetic conditions, the warning maybe activated.

Blinks Outer buzzer soundsapproximately 3 sec-onds

Key lock-in preven-tion system

When the operation mode is in OFF, if youclose all the doors and the tailgate with thekeyless operation key left in the vehicle andyou try to lock the doors and tailgate by press-ing the driver’s switch, or the tailgate switch.

Make sure you have the keyless operationkey with you before locking the doors. Evenif you leave the keyless operation key insidethe vehicle, it is possible that the doors willlock depending on the surrounding environ-ment and wireless signal conditions.


Door ajar preventionsystem

When the operation mode is in OFF, if youtry to lock the doors and tailgate by pressingthe driver’s door switch, or the tailgateswitch with one of the doors or the tailgatenot completely closed.

—


1-09OA0X13E4

1


Blinks No sounds Keyless operationsystem

The battery in the keyless operation key hasworn out.

Replace the battery as soon as possible at aMITSUBISHI MOTORS Authorized ServicePoint.

Illuminates There is a fault in the keyless operation sys-tem.

If the warning lamp illuminates, please con-tact a MITSUBISHI MOTORS AuthorizedService Point.Inner buzzer sounds

(intermittent sounds)There is a fault in the electrical system.

Inner buzzer sounds(continuous sounds)

Immediately stop the vehicle in a safe placeand contact a MITSUBISHI MOTORS Au-thorized Service Point.

Blinks Outer buzzer soundsapproximately 3 sec-onds Inner buzzersounds approximate-ly 1 minute.

Keyless operationkey reminder

When the operation mode is in OFF with thekeyless operation key left in the key slot, ifyou try to open the driver’s door.

Remove the keyless operation key from thekey slot.Refer to “Starting” on page 4-12.

Illuminates Inner buzzer sounds Steering wheel lock There is a fault in the steering wheel lock sys-tem.

Refer to “Steering wheel lock” on page4-11.


Operation mode OFFreminder system

When the operation mode is in any mode oth-er than OFF with all the doors and the tail-gate are closed, if you try to lock by usingthe driver’s door switch or the tailgate switch.

Refer to “Operation mode OFF reminder sys-tem” on page 4-10.


Illuminates No sounds Immobilizer system There is a fault in the electronic immobilizer(Anti-theft starting system).

Put the operation mode in OFF and then startthe engine again. If the warning is not cancel-led, contact a MITSUBISHI MOTORS Au-thorized Service Point.


1-10 OA0X13E4

1


Blinks Inner buzzer sounds Steering wheel lock Steering wheel does not unlock. Unlock the steering wheel lock following theprocedure of reference page.Refer to “Steering wheel lock” on page4-11.

Illuminates No sounds Steering wheel lock is abnormal. Refer to “Steering wheel lock” on page4-11.


1-11OA0X13E4

1

DoorsE00300402334

CAUTIONl Make sure the doors are closed: driving

with doors not completely closed is dan-gerous.

l Never leave children in the vehicle unat-tended.

l Be careful not to lock the doors while thekey is inside the vehicle.

To lock or unlock with the key

1- Lock2- Unlock

To lock or unlock from inside the vehi-cle

1- Lock2- Unlock

NOTEl The driver’s door can be opened without us-

ing the lock knob by pulling on the insidedoor handle.

To lock without using the key

Set the inside lock knob (1) to the locked position,and close the door (2).

NOTEl The driver’s door cannot be locked using the

inside lock knob while the driver’s door isopened.

Ignition key reminder*E00300500126

Except for vehicles equipped with the keyless op-eration systemIf the ignition switch is turned off and the driver’sdoor is opened with the key in the ignition switch,the key reminder buzzer will sound intermittentlyto remind you to remove the key.

“Forgotten-key-prevention” mecha-nism*

E00300600329

If the key is in the ignition switch or the operationmode is other than OFF, when you push the lockknob forward with the driver’s door open, the lockknob will automatically return to the unlocked posi-tion.


1-12 OA0X13E4

1

Central door locks*E00300801995

NOTEl Repeated continuous operation between lock

and unlock could activate the central doorlocking systems built-in protection circuitand prevent the system from operating. Ifthis occurs, wait approximately 1 minute be-fore operating the central door lock system.

All of the doors and the tailgate can be locked andunlocked as described hereafter.

Driver’s door with key (except for ve-hicles with keyless operation system)Using the key on the driver’s door locks or unlocks.

1- Lock2- Unlock

Driver’s door with inside lock knobUsing the door lock knob on the driver’s doorlocks or unlocks all doors and the tailgate.

1- Lock2- Unlock

NOTEl Be careful not to lock the doors while the

key is inside the vehicle when getting off thevehicle.

Using the selector lever position (CVT)On vehicles with the keyless entry system or thekeyless operation system, it is possible to unlockall of the doors and the tailgate using the selectorlever by placing the selector lever in the “P”(PARK) position while the ignition switch or the op-eration mode is in the “ON” position.

NOTEl The vehicle is shipped from the factory with

a setting established such that the doors andthe tailgate are not unlocked when the selec-tor lever is placed in the “P” (PARK) posi-tion with the ignition switch in the “ON” po-sition. If you wish to change the setting suchthat the doors are unlocked, please contact aMITSUBISHI MOTORS Authorized ServicePoint.


1-13OA0X13E4

1

“Child-protection” rear doorsE00300901039

1- Lock2- Unlock

Child protection helps prevent doors from beingopened accidentally, especially when small chil-dren are in the rear seat.A lever is provided on each rear door.If the lever is set to the locked position, the reardoor cannot be opened using the inside handle.To open the rear door while the child protection isin use, pull the outside door handle.If the lever is set to the “Unlock” position, thechild protection mechanism does not function.

CAUTIONl When driving with a child in the rear

seat, please use the child protection to pre-vent accidental door opening which maycause an accident.

TailgateE00301401275

WARNINGl It is dangerous to drive with the tailgate

open, since carbon monoxide (CO) gascan enter the cabin.You cannot see or smell CO. It can causeunconsciousness and even death.

l When opening and closing the tailgate,make sure that there are no people near-by and be careful not to hit your head orpinch your hands, neck, etc.

NOTEl Locking/unlocking with the inside lock knob

of the driver’s door, the keyless entry systemor the keyless operation function also locks/unlocks the tailgate.

To openAfter unlocking the tailgate, pull the tailgate handleupward to open.

1- Unlock

CAUTIONl Make sure there is no one standing near-

by when opening the tailgate.

To closePull the tailgate grip (A) downward as illustrated.Gently push the tailgate from the outside withenough force so that it is completely closed. Al-ways ensure the tailgate is securely closed.

CAUTIONl When closing the tailgate, always ensure

your or other person’s fingers cannot becaught by the tailgate.

l Before driving, make sure that the tail-gate is securely closed.If the tailgate opens while driving the ve-hicle, objects stored in the luggage com-partment could fall out onto the road.


1-14 OA0X13E4

1

NOTEl Gas struts (B) are installed to support the tail-

gate. To prevent damage or faulty operation,• Do not hold the gas struts when closing

the tailgate.• Also, do not push or pull the gas struts.• Do not attach any plastic material, tape,

etc., to the gas struts.• Do not tie string, etc., around the gas struts.• Do not hang any object on the gas struts.

Manual window control*E00302100096

1- To open2- To close

Electric window control*E00302200576

The electric windows can only be operated with theignition switch or the operation mode in ON.

Electric window control switchE00302301893

Each door window opens or closes while the corre-sponding switch is operated.


Drive’s switchr (Type 2)


1-15OA0X13E4

1


1- Driver’s door window2- Front passenger’s door window3- Rear left door window4- Rear right door window5- Lock switch

WARNINGl Before operating the electric window con-

trol, make sure that nothing can get trap-ped (head, hand, finger, etc.).

l Never leave the vehicle without removingthe key.

l Never leave a child (or other person whomight not be capable of safe operation ofthe electric window control) in the vehiclealone.

Driver’s switches

Type 1The driver’s switches can be used to operate alldoor windows.A window can be opened or closed by operatingthe corresponding switch.Press the switch down to open the window, andpull up the switch to close it.

If the switch for the driver’s window is fully press-ed down/pulled up, the door window automaticallyopens/closes completely.If you want to stop the window movement, operatethe switch lightly in the reverse direction.

Type 2The driver’s switches can be used to operate frontdoor windows. Press the switch down to open thewindow, and pull up the switch to close it.If the switch for the driver’s window is fully press-ed down, the door window automatically opens com-pletely.If you want to stop the window movement, operatethe switch lightly in the reverse direction.

Type 3Press the switch down for opening the window,and pull up the switch for closing it.

Passenger’s switches*The passenger’s switches can be used to operatethe corresponding passenger’s door windows.Press the switch down for opening the window,and pull up the switch for closing it.

NOTEl Repeated operation with the engine stopped

will run down the battery. Operate the win-dow switches only while the engine is running.

l The rear door windows only open halfway.

Lock switch (Type 1 and 2)E00303101292

When this switch is operated, the passenger’sswitches cannot be used to open or close the doorwindows and the driver’s switch cannot open orclose any door windows other than the driver’sdoor window.To unlock, press it once again.

1- Lock2- Unlock


1-16 OA0X13E4

1

WARNINGl A child may tamper with the switch at

the risk of its hands or head being trap-ped in the window. When driving with achild in the vehicle, please press the win-dow lock switch to disable the passen-ger’s switches.

Timer functionE00302401041

The door windows can be opened or closed for 30seconds after the engine is stopped.However, once the driver’s door or the front passen-ger’s door is opened, the windows cannot be oper-ated.

Safety mechanism (driver’s window ofType 1 only)

E00302500827

If a hand or head is trapped in the closing window,it will lower automatically.Nonetheless, make sure that nobody puts their heador hand out of the window when closing the driv-er’s door window.The lowered window will become operational aftera few seconds.

WARNINGl If the battery terminals are disconnected

or the fuse for electric window is re-placed, the safety mechanism will be can-celled.If a hand or head got trapped, a seriousinjury could result.

CAUTIONl The safety mechanism is cancelled just be-

fore the window is fully closed. This al-lows the window to close completely.Therefore be especially careful that no fin-gers are trapped in the window.

l The safety mechanism is deactivatedwhile the switch is pulled up. Thereforebe especially careful that fingers are nottrapped in the door window opening.

NOTEl The safety mechanism can be activated if the

driving conditions or other circumstancescause the driver’s door window to be subjec-ted to a physical shock similar to that causedby a trapped hand or head.

l If the battery terminals are disconnected orthe fuse for electric window is replaced, thesafety mechanism will be cancelled and thedoor window will not automatically open/close completely.If the window is open, repeatedly raise thedriver’s door window switch until the win-dow has been fully closed. Following this, re-lease the switch, raise the switch once againand hold it in this condition for at least 1 sec-ond, then release it. You should now be ableto operate the driver’s door window in the nor-mal fashion.


1-17OA0X13E4

1

OA0X13E4

Seat adjustment.............................................................................2-02Front seat......................................................................................2-02Rear seat.......................................................................................2-03Head restraints..............................................................................2-04Seat belts.......................................................................................2-05Pregnant women restraint.............................................................2-08Seat belt pretensioner system and force limiter system................2-08Child restraint...............................................................................2-09Seat belt inspection.......................................................................2-17Supplemental restraint system (SRS) - airbag..............................2-17

Seat and seat belts

OA0X13E4

2

Seat adjustmentE00400300558

Adjust the driver’s seat so that you are comfortableand that you can reach the pedals, steering wheel,switches etc. while retaining a clear field of vision.

WARNINGl Do not attempt to adjust the seat while

driving. This can cause loss of vehicle con-trol and result in an accident. After ad-justments are made, ensure the seating islocked in position by attempting to movethe seat forward and rearward without us-ing the adjusting mechanism.

l Do not allow people or children to ride inany area of your vehicle that is not equip-ped with seats and seat belts, and makesure that everyone travelling in your vehi-cle is in a seat and wearing a seat belt, orin the case of a child is strapped in a childrestraint.

l To minimize the risk of personal injuryin the event of a collision or sudden brak-ing, the seatbacks should always be in thealmost upright position while the vehicleis in motion. The protection provided bythe seat belts may be reduced significant-ly when the seatback is reclined. There isgreater risk that the passenger will slideunder the seat belt, resulting in serious in-jury, when the seatback is reclined.

CAUTIONl Make sure the seat is adjusted by an

adult or with adult supervision for cor-rect and safe operation.

l Do not place a cushion or the like be-tween your back and the seatback whiledriving. The effectiveness of the head re-straints will be reduced in the event of anaccident.

l When sliding the seats, be careful not tocatch your hand or foot.

Front seatE00400400230

1- To adjust forward or backwardLift the handle and adjust the seat to the de-sired position, and release the handle.

2- To recline the seatbackPull the lever up and then lean backward tothe desired position, and release the lever.

3- To adjust seat cushion height (driver’s sideonly)*Turn the dial and adjust the seat cushionheight to the desired position.

CAUTIONl The reclining mechanism of the seatback

is spring loaded, causing it to return tothe vertical position when the lock leveris operated. When using the lever, sitclose to the seatback or hold it with yourhand to control its return motion.

Seat and seat belts

2-02 OA0X13E4

2

Heated seats*E00401101130

The heated seats can be operated with the ignitionswitch or the operation mode is in ON. Operate theswitch as indicated by arrows. The indication lamp(A) will illuminate while the heater is on.

1 (HI) - Heater high (for quick heating).2 - Heater off.3 (LO) - Heater low (to keep the seat warm).

CAUTIONl Operate in the high position for quick heat-

ing. Once the seat is warm, set the heaterto low to keep it warm. Slight variationsin seat temperature may be felt while us-ing the heated seats. This is caused by theoperation of the heater’s internal thermo-stat and does not indicate a malfunction.

l If the following types of persons use theheated seats, they might become too hot

CAUTIONor receive minor burns (red skin, heat blis-ters, etc.):

• Children, elderly or ill people• People with sensitive skin• Excessively tired people• People under the influence of alcohol

or sleep inducing medication (coldmedicine, etc.)

l Do not place heavy objects on the seat orstick pins, needles, or other pointed ob-jects into it.

l Do not use a blanket, cushion, or other ma-terial with high heat insulation propertieson the seat while using the heater; thismight cause the heater element to overheat

l Do not use benzine, kerosene, petrol, alco-hol or other organic solvents when clean-ing the seats. Doing so could damage notonly the seat cover, but also the heater el-ement.

l If water or any other liquid is spilled onthe seat, allow it to dry thoroughly beforeattempting to use the heater.

l Turn the heater off immediately if it ap-pears to be malfunctioning during use.

Rear seatE00401300018

Folding the seatbacks forwardE00401600428

The passenger and luggage compartments can bejoined by folding the rear seatback forward. This isuseful for carrying long objects.

To fold1. If your vehicle is equipped with head re-

straints, place each head restraint in its low-est position. (Refer to “Head restraints” onpage 2-04.)

2. Pull the left or right release bands (A), andfold the rear seatbacks forward.

3. Store the seat belt plate of the outboard seat-ing position. (Refer to “Rear seat belt stor-age” on page 2-07.)

To return1. Confirm that the seat belt plate of the out-

board seating position is stored.

Seat and seat belts

2-03OA0X13E4

2

2. Raise the seatbacks until it locks securely in-to place.Push lightly on the seatbacks to confirm thatit has actually been secured.

Head restraintsE00403301644

WARNINGl Driving without the head restraints in

place can cause you and your passengersserious injury or death in an accident. Toreduce the risk of injury in an accident, al-ways make sure the head restraints are in-stalled and properly positioned when theseat is occupied.

l Never place a cushion or similar deviceon the seatback. This can adversely affecthead restraint performance by increasingthe distance between your head and therestraint.

l When a person sits in the rear seat, pullup the head restraint to a height at whichit locks in position. Be sure to make thisadjustment before starting to drive. Seri-ous injuries could otherwise be sufferedas the result of an impact.

To adjust heightAdjust the head restraint height so that the centreof the restraint is as close as possible to ear level toreduce the chances of injury in the event of colli-sion. Any person too tall for the restraint to reachtheir seated ear level, should adjust the restraint ashigh as possible.To raise the head restraint, move it upward. To low-er the restraint, move it downward while pushingthe height adjusting knob (A) in the direction of thearrow. After adjustment, push the head restraintdownward and make sure that it is locked.

To removeLift the head restraint with the height adjustingknob (A) pushed in.

To installConfirm that the head restraint is facing the correctdirection, and then insert it into the seatback whilepressing the height adjusting knob (A) in the direc-tion indicated by the arrow.

Seat and seat belts

2-04 OA0X13E4

2

The head restraint stalk with the adjustment notch-es (B) must be installed in the hole with the adjust-ing knob (A).

CAUTIONl Confirm that the height adjusting knob

(A) is correctly adjusted as shown in theillustration, and also lift the head re-straints to ensure that they do not comeout of the seatback.

CAUTIONl The shape and size of the head restraint

differs according to the seat. Always usethe correct head restraint provided forthe seat and do not install the head re-straint in the wrong direction.

Seat beltsE00404800883

To protect you and your passengers in the event ofan accident, it is most important that the seat beltsare worn correctly while driving.The front seat belt have a pretensioner system.These belts are used the same way as a convention-al seat belt.Refer to “Seat belt pretensioner system and forcelimiter system” on page 2-08.

WARNINGl Seat belts should always be worn by ev-

ery adult who drives or rides in this vehi-cle, and by all children who are tallenough to wear seat belts properly.Other children should always use properchild restraint systems.

l Always place the shoulder belt over yourshoulder and across your chest. Neverput it behind you or under your arm.

l One seat belt should be used by only oneperson. Doing otherwise can be dangerous.

l The seat belt will provide its wearer withmaximum protection if the recliner seat-back is placed in fully upright position.When the seatback is reclined, there isgreater risk that the passenger will slideunder the belt, especially in a forward im-pact accident, and may be injured by thebelt or by striking the instrument panelor seatbacks.

l Remove any twists when using the belt.

Seat and seat belts

2-05OA0X13E4

2

WARNINGl No modifications or additions should be

made by the user which will either pre-vent the seat belt adjusting devices fromoperating to remove slack, or prevent theseat belt assembly from being adjusted toremove slack.

l Never hold a child in your arms or onyour lap when riding in this vehicle, evenif you are wearing your seat belt. To doso risks severe or fatal injury to the childin a collision or sudden stop.

l Always adjust the belt to a snug fit.l Always wear the lap portion of the belt

over your hips.

3-point type seat belt (with emergencylocking mechanism)

E00404901155

This type of belt requires no length adjustment.Once worn, the belt adjusts itself to the movementof the wearer, but in the event of a sudden or strongshock, the belt automatically locks to hold the wear-er’s body.

NOTEl You can check if the belt locks by pulling it

forward quickly.

To fasten1. Pull the seat belt out slowly while holding

the latch plate.

NOTEl When the seat belts cannot be pulled out in a

locked condition, pull the belts once forceful-ly and then return them. After that, pull thebelts out slowly once again.

2. Insert the latch plate into the buckle until a“click” is heard.

WARNINGl Never wear the lap portion of the belt

across your abdomen. During accidents itcan press sharply against the abdomenand increase the risk of injury.

l The seat belts must not be twisted whenworn.

3. Pull the belt slightly to adjust slackness as de-sired.

To unfastenHold the latch plate and push the button on the buck-le.

NOTEl As the belt retracts automatically, keep hold-

ing the latch plate while retracting so that thebelt stows slowly. Failure to do this coulddamage the vehicle.

Seat belt reminderE00409800947

Seat and seat belts

2-06 OA0X13E4

2

If the ignition switch is turned to the “ON” positionor the operation mode is put in ON while a seatbelt is not fastened, the warning lamp comes onand the tone sounds for about 6 seconds to remindthe driver and the front passenger to fasten the seatbelt.If the vehicle is driven with the seat belt still unfas-tened, the warning lamp will blink and the tonewill sound intermittently until the seat belt is fas-tened.

NOTEl If the seat belt subsequently remains unfas-

tened, the warning lamp and the tone will is-sue further warnings each time the vehiclestarts moving from a stop.

l For the front passenger seat, the warning func-tion works only while a person is sitting onthe seat.

l When luggage is placed on the front passen-ger seat, a sensor in the seat cushion may, de-pending on the weight and position of the lug-gage, cause the warning tone to sound andthe warning lamp to come on.

Adjustable seat belt anchor (frontseats)*

E00405000563

The seat belt anchor height can be adjusted.

To move the anchor, pull the lock knob (A) andslide the anchor to the desired position. Release thelock knob to lock the anchor into position.

WARNINGl When adjusting the seat belt anchor, set

it at a position that is sufficiently high sothat the belt will make full contact withyour shoulder but will not touch your neck.

Rear seat belt storageE00405400059

When folded the rear seatbacks forward, store theseat belts as shown in the illustration.

Seat and seat belts

2-07OA0X13E4

2

Pregnant women restraintE00405600064

WARNINGl Seat belts work for everyone, including

pregnant women. Pregnant womenshould use the available seat belts. Thiswill reduce the likelihood of injury toboth the woman and the unborn child.The lap belt should be worn across thethighs and as snug against the hips as pos-sible, but not across the waist. Consultyour doctor if you have any additionalquestions or concerns.

Seat belt pretensioner system andforce limiter system

E00405700166

The driver’s seat and front passenger’s seat eachhave a seat belt equipped with a pretensioner system.

Pretensioner systemE00405801249

When the ignition switch or the operation mode isunder the following conditions, if there is a frontalimpact severe enough to injure the and/or front pas-senger, the pretensioner system will retract their re-spective seat belts instantaneously, thus maximiz-ing the seat belt’s effectiveness.[Except for vehicles equipped with keyless opera-tion system]The ignition switch is in the “ON” or “START” po-sition.[Vehicles equipped with keyless operation system]The operation mode is in ON.

WARNINGl To obtain the best results from your pre-

tensioner seat belt, make sure you have ad-justed your seat correctly and wear yourseat belt properly.

CAUTIONl Installation of audio equipment or re-

pairs in the vicinity of the pretensionerseat belts or floor console must be per-formed in line with MITSUBISHIMOTORS guidelines. It is important todo so because the work could affect thepretensioner systems.

CAUTIONl If you need to scrap the vehicle, please con-

sult a MITSUBISHI MOTORS Author-ized Service Point. It is important to doso because unexpected activation of thepretensioner seat belts could cause inju-ries.

NOTEl The pretensioner seat belts will be activated

if the vehicle suffers a severe frontal impact,even if the seat belts are not worn.

l The pretensioner seat belts are designed towork only once. After the pretensioner seatbelts have been activated, we recommendyou have them replaced by a MITSUBISHIMOTORS Authorized Service Point.

SRS warning lampE00405900083

This warning lamp is shared by the SRS airbagsand the pretensioner seat belts.Refer to “SRS warning lamp” on page 2-25.

Force limiter systemE00406000153

In the event of a collision, each force limiter sys-tem will effectively absorb the load applied to theseat belt to minimize the impact to the passenger.

Seat and seat belts

2-08 OA0X13E4

2

Child restraintE00406401835

When transporting children in your vehicle, sometype of child restraint system should always beused according to the size of the child. This is re-quired by law in most countries.The regulations concerning driving with children inthe front seat may differ from country to country.You are advised to comply with the relevant regula-tions.

WARNINGl When possible, put children in the rear

seat. Accident statistics indicate that chil-dren of all sizes and ages are safer whenproperly restrained in the rear seat rath-er than in the front seat.

l Holding a child in your arms is no substi-tute for a restraint system. Failure to usea proper restraint system can result in se-vere or fatal injury to the child.

l Each child restraint device or fixing is tobe used only by one child.

l When attaching a child restraint systemto the rear seat, prevent the front seat-backs from touching the child restraintsystem.Otherwise, the child could be seriously in-jured in the event of hard braking or a col-lision.

Caution for installing the child re-straint on vehicles with a front passen-ger airbag

E00406500510

The label shown here is attached on vehicles with afront passenger airbag.

WARNINGl Extreme Hazard!

NEVER use a rearward facing child re-straint on a seat protected by an AC-TIVE AIRBAG in front of it, DEATH orSERIOUS INJURY to the CHILD can oc-cur.

Use rearward facing child restraints in the rear seator turn off the front passenger’s airbag ON-OFFswitch. (Refer to “To turn an airbag off” on page2-19)

Front passenger’s airbag ON

WARNINGl A REARWARD FACING CHILD RE-

STRAINT must NOT be used in the frontpassenger seat if the front passenger’s air-bag has not been deactivated. The forceof an inflating airbag could kill or causeserious injuries to the child. A rearwardfacing child restraint should be used inthe rear seat.

l A FORWARD FACING CHILD RE-STRAINT should be used in the rear seatwhenever possible; if it must be used inthe front passenger seat, turn off thefront passenger’s airbag ON-OFF switch.Failure to do so could kill or cause seri-ous injuries to the child.

Seat and seat belts

2-09OA0X13E4

2

Infants and small childrenE00406600872

When transporting infants and small children inyour vehicle, follow the instruction given below.

Instruction:l For small infants, an infant carrier should be

used. For small children whose height whenseated allows the shoulder belt to lie in con-tact with the face or the throat, a child seatshould be used.

l The child restraint system should be appropri-ate for the child’s weight and height and prop-erly fit in the vehicle. For a higher degree ofsafety: THE CHILD RESTRAINT SYSTEMSHOULD BE INSTALLED IN THE REARSEAT.

l Before purchasing a child restraint system,try installing it in the rear seat to make surethere is a good fit. Because of the location ofthe seat belt buckles and the shape of the seatcushion, it may be difficult to securely installsome manufacturer’s child restraint systems.If the child restraint system can be pulled for-ward or to either side easily on the seat cush-ion after the seat belt has been tightened,choose another manufacturer’s child restraintsystem.

WARNINGl When installing a child restraint system,

refer to the instructions provided by themanufacturer of the restraint system. Fail-ure to do so can result in severe or fatalinjury to the child.

l After installation, push and pull the childrestraint system back and forth, and sideto side, to see that it is properly secured.If the child restraint system is not instal-led securely, it may cause injury to thechild or other occupants in the case of ac-cident or sudden stops.

l When the child restraint system is not inuse, keep your child restraint system se-cured with the seat belt or remove it fromthe vehicle in order to prevent it from be-ing thrown around inside the vehicle dur-ing an accident.

NOTEDepending on the seating position in the ve-hicle and the child restraint system that you

have, the child restraint can be attached us-ing one of the following two locations:

• To the lower anchorage in the rear seat,ONLY if the child restraint has ISOFIXmountings (See page 2-15).

• To the seat belt (See 2-16).

Older childrenE00406700310

Children who have outgrown the child restraint sys-tem should be seated in the rear seat and wear com-bination lap shoulder belt.The lap portion of the belt should be snug and posi-tioned low on the abdomen so that it is below thetop of the hip-bone. Otherwise, the belt could in-trude into the child’s abdomen during an accidentand cause injury.

Seat and seat belts

2-10 OA0X13E4

2

Suitability for various ISOFIX positionsE00411400663

Mass group Size class FixtureVehicle ISOFIX positions Recommended Child Restraint

System*1ECE No.

Rear (Left side/Right side)

Carrycot F ISO/L1 X — —

G ISO/L2 X — —

0 - Up to 10 kg E ISO/R1 X — —

0+ - Up to 13 kg E ISO/R1 IL BABY-SAFE plus: MZ314393BABY-SAFE ISOFIX BASE:

MZ314394

E1-04301146

D ISO/R2 IL G 0/1 S (Child restraint systemfor East area): MZ314390E

G 0/1 S (Child restraint systemfor Central-South area):

MZ314390CS0/1 S (Child restraint system for

North area): MZ314390NRWF ISOFIX BASE (Rearward

facing ISOFIX base for ALLarea): MZ314417

E4-04443718

C ISO/R3 IL

I - 9 to 18 kg D ISO/R2 IL

C ISO/R3 IL

B ISO/F2 IUF — —

B1 ISO/F2X IUF, IL DUO plus: MZ313045 E1-04301133

A ISO/F3 IUF — —

II - 15 to 25 kg X — —

III - 22 to 36 kg X — —*1: MITSUBISHI MOTORS Europe B.V. reserves the right to changes without prior announcement.For further information, please contact a MITSUBISHI MOTORS Authorized Service Point.

Seat and seat belts

2-11OA0X13E4

2

CAUTIONl When installing a child restraint system, remove the head restraint from the seat.

Definition of characters the above table:l IUF- Suitable for ISOFIX forward child restraint systems of universal category approved for use in the mass group.l IL- Suitable for particular ISOFIX child restraint systems of the categories for “specific vehicles”, “restricted”, or “semi-universal”, approved for this type of

vehicle.l X- ISOFIX position not suitable for ISOFIX child restraint systems in this mass group.

Seat and seat belts

2-12 OA0X13E4

2

Suitability for various seating positionsE00406801350

Mass group

Seating position Recommended Child Re-straint System*2

ECE No.

Front passenger Rear

Activated airbag Deactivated Air-bag*1

Left side/Right side Centre

0 - Up to 10 kg X U U X — —

0+ - Up to 13 kg X U, L U, L X BABY-SAFE plus:MZ314393

E1-04301146

I - 9 to 18 kg X U, L U, L X KING plus: MZ314451 E1-04301203

DUO plus: MZ313045 E1-04301133

G 0/1 S (Child restraintsystem for East area):

MZ314390EG 0/1 S (Child restraint

system for Central-Southarea): MZ314390CS

G 0/1 S (Child restraintsystem for North area):

MZ314390N

E4-03443416

II - 15 to 25 kg X U, L U, L XKID plus: MZ314250 E1-04301169

III - 22 to 36 kg X U U X*1: With front passenger’s airbag deactivated by means of front passenger’s airbag ON-OFF switch*2: MITSUBISHI MOTORS Europe B.V. reserves the right to changes without prior announcement.For further information, please contact a MITSUBISHI MOTORS Authorized Service Point.

CAUTIONl When installing a child restraint system, remove the head restraint from the seat.l When installing a child restraint system on the front passenger seat, adjust the front seatback angle to 2 steps rearward from the first locking position.

Seat and seat belts

2-13OA0X13E4

2

Key of characters to be inserted in the table above:l U- Suitable for “universal” category restraints approved for use in this mass group.l L- Suitable for particular child restraint systems. See the above table of “Recommended Child Restraint Systems”.l X- Seat position not suitable for children in this mass group.

Seat and seat belts

2-14 OA0X13E4

2

Installing a child restraint system tothe lower anchorage (ISOFIX child re-straint mountings) and tether anchor-age

E00408900882

Lower anchorage locationYour vehicle’s rear seat is fitted with lower ancho-rages for attaching a child restraint system with ISO-FIX mountings.

Tether anchorage locationsThere are 2 attachment points located on the backof the rear seatbacks. These are for securing a childrestraint system tether strap to each of the 2 rearseating positions in your vehicle.

WARNINGl Child restraint anchorages are designed

to withstand only those loads imposed bycorrectly fitted child restraints. Under nocircumstances are they to be used foradult seat belts, harnesses, or for attach-ing other items or equipment to the vehicle.

Child restraint system with ISOFIX mountingsThe child restraint system is designed only forseats that incorporate lower anchorages. Retain thechild restraint system using the lower anchorages.

It is not necessary to retain the child restraint sys-tem using the vehicle’s seat belts.

A- Child restraint system connectors

Installation:1. Remove any foreign material in or around

the connectors and ensure the vehicle seatbelt is in its normal storage position.

2. Remove the head restraint from the locationin which you wish to install a child restraint.Refer to “Head restraints” on page 2-04.

3. Open the gap a little between the seat cush-ion (A) and the seatback (B) with your handto locate the lower anchorages (C).

4. Push the child restraint system’s connectors(D) into the lower anchorages (C) in accord-ance with the instructions provided by thechild restraint system’s manufacturer.

Seat and seat belts

2-15OA0X13E4

2

A- Vehicle seat cushionB- Vehicle seatbackC- Lower anchorageD- Connector

If your child restraint system requires the useof a tether strap, fasten the tether strap in ac-cordance with step 5.

5. Latch the top tether strap hook (E) of thechild restraint system to the tether anchoragebracket (F) and tighten the top tether strap soit is securely fastened.

6. Push and pull the child restraint system in alldirections to be sure it is firmly secured.

Installing a child restraint system to a3-point type seat belt (with emergencylocking mechanism)

E00407100702

Installation:1. Put a child restraint system on the seat in

which you wish to install it, and remove thehead restraint from the seat. Refer to “Headrestraints” on page 2-04.

2. When installing a child restraint system inthe front passenger seat, adjust seat slide toits most rearward position.

3. Route the belt through the child restraint ac-cording to the child restraint system manufac-turer’s instructions, then insert the latch plateinto the buckle.

4. Remove all slack of a lap belt by pulling thewebbing through the belt’s adjustment feature.3-point type seat belt requires no length ad-justment, remove all slack by using the lock-ing clip.

5. Before putting the child in the restraint, pushand pull the restraint in all directions to besure it is secure. Do this before each use.

WARNINGl For some types of child restraint, the lock-

ing clip (C) should be used to help avoidpersonal injury during a collision or sud-den manoeuvre.It must be fitted and used in accordancewith the child restraint manufacturer’s in-structions.The locking clip must be removed whenthe child restraint is removed.

Seat and seat belts

2-16 OA0X13E4

2

Seat belt inspectionE00406300576

l Check the belts for cuts, worn or frayed web-bing and for cracked or deformed metallicparts. Replace the belt assembly if it is defec-tive.

l A dirty belt should be cleaned with neutral de-tergent in warm water. After rinsing in water,let it dry in the shade. Do not attempt tobleach or re-dye the belts because this will af-fect their characteristics.

WARNINGl We recommend you to have all seat belt

assemblies including retractors and at-taching hardware inspected after any col-lision. We recommend that seat belt as-semblies in use during a collision be re-placed unless the collision was minor andthe belts show no damage and continue tooperate properly.

l Do not attempt to repair or replace anypart of the seat belt assemblies; we recom-mend you to have this work done by aMITSUBISHI MOTORS AuthorizedService Point. Incorrect repair or replace-ment could reduce the effectiveness of thebelts and could result in serious injury inthe event of a collision.

l Once the pretensioner has been activated,it cannot be re-used.It must be replaced together with the re-tractor.

Supplemental restraint system(SRS) - airbag

E00407202244

The information written in this Supplemental Re-straint System (SRS) section contains importantpoints concerning the driver front passenger, sideand curtain airbags.The SRS driver airbag and the SRS front passengerairbag are designed to supplement the primary pro-tection of the driver and front passenger side seatbelt systems by providing those occupants with pro-tection against head and chest injuries in certainmoderate-to-severe frontal collisions. The SRS side airbags are designed to supplementproperly worn seat belts and provide the driver andfront passenger with protection against chest inju-ries in certain moderate-to-severe side impact colli-sions. The SRS curtain airbags are designed to supple-ment properly worn seat belts and provide the driv-er and passengers on the front seat and rear out-board seat with protection against head injuries incertain moderate-to-severe side impact collisions. The SRS is NOT a substitute for the seat belts; formaximum protection in all types of crashes and ac-cidents, seat belts should ALWAYS be worn by ev-eryone who drives or rides in this vehicle.

How the Supplemental Restraint Sys-tem works

E00407301785

The SRS includes the following components:

1- Curtain airbag modules2- Front passenger’s airbag OFF indication lamp3- Airbag module (Driver)4- Airbag module (Passenger)5- Side airbag modules6- Front passenger’s airbag ON-OFF switch

Only when the ignition switch or the operationmode is under the following conditions, the airbagswill operate.[Except for vehicles equipped with keyless opera-tion system]The ignition switch is in the “ON” or “START” po-sition.[Vehicles equipped with keyless operation system]The operation mode is in ON.

Seat and seat belts

2-17OA0X13E4

2

The airbags deployment produces a sudden, loudnoise, and releases some smoke and powder, butthese conditions are not injurious, and do not indi-cate a fire in the vehicle. People with respiratoryproblems may feel some temporary irritation fromchemicals used to produce the deployment; openthe windows after airbag deployment, if safe to doso.The airbags deflate very rapidly after deployment,so there is little danger of obscured vision.

CAUTIONl Airbags inflate at an extremely rapid

speed. In certain situations, contact withinflating airbags can result in abrasions,light cuts, bruises, and the like.

WARNINGl IT IS VERY IMPORTANT TO BE PROP-

ERLY SEATED.A driver or front passenger too close tothe steering wheel or instrument panelduring airbag deployment can be killedor seriously injured.Airbags inflate very fast, and with greatforce.If the driver and passengers are not prop-erly seated and restrained, the airbagsmay not protect you properly, and couldcause serious or fatal injuries when it in-flates.

l Do not sit on the edge of the seat, or leanhead or chest close to the steering wheelor instrument panel. Do not put feet orlegs on or against the instrument panel.

WARNINGl Place all infants and small children in the

rear seat and properly restrained usingan appropriate child restraint system.The rear seat is the safest place for in-fants and children.

WARNINGl Infants and small children should never

be unrestrained, stand up against the in-strument panel or be held in your armsor on your lap. They could be seriously in-jured or killed in a collision, includingwhen the airbag inflates. They should beproperly seated in the rear seat in an ap-propriate child restraint system. See the“Child restraint” section of this owner’smanual.

WARNINGl Older children should be seated in the

rear seat, properly wearing the seat belt,with an appropriate booster seat if needed.

Caution for installing the child re-straint on vehicles with a front passen-ger airbag

E00408800807

The label shown here is attached on vehicles with afront passenger airbag.

Seat and seat belts

2-18 OA0X13E4

2

WARNINGl Extreme Hazard!

NEVER use a rearward facing child re-straint on a seat protected by an AC-TIVE AIRBAG in front of it, DEATH orSERIOUS INJURY to the CHILD can oc-cur.

Front passenger’s airbag ON-OFFswitch

E00410100399

The front passenger’s airbag ON-OFF switch canbe used to disable the front passenger’s airbag. Ifyou have a child restraint system that cannot be fit-ted to any seat other than the front passenger seat,be sure to turn OFF the front passenger’s airbag ON-OFF switch before using it. (Refer to “To turn anairbag off” on page 2-19.)Front passenger’s airbag ON-OFF switch is locatedat shown in the illustration.

Front passenger’s airbag OFF indication lampE00411500198

The front passenger’s airbag OFF indication lampis located at shown in the illustration.

The indication lamp normally comes on when theignition switch is turned to the “ON” position orthe operation mode is put in ON, and goes off afew seconds later.When the front passenger’s airbag ON-OFF switchis turned OFF, the indication lamp will stay on toshow that the front passenger’s airbag is not opera-tional.When the front passenger’s airbag ON-OFF switchis turned ON, the indication lamp goes off to showthat the front passenger’s airbag is operational.

WARNINGl Do not fit any accessory that makes the in-

dication lamp impossible to see, and donot cover the indication lamp with a stick-er. You would not be able to verify the sta-tus of the front passenger’s airbag system.

To turn an airbag off E00410600495

WARNINGl To reduce risk of serious or fatal injury:

• Always remove the key from the igni-tion switch before operating a frontpassenger’s airbag ON-OFF switch.Failure to do so could adversely affectthe airbag performance.

• Wait at least 60 seconds to operate thefront passenger’s airbag ON-OFFswitch after turning the ignitionswitch to the “LOCK” position or put-ting the operation mode in OFF.The SRS airbag system is designed toretain enough voltage to deploy the air-bag.

• Always remove the key from the frontpassenger’s airbag ON-OFF switch af-ter operating that switch. Failure todo so could lead to improper positionof the front passenger’s airbag ON-OFF switch.

• Do not turn OFF the front passen-ger’s airbag ON-OFF switch exceptwhen a child restraint system is fittedto the front passenger seat.

l To reduce risk of serious or fatal injury:

Seat and seat belts

2-19OA0X13E4

2

WARNING• If the indication lamp does not come

on when the front passenger’s airbagON-OFF switch is turned OFF, do notfit a child restraint system to the frontpassenger seat. We recommend you tohave the system inspected by aMITSUBISHI MOTORS AuthorizedService Point.

• If the indication lamp remains onwhen the front passenger’s airbag ON-OFF switch is turned ON, do not al-low anyone to sit on the front passen-ger seat. We recommend you to havethe system inspected by aMITSUBISHI MOTORS AuthorizedService Point.

To turn an airbag off, follow these steps:1. Insert the key into the front passenger’s air-

bag ON-OFF switch, and turn it to the“OFF” position.

2. Remove the key from the key opening of thefront passenger’s airbag ON-OFF switch.

3. Turn the ignition switch to the “ON” posi-tion or put the operation mode in ON. Thefront passenger’s airbag OFF indicationlamp will stay on.

The front passenger’s airbag is now deactivatedand will not deploy until switched on again.

Driver’s and passenger’s front airbagsystem

E00407400864

The driver’s airbag is located under the padded cov-er in the middle of the steering wheel. The front pas-senger’s airbag is contained in the instrument panelabove the glove box.

The front passenger’s airbag deploys at the sametime as the driver’s airbag, even if the passengerseat is not occupied.

Seat and seat belts

2-20 OA0X13E4

2

Deployment of front airbagsE00412500313

The front airbags ARE DESIGNED TO DEPLOYwhen…The front airbags are designed to deploy when thevehicle suffers a moderate to severe frontal impact.A typical condition is shown in the illustration.

1- Head-on collision with a solid wall at aspeed of approximately 25 km/h (16 mph) orhigher

2- Moderate-to-severe frontal impact within theshaded area between the arrows

The front airbags will deploy if the severity of im-pact is above the designed threshold level, compa-rable to an approximately 25 km/h (16 mph) colli-sion when impacting straight into a solid wall thatdoes not move or deform. If the severity of the im-pact is below the above threshold level, the front air-bags may not deploy. However, this thresholdspeed will be considerably higher if the vehiclestrikes an object that absorbs the impact by eitherdeforming or moving (for example, another station-ary vehicle, pole or a guard rail).

Because frontal collisions can easily move you outof position, it is important to always properly wearyour seat belts. Your seat belts will help keep youin a safe distance from the steering wheel and in-strument panel during the initial stages of airbag de-ployment. The initial stage of airbag inflation is themost forceful, and can possibly cause serious or fa-tal injuries. Moreover, the seat belts in your vehicleare your primary means of protection in a collision.The SRS airbags are designed to provide additionalprotection. Therefore, for your safety and the safe-ty of all occupants, be sure to always properly wearyour seat belts.

The front airbags MAY NOT DEPLOY when…With certain types of frontal collisions, the vehi-cle’s body structure is designed to absorb the shockto help protect the occupants from harm. (The vehi-cle body’s front area may deform significantly as itabsorbs the impact.) Under such circumstances, thefront airbags may not deploy irrespective of the de-formation and damage to the vehicle body.

Examples of some typical conditions are shown inthe illustration.

1- Collision with a utility pole, tree or other nar-row objects

2- Vehicle slides under the rear body of a truck3- Oblique frontal impacts

Because the front airbags do not protect the occu-pant in all types of frontal collisions, be sure to al-ways properly wear your seat belts.

Seat and seat belts

2-21OA0X13E4

2

The front airbags ARE NOT DESIGNED TO DE-PLOY when…The front airbags are not designed to deploy in con-ditions where they cannot typically provide protec-tion to the occupant. Such conditions are shown inthe illustration.

1- Rear end collisions2- Side collisions3- Vehicle rolls onto its side or roof

Because the front airbags do not protect the occu-pant in all types of collisions, be sure to always prop-erly wear your seat belts.

The front airbags MAY DEPLOY when…The front airbags may deploy if the bottom of thevehicle suffers a moderate-to-severe impact (under-carriage damage).

Examples of some typical conditions are shown inthe illustration.

1- Collision with an elevated median/island orkerb

2- Vehicle travels over a deep hole/pothole3- Vehicle drives down a steep slope and hits

the ground

Because the front airbags may deploy in certaintypes of unexpected impacts as shown in the illus-tration that can easily move you out of position, itis important to always properly wear your seatbelts. Your seat belts will help keep you in a safedistance from the steering wheel and instrument pan-el during the initial stages of airbag deployment.The initial stage of airbag inflation is the most force-ful and can possibly cause serious or fatal injuriesif you contact it at this stage.

WARNINGl Do not attach anything to the steering

wheel’s padded cover, such as trim mate-rial, badges, etc. It might strike and in-jure an occupant if the airbag inflates.

WARNINGl Do not set anything on, or attach any-

thing to, the instrument panel above theglove box. It might strike and injure an oc-cupant if the airbag inflates.

WARNINGl Do not attach accessories to, or put them

in front of, the windscreen. These objectscould restrict the airbag inflation, orstrike and injure an occupant if the air-bags inflate.

l Do not put packages, pets or other ob-jects between the airbags and the driveror front passenger. It could affect airbagperformance, or could cause injury whenthe airbag inflates.

l Right after the airbag inflation, severalairbag system components will be hot. Donot touch them; you could be burned.

Seat and seat belts

2-22 OA0X13E4

2

WARNINGl The airbag system is designed to work on-

ly once. Once the airbags have deployed,they will not work again. They mustpromptly be replaced, and we recom-mend you to have the entire airbag sys-tem inspected by a MITSUBISHIMOTORS Authorized Service Point.

Side airbag systemE00407600635

The side airbags (A) are contained in the driver andfront passenger seatbacks.The side airbag is designed to inflate only on theside of the vehicle that is impacted, even with nopassenger in the front seat.

The label shown here is attached to the seatbackswith a side airbag.

Curtain airbag systemE00409100676

The curtain airbags are contained in the front pil-lars and roof side rail. The curtain airbag is de-signed to inflate only on the side of the vehicle thatis impacted, even with no passenger in the frontseat or rear seat.

Deployment of side airbags and cur-tain airbags

E00407701503

The side airbags and curtain airbags ARE DE-SIGNED TO DEPLOY when...The side airbags and curtain airbags are designedto deploy when the vehicle suffers a moderate-to-severe side impact to the middle of the passengercompartment.The typical condition is shown in the illustration.

The seat belts in your vehicle are your primarymeans of protection in a collision. The SRS side air-bags and curtain airbags are designed to provide ad-ditional protection. Therefore, for your safety andthe safety of all occupants, be sure to always prop-erly wear your seat belts.

Seat and seat belts

2-23OA0X13E4

2

The side airbags and curtain airbags MAY NOTDEPLOY when...With certain types of side collisions, the vehicle’sbody structure is designed to absorb the shock tohelp protect the occupants from harm. (The vehiclebody’s side area may deform significantly as it ab-sorbs the impact.) Under such circumstances, theside airbags and curtain airbags may not deploy ir-respective of the deformation and damage to the ve-hicle body. Examples of some typical conditionsare shown in the illustration.

1- Side impacts in an area away from the passen-ger compartment

2- Motorcycle or other similar small vehicle col-lides with the side of vehicle

3- Collision with a utility pole, tree or other nar-row object

4- Oblique side impacts5- Vehicle rolls onto its side or roof

Because the side airbags and curtain airbags do notprotect the occupant in all types of side collisions,be sure to always properly wear your seat belts.

The side airbags and curtain airbags ARE NOTDESIGNED TO DEPLOY when…The side airbags and curtain airbags are not de-signed to deploy in conditions where they cannotusually provide protection to the occupant. Typicalconditions are shown in the illustration.

1- Head-on collisions2- Rear end collisions

Because the side airbags and curtain airbags do notprotect the occupant in all types of collisions, besure to always properly wear your seat belts.

WARNINGl The side airbags and curtain airbags are

designed to supplement the driver and pas-senger seat belts in certain side impacts.Seat belts should always be worn proper-ly, and the driver and passenger shouldsit well back and upright without leaningagainst the window or door.

Seat and seat belts

2-24 OA0X13E4

2

WARNINGl The side airbag and curtain airbag inflate

with great force. The driver and passen-ger should not put their arms out of thewindow, and should not lean against thedoor, in order to reduce the risk of seri-ous or possible fatal injury from the de-ploying side airbag and curtain airbag.

WARNINGl Do not allow any rear seat occupant to

hold onto the seatback of either frontseat, in order to reduce risk of injuryfrom the deploying side airbags. Specialcare should be taken with children.

l Do not place any objects near or in frontof the seatback of either front seat. Theycould interfere with proper side airbag in-flation, and also could cause injury ifthrown free by side airbag deployment.

WARNINGl Do not place stickers, labels or additional

trim on the seatback of either front seat.They could interfere with proper side air-bag inflation.

l Do not install seat covers on seats withside airbags.Do not re-cover seats that have side air-bags. This could interfere with properside airbag inflation.

l Do not attach a microphone (A) or anyother device or object around the partwhere the curtain airbags activate suchas on the windscreen, side door glass,front and rear pillars and roof side or as-sist grips. When the curtain airbags in-flate, the microphone or other device orobject will be hurled with great force orthe curtain airbags may not activate cor-rectly, resulting in death or serious injury.

WARNINGl Never install a rearward facing child re-

straint in the front passenger seat. A for-ward facing child restraint should beused in the rear seat whenever possible. Ifa forward facing child restraint must beused in the front passenger seat, adjustthe seat to the most rearward position,and ensure that the child stays in thechild restraint and away from the door.

l Do not allow the child to lean against orclose to the door even if the child is seatedin a child restraint system.The child’s head should also not beleaned against or be close to the areawhere the side airbags and curtain air-bags are located. It is dangerous if theside airbags and curtain airbags inflate.Failure to follow all of these instructionscould lead to serious or fatal injury to thechild.

l We recommend work around and on theside airbags and curtain airbags systemto be done by a MITSUBISHI MOTORSAuthorized Service Point.

SRS warning lampE00407801650

There is a Supplemental Restraint System (“SRS”)warning lamp on the instrument panel. The systemchecks itself and the lamp tells you if there is a prob-lem. When the ignition key is turned to the “ON”or “START” position, or the operation mode is putin ON, the warning lamp should illuminate for sev-eral seconds and then should go out. This meansthe system is ready.

Seat and seat belts

2-25OA0X13E4

2

In an SRS airbag or pretensioner seat belt is not op-erating properly, the warning lamp comes on andstays on.The SRS warning lamp is shared by the SRS airbagand the seat belt pretensioner system.

WARNINGl If any of the following conditions occur,

the SRS and/or seat belt pretensionersare not working properly, and we recom-mend you to have it inspected by aMITSUBISHI MOTORS AuthorizedService Point immediately.

• The SRS warning lamp does not illu-minate when you start the vehicle.

• The SRS warning lamp does not goout after several seconds.

• The SRS warning lamp illuminateswhile driving.

SRS servicingE00407901648

WARNINGl We recommend any maintenance per-

formed on or near the components of theSRS to be performed by a MITSUBISHIMOTORS Authorized Service Point.Improper work on the SRS componentsor wiring could result in inadvertent de-ployment of the airbags, or could renderthe SRS inoperative; either situationcould result in serious injury.

l Do not modify your steering wheel, seatbelt retractor or any other SRS compo-nents. For example, replacement of thesteering wheel, or modifications to thefront bumper or body structure can ad-versely affect SRS performance and leadto possible injury.

l If your vehicle has sustained any damage,we recommend you to have the SRS in-spected to ensure it is in proper workingorder.

l Do not modify your front seats, centre pil-lar and centre console.It can adversely affect SRS performanceand lead to possible injury.

l If you found any tear scratch, crack ordamage to the portion where the airbag isstored, you should have the SRS inspec-ted by a MITSUBISHI MOTORS Author-ized Service Point.

NOTEl If your vehicle has to be scrapped, do this in

line with local legislation and contact aMITSUBISHI MOTORS Authorized ServicePoint to safely dismantle the airbag system.

Seat and seat belts

2-26 OA0X13E4

2

Instruments...................................................................................3-02Multi-information display.............................................................3-02Indication and warning lamps.......................................................3-10Indication lamps...........................................................................3-11Warning lamps..............................................................................3-12Combination headlamps and dipper switch..................................3-14Headlamp levelling switch...........................................................3-16Turn-signal lever...........................................................................3-17Hazard warning flasher switch.....................................................3-18Fog lamp switch............................................................................3-18Wiper and washer switch..............................................................3-19Rear window demister switch.......................................................3-23Horn switch...................................................................................3-24

Instruments and controls

OA0X13E4

3

InstrumentsE00500101453

1- Tachometer*The tachometer indicates the engine speed(r/min). The tachometer helps you to obtainmore economical driving and also warns youof excessive engine speeds (Red zone).

2- Multi-information display ® p. 3-023- Speedometer (km/h or mph + km/h)4- Multi-information display switch

CAUTIONl When driving, watch the tachometer to

make sure that the engine speed indica-tion does not rise into the red zone (exces-sive engine rpm).

Multi-information displayE00519901109

Always stop the vehicle in a safe place before oper-ating.The following information is included on the multi-information display: odometer, tripmeter, meter il-lumination control, service reminder, fuel remain-ing, driving range and average fuel consumption, etc.

1- Information display ® p. 3-032- Service reminder ® p. 3-063- Frozen road warning* ® p. 3-054- Fuel remaining display ® p. 3-065- Selector lever position display* ® p. 4-226- Gearshift indicator* ® p. 4-19

NOTEl When the ignition switch or the operation

mode is OFF, the selector lever position dis-play, gearshift indicator, fuel remaining dis-play and frozen road warning are not dis-played.


3-02 OA0X13E4

3

Information displayE00528200084

Each time you lightly press the multi-information display switch (A), the display switches in the following order.

1- Odometer ® p. 3-042- Tripmeter ® p. 3-043- Tripmeter ® p. 3-044- Meter illumination control ® p. 3-045- Driving range display ® p. 3-04

6- Average fuel consumption display ® p. 3-057- AS&G monitor* ® p. 3-058- Outside temperature display* ® p. 3-059- Service reminder (distance) ® p. 3-06

10- Service reminder (month) ® p. 3-06

NOTEl When the ignition switch or the operation mode is OFF, the driving range display, average fuel consumption display and outside temperature display are not

displayed.l While driving, the service reminder is not displayed even if you operate the multi-information display switch.


3-03OA0X13E4

3

OdometerE00527800067

The odometer indicates the distance travelled.

TripmeterE00527900071

The tripmeter indicates the distance travelled be-tween two points. Example usage of tripmeter and tripmeter

It is possible to measure two currently travel-led distances, from home using tripmeter and from a particular point on the way usingtripmeter .

To reset the tripmeterTo return the display to 0, hold down the multi-in-formation display switch for about 1 second ormore. Only the currently displayed value will be re-set. ExampleIf tripmeter is displayed, only tripmeter will be reset.

NOTEl When disconnecting the battery terminal, the

memory of tripmeter and arecleared, and the display returns to “0”.

Meter illumination controlE00537900045

Each time you press the multi-information displayswitch (2), there is a sound and the brightness ofthe instruments changes.

Bright Dim

1- Brightness level2- Multi-information display switch

NOTEl You can adjust to 8 different levels for when

the tail lamps are illuminated and 8 for whenthey are not.Each time you reduce two brightness levels,the segment display of the brightness level de-creases one by one.

l The brightness level of the instruments is stor-ed when the ignition switch is turned to the“LOCK” position or the operation mode isput in OFF.

l If you press and hold the switch for longerthan about 1 second, the brightness automati-cally scrolls through its different levels, andstops scrolling when you release the switch.Select your desired level of brightness.

l If the vehicle is equipped with the automaticlamp control, when the lamp switch is in a po-sition other than the “OFF” position, the me-ter illumination switches automatically to theadjusted brightness, depending on the bright-ness outside the vehicle.

Driving range displayE00538000014

This displays the approximate driving range (howmany more kilometres or miles you can drive).When the driving range falls below approximately50 km (30 miles), “---” is displayed.

NOTEl The driving range is determined based on the

fuel consumption data. This may vary depend-ing on the driving conditions and habits.Treat the distance displayed as just a roughguideline.

l When you refuel, the driving range display isupdated.However, if you only add a small amount offuel, the correct value will not be displayed.Fill with a full tank whenever possible.

l On rare occasions, the value displayed forthe driving range may change if you areparked on an extremely steep incline. This isdue to the movement of fuel in the tank anddoes not indicate a malfunction.

l The display setting can be changed to the pre-ferred units (km or miles).Refer to “Changing the function settings” onpage 3-07.


3-04 OA0X13E4

3

Average fuel consumption displayE00531200017

This displays the average fuel consumption fromthe last reset to the present time.The reset mode conditions for the average fuel con-sumption display can be switched between “Autoreset” and “Manual reset”.For information on how to change the average fuelconsumption display setting, refer to “Changingthe function settings” on page 3-07.

NOTEl The average fuel consumption display can be

reset separately in both auto reset mode andmanual reset mode.

l “---” is displayed when the average fuel con-sumption cannot be measured.

l The initial (default) setting is “Auto resetmode”.

l The average fuel consumption depends onthe driving condition (road condition, drivingbehavior, etc.). The displayed fuel consump-tion may vary from the actual fuel consump-tion. Treat the fuel consumption displayed asjust a rough guideline.

l The memory of the auto reset mode or man-ual reset mode for the average fuel consump-tion display is erased if the battery is discon-nected.

l The display setting can be changed to the pre-ferred units {km/L, L/100 km, mpg}.Refer to “Changing the function settings” onpage 3-07.

AS&G monitor*E00531100029

The accumulated time the engine has been stoppedby Auto Stop & Go (AS&G) system is displayed.

Refer to “Auto Stop & Go (AS&G) system” onpage 4-15.

NOTEl When the ignition switch or the operation

mode is ON again, the accumulated time willbe reset.

Outside temperature display*E00533500043

This shows the temperature outside the vehicle.

NOTEl The display setting can be changed to the pre-

ferred units (°C or °F).Refer to “Changing the function settings” onpage 3-07.

l Depending on factors such as the driving con-ditions, the displayed temperature may varyfrom the actual outside temperature.

Frozen road warning*E00533400026

If the outside air temperature drops below approx.3°C (37 °F), the alarm sounds and the outside airtemperature warning symbol (A) flashes for about10 seconds.

CAUTIONl There is a danger the road might be icy,

even when this symbol is not flashing, soplease take care when driving.


3-05OA0X13E4

3

Fuel remaining displayE00522200545

The fuel remaining display indicates the fuel levelin the fuel tank when the ignition switch or the op-eration mode is ON.

1- Full0- Empty

NOTEl It may take several seconds to stabilise the

display after refilling the tank.l If fuel is added with the ignition switch or

the operation mode is ON, the fuel gaugemay incorrectly indicate the fuel level.

l The fuel lid mark (A) indicates that the fueltank filler door is located on the left side ofthe vehicle.

Fuel remaining warning displayE00522400723

If the remaining fuel level is approximately 6 litresor less (one segment displayed) when the ignitionswitch is turned to the “ON” position or the opera-tion mode is changed to ON, the last segment ofthe fuel gauge flashes. If the remaining fuel level isapproximately 3 litres or less (no segments dis-played), “ ” and the bar graph flash.

6 litres or less 3 litres or less

CAUTIONl Do not drive with an extremely low fuel

level; running out of fuel could cause dam-age to the catalytic converter.

NOTEl On inclines or curves, the display may be in-

correct due to the movement of fuel in the tank.

Service reminderE00522501011

Displays the approximate time until the next period-ic inspection that MITSUBISHI MOTORS recom-mends. “---” is displayed when the inspection timehas arrived.The spanner mark indicates the periodic inspection.

NOTEl Depending on the vehicle specifications, the

displayed time until the next periodic inspec-tion may differ from that recommended byMITSUBISHI MOTORS.In addition, the display settings for the nextperiodic inspection time can be modified.To modify the display settings, have it adjus-ted at a MITSUBISHI MOTORS AuthorizedService Point.For more details, contact a MITSUBISHIMOTORS Authorized Service Point.

Distance

Month

1. Displays the time until the next periodic in-spection.


3-06 OA0X13E4

3

NOTEl The distance is shown in units of 100 km

(100 miles). The time is shown in units ofmonths.

2. This informs you that a periodic inspection isdue. Consult a MITSUBISHI MOTORS Au-thorized Service Point.

3. After your vehicle is inspected at aMITSUBISHI MOTORS Authorized ServicePoint, it displays the time until the next peri-odic inspection.

To resetThe “---” display can be reset while the ignitionswitch or the operation mode is in OFF.

1. When you lightly press the multi-informa-tion display switch a few times, the informa-tion display switches to the service reminderdisplay.

2. Press and hold the multi-information displayswitch for about 1 second or more to makethe spanner mark start flashing. (If there isno operation for about 10 seconds with flash-ing, the display will revert to its original indi-cation.)

3. Lightly press the multi-information displayswitch while the icon is flashing to changethe display from “---” to “cLEAr”. After this,the time until the next periodic inspectionwill be displayed.

CAUTIONl The customer is responsible for making

sure that periodic inspection and mainte-nance are performed. Inspections andmaintenance must be performed to pre-vent accidents and malfunctions.

NOTEl “---”display cannot be reset when the igni-

tion switch or the operation mode is in ON.

l When “---” is displayed, after a certain dis-tance and a certain period of time, the dis-play is reset and the time until the next peri-odic inspection is displayed.

l If you accidentally reset the display, consulta MITSUBISHI MOTORS Authorized Serv-ice Point.

Changing the function settingsE00522700726

The average fuel consumption reset mode, fuel con-sumption unit and temperature unit setting can bemodified as desired, when the ignition switch orthe operation mode is ON.

CAUTIONl The driver should not operate the display

while the vehicle is in motion.l When operating the system, stop the vehi-

cle in a safe area.

Changing the reset mode for average fuel con-sumption

E00522901044

The mode conditions for the average fuel consump-tion display can be switched between “Auto reset”and “Manual reset”.

1. When you lightly press the multi-informa-tion display switch a few times, the informa-tion display switches to the driving range dis-play.Refer to “Information display” on page 3-03.


3-07OA0X13E4

3

2. Each time you press the multi-information dis-play switch for 1 second or more on drivingrange display, you can switch reset mode foraverage fuel consumption.(A: Auto reset mode, B: Manual reset mode)

Auto reset mode Manual reset mode

Manual reset model When the average fuel consumption is being

displayed, if you hold down the multi-infor-mation display switch, the average fuel con-sumption displayed at that time is reset.

l When the following operation is performed,the mode setting is automatically switchedfrom manual to auto.[Except for vehicles equipped with keylessoperation system]Turn the ignition switch from the “ACC” or“LOCK” position to the “ON” position.[For vehicles equipped with keyless opera-tion system]Change the operation mode from ACC orOFF to ON. Switching to auto occurs automatically. Ifswitching to manual mode is done, however,the data from the last reset is displayed.

Auto reset model When the average fuel consumption is being

displayed, if you hold down the multi-infor-mation display switch, the average fuel con-sumption displayed at that time are reset.

l When the engine switch or the operationmode is in the following conditions, the aver-age fuel consumption display is automatical-ly reset.[Except for vehicles equipped with keylessoperation system]The ignition switch is in the “ACC” or“LOCK” position for about 4 hours or longer.[For vehicles equipped with keyless opera-tion system]The operation mode is in ACC or OFF forabout 4 hours or longer.

NOTEl The average fuel consumption display can be

reset separately for the auto reset mode andfor the manual reset mode.

l The memory of the auto reset mode or man-ual reset mode for the average fuel consump-tion display is erased if the battery is discon-nected.

l The initial (default) setting is “Auto resetmode”.

Changing the fuel consumption display unitE00523000768

The display unit for fuel consumption can be switch-ed. The distance and amount units are also switch-ed to match the selected fuel consumption unit.

1. When you lightly press the multi-informa-tion display switch a few times, the informa-tion display switches to the average fuel con-sumption display.Refer to “Information display” on page 3-03.

2. Press and hold the multi-information displayswitch for about 5 seconds or more until buz-zer sound is heard twice.

3. Press and hold the multi-information displayswitch to switch in sequence from “km/L”→ “L/100 km” → “mpg” → “km/L”.

NOTEl The display units for the driving range, the

average fuel consumption are switched, butthe units for the indicating needle (speedom-eter), the odometer, the tripmeter and the serv-ice reminder will remain unchanged.

l The memory of the unit setting is erased ifthe battery is disconnected, and it returns au-tomatically to factory setting.

The distance units is also switched in the followingcombinations to match the selected fuel consump-tion unit.

Fuel consumption Distance (driving range)

km/L km

L/100 km km


3-08 OA0X13E4

3

Fuel consumption Distance (driving range)

mpg mile(s)

Changing the temperature unit*E00523100730

The display unit for outside temperature can beswitched.

1. When you lightly press the multi-informa-tion display switch a few times, the informa-tion display switches to the outside tempera-ture display.Refer to “Information display” on page 3-03.

2. Each time you press the multi-information dis-play switch for 1 seconds or more on outsidetemperature display, you can switch from °Cto °F or from °F to °C unit of outside temper-ature display.

NOTEl The temperature unit on air conditioner panel

is switched in conjunction with outside tem-perature display value of the multi informa-tion display.However, “°C” or “°F” are not shown to tem-perature display of an air conditioner.


3-09OA0X13E4

3

Indication and warning lampsE00501502448

1- High-beam indication lamp ® p. 3-112- Electric power steering system (EPS) warning lamp ® p. 4-303- Turn-signal indication lamps/Hazard warning indication

lamps ® p. 3-114- Front fog lamp indication lamp* ® p. 3-115- Rear fog lamp indication lamp ® p. 3-116- Door ajar warning lamp ® p. 3-147- Supplement Restraint System (SRS) warning lamp ® p. 2-258- High coolant temperature warning lamp (red) ® p. 3-139- Low coolant temperature indication lamp (green) ® p. 3-11

10- Oil pressure warning lamp ® p. 3-1311- Check engine warning lamp ® p. 3-1212- Charge warning lamp ® p. 3-1313- Brake warning lamp ® p. 3-12

14- Anti-lock brake system (ABS) warning lamp ® p. 4-2815- Multi-information display ® p. 3-0216- Seat belt warning lamp ® p. 2-0617- Active Stability Control (ASC) indication lamp ® p. 4-3118- Active Stability Control (ASC) OFF indication lamp ® p. 4-3119- ECO indication lamp* ® p. 3-1120- Auto Stop & Go (AS&G) OFF indication lamp* ® p. 4-1821- Auto Stop & Go (AS&G) indication lamp* ® p. 4-1522- ECO drive assist* ® p. 3-1123- For details, refer to “Warning activator” on page 1-09.

(if so equipped)24- For details, refer to “Warning activator” on page 1-09.

(if so equipped)


3-10 OA0X13E4

3

Indication lampsE00501600139

Turn-signal indication lamps/Hazard warning indicationlamps

E00501700420

These indication lamps blink in the fol-lowing situations.l When the turn-signal lever is

moved to activate a turn-signallamp.Refer to “Turn-signal lever” onpage 3-17.

l When the hazard warning flasherswitch is pressed to activate thehazard warning lamps.Refer to “Hazard warning flasherswitch” on page 3-18.

l When the hazard warning lampsautomatically activate due to sud-den braking while driving.Refer to “Emergency stop signalsystem” on page 4-28.

High-beam indication lampE00501800186

This indication lamp illuminates whenthe high-beam is used.

Front fog lamp indicationlamp*

E00501900480

This indication lamp illuminates whilethe front fog lamps are on.

Rear fog lamp indication lampE00502000215

This indication lamp illuminates whilethe rear fog lamp is on.

Low coolant temperature indi-cation lamp

E00502200060

This indication lamp illuminates ingreen when the coolant temperature islow.

NOTEl When the indication lamp goes

out, this should be used as a roughindication of when the heatingstarts working.

ECO indication lamp*E00529800117

This indication lamp illuminates whenfuel-efficient driving is achieved.

ECO drive assist*E00531700041

This function displays how fuel-efficiently you aredriving under different driving conditions.

The ECO drive assist display will change as fol-lows if you do fuel-efficient driving using the accel-erator in a way well matched with the vehicle speed.

ECO drive level

High

Low


3-11OA0X13E4

3

Warning lampsE00502400479

Brake warning lampE00502502676

This lamp illuminates when the ignitionswitch is turned to the “ON” position orthe operation mode is put in ON, andgoes off after a few seconds.Always make sure that the lamp goes offbefore driving.With the ignition switch or the operationmode in ON, the brake warning lamp il-luminates under the following conditions:l When the parking brake lever has

been engaged.l When the brake fluid level in the

reservoir falls to a low level.l When the brake force distribution

function is not operating correctly.

With the ignition switch or the operationmode in ON, a buzzer sounds under thefollowing condition:l The vehicle speed exceeds 8 km/h

(5 mph) with the parking brake ap-plied.

CAUTIONl In the situations listed below,

brake performance may be com-promised or the vehicle may be-come unstable if brakes are ap-plied suddenly; consequently,avoid driving at high speeds orapplying the brakes suddenly.

CAUTIONFurthermore, the vehicleshould be brought to a stop in asafe location and to have itchecked.

• The brake warning lampdoes not illuminate whenthe parking brake is appliedor does not turn off whenthe parking brake is re-leased.

• The ABS warning lamp andbrake warning lamp illumi-nate at the same time.For details, refer to “ABSwarning lamp” on page4-29.

• The brake warning lamp re-mains illuminated duringdriving.

l The vehicle should be broughtto a halt in the following man-ner when brake performancehas deteriorated.

• Depress the brake pedalharder than usual.Even if the brake pedalmoves down to the very endof its possible stroke, keep itpressed down hard.

CAUTION• Should the brakes fail, use

engine braking to reduceyour speed and pull the park-ing brake lever.Depress the brake pedal tooperate the stop lamp toalert the vehicles behind you.

Check engine warning lampE00502601931

This lamp is a part of an onboard diag-nostic system which monitors the emis-sions, engine control system or CVT con-trol system.If a problem is detected in one of thesesystems, this lamp illuminates or flashes.Although your vehicle will usually bedrivable and not need towing, we recom-mend you to have the system checked assoon as possible.This lamp will also illuminate when theignition switch is turned “ON” or the op-eration mode is put in ON, and goes offafter the engine has started. If it does notgo off after the engine has started, we rec-ommend you to have the vehicle checked.


3-12 OA0X13E4

3

CAUTIONl Prolonged driving with this

lamp on may cause further dam-age to the emission control sys-tem. It could also affect fueleconomy and drivability.

l If the lamp does not illuminatewhen the ignition switch isturned to the “ON” position orthe operation mode is put inON, we recommend you tohave the system checked.

l If the lamp illuminates whilethe engine is running, avoiddriving at high speeds and havethe system inspected by aMITSUBISHI MOTORS Au-thorized Service Point as soonas possible.Accelerator pedal and brakepedal response may be negative-ly influenced under there condi-tions.

NOTEl The engine electronic control mod-

ule accommodating the onboard di-agnostic system has various faultdata (especially about the exhaustemission) stored.This data will be erased if a bat-tery cable is disconnected whichwill make a rapid diagnosis diffi-cult. Do not disconnect a batterycable when the check engine warn-ing lamp is ON.

Charge warning lampE00502701280

This lamp illuminates when the ignitionswitch is turned to the“ON” position orthe operation mode is put in ON, andgoes off after the engine has started.

CAUTIONl If it illuminates while the en-

gine is running, there is a prob-lem in the charging system. Im-mediately park your vehicle ina safe place and we recommendyou to have it checked.

Oil pressure warning lampE00502800718

This lamp illuminates when the ignitionswitch is turned to the“ON” position orthe operation mode is put in ON, andgoes off after the engine has started. If itilluminates while the engine is running,the oil pressure is too low.Turn the engine off and have it inspected.

CAUTIONl This warning lamp does not in-

dicate the amount of oil level inthe engine. This must be deter-mined by checking the oil levelon the dipstick, while the en-gine is switched off.

CAUTIONl If this lamp illuminates when

the engine oil level is not low,have it inspected.

l If you continue driving withlow engine oil level or with thiswarning lamp illuminated, en-gine seizure may occur.

High coolant temperaturewarning lamp

E00503000049

This lamp illuminates in red if the cool-ant temperature becomes excessivelyhigh.

CAUTIONl If the lamp illuminates during

vehicle operation, it indicatesthat the engine is possibly over-heating. Continued drivingcould make the engine fail. Im-mediately stop the vehicle in asafe place and take appropriateaction. (Refer to “Engine over-heating” on page 6-04.)


3-13OA0X13E4

3

NOTEl The high coolant temperature

warning lamp may illuminatewhen the vehicle has been drivenat high speeds or on hilly roads.This illuminating does not necessa-rily indicate a problem. It shouldstop if you keep the engine run-ning for a while or continue driv-ing the vehicle.

Door ajar warning lampE00503300895

This lamp illuminates when a door orthe tailgate is either open or not complete-ly closed.If the vehicle speed reaches approximate-ly 8 km/h (5 mph) with a door or the tail-gate open or incompletely closed, a buz-zer sounds 4 times as a warning.

CAUTIONl Before moving your vehicle,

check that the warning lamp isOFF.

Combination headlamps anddipper switch

E00506002392

Headlamps

NOTEl Do not leave the lights on for a long time

while the engine is stationary (not running).A run-down battery could result.

l When it rains, or when the vehicle has beenwashed, the inside of the lens sometimes be-comes foggy, but this does not indicate a func-tional problem.When the lamp is switched on, the heat willremove the fog. However, if water gathers in-side the lamp, we recommend you to have itchecked.


OFF All lamps off




OFF All lamps off


3-14 OA0X13E4

3

AUTO

With the ignition switch or the opera-tion mode is in ON, head-lamps, posi-tion, tail, licence plate, and instru-ment panel lamps turn on and off au-tomatically in accordance with out-side light level. All lamps turn off au-tomatically when the ignition switchis turned to “OFF” position or the op-eration mode is put in OFF.



NOTEl The sensitivity of the automatic on/off con-

trol can be adjusted. For further information,contact a MITSUBISHI MOTORS Author-ized Service Point.

l When the headlamps are turned off by the au-tomatic on/off control with the ignitionswitch in the “ON” position or the operationmode in ON, the front fog lamps (if so equip-ped) and rear fog lamps also go off. Whenthe headlamps are subsequently turned backon by the automatic on/off control, the frontfog lamps also come on but the rear fog lampstays off. If you wish to turn the rear foglamp back on, operate the switch again.

l Do not cover the sensor (A) for the automat-ic on/off control by affixing a sticker or labelto the windscreen.

l If the lamps do not turn on or off with theswitch in the “AUTO” position, manually op-erate the switch and we recommend you tohave your vehicle checked.

Lamps (headlamps, fog lamp, etc.) au-to-cutout functionl If the following operation is performed while

the lamp switch is in the “ ” position, thelamps will turn off automatically when thedriver’s door is opened.[Except for vehicles equipped with keylessoperation system]The ignition switch is turned to the “LOCK”or “ACC” position, or the key is removedfrom the ignition switch.[For vehicles equipped with keyless opera-tion system]The operation mode is in OFF or ACC.

l If the following operation is performed whilethe lamp switch is in the “ ” position, thelamps will remain on for about 3 minuteswhile the driver’s door is shut and will thenautomatically turn off.[Except for vehicles equipped with keylessoperation system]The ignition switch is turned to the “LOCK”or “ACC” position, or the key is removedfrom the ignition switch.[For vehicles equipped with keyless opera-tion system]The operation mode is in OFF or ACC.

NOTEl The lamp auto-cutout will not function when

the lamp switch is in the “ ” position.l The lamp auto-cutout function can also be dis-

abled.For further information, we recommend youto consult a MITSUBISHI MOTORS Author-ized Service Point.

When you want to keep the lamps on:1. In the following cases, turn the lamp switch

to the “OFF” position.[Except for vehicles equipped with keylessoperation system]The ignition switch is in the “LOCK” or“ACC” position.[For vehicles equipped with keyless opera-tion system]The operation mode is in OFF or ACC.

2. Turn on the lamps with the switch in the“ ” or “ ” position again, then thelamps will remain on.


3-15OA0X13E4

3

Lamp monitor buzzerE00506100621

If the following operation is performed, a buzzerwill sound to remind the driver to turn off the lamps.[Except for vehicles equipped with keyless opera-tion system]If the driver’s door is opened when the key is in the“LOCK” or “ACC” position or removed from theignition switch while the lamps are on. [For vehicles equipped with keyless operation sys-tem]If the driver’s door is opened when the operationmode is in ACC or OFF while the lamps are on. In both cases, the buzzer will automatically stop ifthe auto-cutoff function is activated, the lampswitch is turned off, or the door is closed.

Daytime running lampE00530600043

The daytime running lamps comes on when the en-gine is running and the lamp switch is in the “OFF”or “AUTO” position and the tail lamps are off.

Dipper (High/Low beam change)E00506200329

When the lamp switch is in the “ ” position, thebeam changes from high to low (or low to high)each time the lever is pulled fully (1). While the high-beam is on, the high-beam indication lamp in the in-strument cluster will also illuminate.

Headlamp flasherE00506300199

The high-beams flash when the lever is pulled slight-ly (2), and will go off when it is released.When the high-beam is on, the high-beam indica-tion lamp in the instrument cluster will illuminate.

NOTEl The high-beams can also flash when the

lamp switch is OFF.l If you turn the lamps off with the headlamps

set to high-beam, the headlamps are automat-ically returned to their low-beam settingwhen the lamp switch is next turned to the“ ” position.

Headlamp levelling switchE00506400871

The angle of the headlamp beam varies dependingon the load carried by the vehicle.The headlamp levelling switch can be used to ad-just the headlamp illumination distance (when thelower beam is illuminated) so that the headlamps’glare does not distract other drivers.Set the switch according to the following table.

CAUTIONl Always perform adjustments before driv-

ing.Do not attempt to adjust while driving, asit could cause an accident.

NOTEl When adjusting the beam position, first put

the dial in the “0” position (the highest beamposition).


3-16 OA0X13E4

3

Vehiclecondi-tion

Switchposition

“0” “0” “2” “3” “3”

•: 1 person:Full luggage loading

Switch posi-tion 0-

Driver only/Driver + 1 front passen-ger

Switch posi-tion 2-

5 passengers (including driver)

Switch posi-tion 3-

5 passengers (including driver) +Full luggage loading/Driver + fullluggage loading

Turn-signal leverE00506501648

1- Turn-signalsWhen making a normal turn, use position(1). The lever will return automatically whencornering is completed.

2- Lane-change signalsWhen moving the lever to (2) slightly tochange a lane, the turn-signal lamps and indi-cation lamp in the instrument cluster will on-ly flash while the lever is operated.Also, when you move the lever to (2) slight-ly then release it, the turn-signal lamps and in-dication lamp in the instrument cluster willflash 3 times.

NOTEl If the lamp flashes unusually quickly, the

bulb in a turn-signal lamp may have burnedout. We recommend you to have the vehicleinspected.

l It is possible to activate the following func-tions.

• Flashing of the turn-signal lamps whenthe lever is operated with the ignitionswitch or the operation mode is in ACC.

• Deactivate the turn-signal lamp 3-flashfunction for lane changes

• The time required to operate the lever forthe 3-flash function can be adjusted.

• Changing of the tone of a sounding buz-zer as the turn-signal lamps flash.

For further information, we recommend youto consult a MITSUBISHI MOTORS Author-ized Service Point.


3-17OA0X13E4

3

Hazard warning flasher switchE00506601027

Use the hazard warning flasher switch when the ve-hicle has to be parked on the road for any emergency.The hazard warning flashers can always be operat-ed, regardless of the ignition switch position or theoperation mode. Push the switch to turn on the hazard warning flash-ers, all turn-signal lamps flash continuously.To turn them off, push the switch again.

NOTEl While the hazard warning lamps are blinking

due to having manually pushed the switch,the emergency stop signal system does not op-erate.Refer to “Emergency stop signal system” onpage 4-28.

Fog lamp switchE00506700034

Front fog lamp switch*E00508300685

The front fog lamps can be operated while the head-lamps or tail lamps are on. Turn the knob in the“ON” direction to turn on the front fog lamps. Anindication lamp in the instrument cluster will alsocome on. Turn the knob in the “OFF” direction toturn off the front fog lamps. The knob will automat-ically return to its original position when you re-lease it.

NOTEl The front fog lamps are automatically turned

off when the headlamps or tail lamps areturned off. To turn the front fog lamps onagain, turn the knob in the “ON” direction af-ter turning on the headlamps or tail lamps.

l Do not use fog lamps except in conditions offog, otherwise excessive lamp glare may tem-porarily blind oncoming vehicle drivers.

Rear fog lamp switchE00508400569

The rear fog lamp can be operated when the head-lamps or front fog lamps (if so equipped) turn on.An indication lamp in the instrument cluster comeson when the rear fog lamp is turned on. [Vehicle without front fog lamps]Turn the knob once in the “ON” direction to turnon the rear fog lamp. To turn the rear fog lamp off,turn the knob once in the “OFF” direction. Theknob will automatically return to its original posi-tion when you release it. [Vehicle with front fog lamps]Turn the knob once in the “ON” direction to turnon the front fog lamps. Turn the knob once more inthe “ON” direction to turn on the rear fog lamp. Toturn the rear fog lamp off, turn the knob once in the“OFF” direction. Turn the knob once more in the“OFF” direction to turn off the front fog lamps.The knob will automatically return to its original po-sition when you release it.


3-18 OA0X13E4

3

NOTEl The rear fog lamp is automatically turned off

when the headlamps or front fog lamps (if soequipped) are turned off.

l To turn the rear fog lamp on again, turn theknob once in the “ON” direction after turn-ing on the headlamps. (Vehicle without frontfog lamps)

l To turn the rear fog lamp on again, turn theknob twice in the “ON” direction after turn-ing on the headlamps. (Vehicle with frontfog lamps)

Wiper and washer switchE00507101739

The windscreen wipers, rear window wiper andwasher can be operated with the ignition switch orthe operation mode in ON or ACC.If the blades are frozen to the windscreen or rearwindow, do not operate the wipers until the ice hasmelted and the blades are freed, otherwise the wip-er motor may be damaged.

CAUTIONl If the washer is used in cold weather, the

washer fluid sprayed against the glassmay freeze, which may hinder visibility.Warm the glass with the defroster or rearwindow demister before using the washer.

Windscreen wipersE00516900680

Except for vehicles equipped with rain sensor


OFF- OffINT- Intermittent (Speed sensitive)LO- SlowHI- Fast

To adjust intermittent intervalsWith the lever in the “INT” (speed-sensitive) posi-tion, the intermittent intervals can be adjusted byturning the knob (A).

Type 1

Type 2

1- Fast2- Slow


3-19OA0X13E4

3

NOTEl The speed-sensitive-operation function of the

windscreen wipers can be deactivated.For further information, we recommend youto consult a MITSUBISHI MOTORS Author-ized Service Point.

Misting functionMove the lever in the direction of the arrow and re-lease, to operate the wipers once.Use this function when you are driving in mist ordrizzle.

Vehicles with rain sensorE00517000402


OFF- OffAUTO- Auto-wiper control

Rain sensorThe wipers will automatically operatedepending on the degree of wetnesson the windscreen.

LO- SlowHI- Fast

Rain sensorCan only be used when the ignition switch or theoperation mode is in ON.If the lever is put in the “AUTO” position, the rainsensor (A) will detect the extent of rain (or snow,other moisture, dust, etc.) and the wipers will oper-ate automatically.Keep the lever in the “OFF” position if the wind-screen is dirty and the weather is dry.

Wiper operation under these conditions can scratchthe windscreen and damage the wipers.

CAUTIONl With the ignition switch or the operation

mode in ON and lever in the “AUTO” po-sition, the wipers may automatically oper-ate in the situations described below.If your hands get trapped, you could suf-fer injuries or the wipers could malfunc-tion. Be sure to turn the ignition switch tothe “LOCK” position or put the opera-tion mode in OFF, or move lever to the“OFF” position to deactivate the rain sen-sor.

• When cleaning the outside surface ofthe windscreen, if you touch on top ofthe rain sensor.

• When cleaning the outside surface ofthe windscreen, if you wipe with acloth on top of the rain sensor.

• When using an automatic car wash.• A physical shock is applied to the wind-

screen.


3-20 OA0X13E4

3

CAUTION• A physical shock is applied to the rain

sensor.

NOTEl To protect the rubber parts of the wipers, this

operation of the wipers does not take placewhen the vehicle is stationary and the ambi-ent temperature is about 0 °C or lower.

l Do not cover the sensor by affixing a stickeror label to the windscreen. Also, do not putany water-repellent coating on the wind-screen. The rain sensor would not be able todetect the extent of rain, and the wipersmight stop working normally.

l In the following cases, the rain sensor maybe malfunctioning.For further information, we recommend youto consult a MITSUBISHI MOTORS Author-ized Service Point.

• When the wipers operate at a constant in-terval despite changes in the extent of rain.

• When the wipers do not operate eventhough it is raining.

l The wipers may automatically operate whenthings such as insects or foreign objects areaffixed to the windscreen on top of the rainsensor or when the windscreen is frozen. Ob-jects affixed to the windscreen will stop thewipers when the wipers cannot remove them.To operate the wipers again, move the leverin the “LO” or “HI” position.Also, the wipers may operate automaticallydue to strong direct sunlight or electromag-netic wave. To stop the wipers, place the lev-er in the “OFF” position.

l Contact a MITSUBISHI MOTORS Author-ized Service Point when replacing the wind-screen or reinforcing the glass around the sen-sor.

To adjust the sensitivity of the rain sensorWith the lever in the “AUTO” (rain sensor) posi-tion, it is possible to adjust the sensitivity of therain sensor by turning the knob (B).

“+”- Higher sensitivity to rain“-”- Lower sensitivity to rain

NOTEl It is possible to activate the following func-

tions.• Automatic operation (rain droplet sensi-

tive) can be changed to intermittent oper-ation (vehicle-speed sensitive).

• Automatic operation (rain droplet sensi-tive) can be changed to intermittent oper-ation (except vehicle-speed sensitive).

For further information, we recommend youto consult a MITSUBISHI MOTORS Author-ized Service Point.

Misting functionMove the lever in the direction of the arrow and re-lease, to operate the wipers once.Use this function when you are driving in mist ordrizzle.The wipers will operate once if the lever is raisedto the “MIST” position and released when the igni-tion switch or the operation mode is in the “ON” or“ACC” position. The wipers will continue to oper-ate while the lever is held in the “MIST” position.


3-21OA0X13E4

3

The wipers will operate once if the lever is movedto the “AUTO” position and the knob (C) is turnedin the “+” direction when the ignition switch is inthe “ON” position or the operation mode is in ON.

Windscreen washerE00507201310

The washer fluid will be sprayed onto the wind-screen by pulling the lever towards you.The wipers operate automatically several timeswhile the washer fluid is being sprayed.

CAUTIONl If the washer is used in cold weather, the

washer fluid sprayed against the glassmay freeze resulting in poor visibility.Heat the glass with the defroster or demis-ter before using the washer.

Rear window wiper and washerE00507301379

INT - The wiper operates continuouslyfor several seconds then operatesintermittently at intervals of aboutevery 8 seconds

OFF - Off- The washer fluid will be sprayed

onto the rear window when theknob is turned fully in either direc-tion.The wipers operate automaticallyseveral times while the washer flu-id is being sprayed.

NOTEl On vehicles with CVT, to ensure a clear rear-

ward view, the wiper perform several contin-uous operations when the revers gear is en-gaged and the switch is in the “INT” position.Following this continuous operation, the wip-er will automatically switch to intermittent op-eration.

l It is possible to modify functions as follows:• Adjustment of the interval for intermit-

tent operation.• Changing intermittent wiper operation to

continuous wiper operation.For further information, we recommend youto consult a MITSUBISHI MOTORS Author-ized Service Point.

Precautions to observe when using wip-ers and washers

E00507600128

l If the moving wipers become blocked by iceor other deposits on the glass, the motor mayburn out even if the wiper switch is turned toOFF. If obstruction occurs, park your vehiclein a safe place, turn off the engine, and cleanthe deposits from the glass so that the wipersoperate smoothly.

l Do not use the wipers when the glass is dry.They may scratch the glass surface and theblades wear out prematurely.

l Before using the wipers in cold weather,check that the wiper blades are not frozen on-to the glass. The motor may burn out if thewipers are used with the blades frozen ontothe glass.

l Avoid using the washer continuously formore than 20 seconds. Do not operate thewasher when the fluid reservoir is empty.Otherwise, the motor may burn out.


3-22 OA0X13E4

3

l Periodically check the level of washer fluidin the reservoir and refill if required.During cold weather, add a recommendedwasher solution that will not freeze in thewasher reservoir. Failure to do so could re-sult in loss of washer function and frost dam-age to the system components.

Rear window demister switchE00507901287

The rear window demister switch can be operatedwhen the engine is running.Push the switch to turn on the rear window demis-ter. It will be turned off automatically in about 20minutes. To turn off the demister within about 20minutes, push the switch again.The indication lamp (A) will illuminate while thedemister is on.

Type 1

Type 2

NOTEl On vehicles equipped with heated mirrors,

when the rear window demister switch ispressed, the outside rear-view mirrors are de-fogged or defrosted. Refer to “Heated mir-ror” on page 4-07.

l The demister switch is not to melt snow butto clear mist. Remove snow before use of thedemister switch.

l To avoid unnecessary discharge of the bat-tery, do not use the rear window demister dur-ing starting of the engine or when the engineis not running. Turn the demister off immedi-ately after the window is clear.

l When cleaning the inside of the rear win-dow, use a soft cloth and wipe gently alongthe heater wires, being careful not to damagethe wires.

l Do not allow objects to touch the inside ofthe rear window glass, damaged or brokenwires may result.


3-23OA0X13E4

3

Horn switchE00508000640

Press the steering wheel on or around the “ ” mark.


3-24 OA0X13E4

3

Economical driving.......................................................................4-02Driving, alcohol and drugs...........................................................4-02Safe driving techniques................................................................4-03Running-in recommendations.......................................................4-03Parking brake................................................................................4-04Parking..........................................................................................4-05Steering wheel height adjustment.................................................4-06Inside rear-view mirror.................................................................4-06Outside rear-view mirrors.............................................................4-07Ignition switch*............................................................................4-08Engine switch*.............................................................................4-09Steering wheel lock......................................................................4-11Starting..........................................................................................4-12Auto Stop & Go (AS&G) system*...............................................4-15Manual transmission*...................................................................4-19Automatic transmission INVECS-III CVT (Intelligent

& Innovative Vehicle Electronic Control System III)*............4-21Braking.........................................................................................4-25Hill start assist*............................................................................4-26Brake assist system.......................................................................4-27Emergency stop signal system......................................................4-28Anti-lock brake system (ABS).....................................................4-28Electric power steering system (EPS)..........................................4-30Active stability control (ASC)......................................................4-30Rear-view camera*.......................................................................4-32Cargo loads...................................................................................4-34Trailer towing (1200 models).......................................................4-35

Starting and driving

OA0X13E4

4

Economical drivingE00600101223

For economical driving, there are some technical re-quirements that have to be met. The prerequisitefor low fuel consumption is a properly adjusted en-gine. In order to achieve longer life of the vehicleand the most economical operation, we recommendyou to have the vehicle checked at regular intervalsin accordance with the service standards.Fuel economy and generation of exhaust gas andnoise are highly influenced by personal driving hab-its as well as the particular operating conditions.The following points should be observed in orderto minimize wear of brakes, tyres and engine aswell as to reduce environmental pollution.

StartingAvoid rapid acceleration and sudden starts; such op-eration will result in higher fuel consumption.

ShiftingShift only at an appropriate speed and enginespeed. Always use the highest shift position possible.

City trafficFrequent starting and stopping increases the aver-age fuel consumption. Use roads with smooth traf-fic flow whenever possible. When driving on con-gested roads, avoid use of a low shift position athigh engine speeds.

IdlingThe vehicle consumes fuel even during idling.Avoid extended idling whenever possible.

SpeedAt higher vehicle speed, more fuel is consumed.Avoid driving at full speed. Even a slight release ofthe accelerator pedal will save a significant amountof fuel.

Tyre inflation pressureCheck the tyre inflation pressures at regular inter-vals. Low tyre inflation pressure increases road re-sistance and fuel consumption. In addition, lowtyre pressures adversely affect tyre wear and driv-ing stability.

LoadDo not drive with unnecessary articles in the lug-gage compartment. Especially during city drivingwhere frequent starting and stopping is necessary,the increased weight of the vehicle will greatly af-fect fuel consumption. Also avoid driving with un-necessary luggage, etc., on the roof; the increasedair resistance will increase fuel consumption.

Cold engine startingStarting of a cold engine consumes more fuel.Unnecessary fuel consumption is also caused bykeeping a hot engine running. After the engine isstarted, commence driving as soon as possible.

Air conditioningThe use of the air conditioning will increase thefuel consumption.

Driving, alcohol and drugsE00600200096

Driving after drinking alcohol is one of the most fre-quent causes of accidents.Your driving ability can be seriously impaired evenwith blood alcohol levels far below the legal mini-mum. If you have been drinking, don’t drive. Ridewith a designated non-drinking driver, call a cab ora friend, or use public transportation. Drinking cof-fee or taking a cold shower will not make you sober.Similarly, prescription and nonprescription drugs af-fect your alertness, perception and reaction time.Consult with your doctor or pharmacist before driv-ing while under the influence of any of these medi-cations.

WARNINGl NEVER DRINK AND DRIVE.

Your perceptions are less accurate, yourreflexes are slower and your judgment isimpaired.


4-02 OA0X13E4

4

Safe driving techniquesE00600300619

Driving safety and protection against injury cannotbe fully ensured. However, we recommend thatyou pay extra attention to the following:

Seat beltsBefore starting the vehicle, make sure that you andyour passengers have fastened your seat belts.

Floor mats

WARNINGl Keep floor mats clear of the pedals by cor-

rectly laying floor mats that are suitablefor the vehicle.To prevent the floor mats from slippingout of position, securely retain them us-ing the hook etc.Note that laying a floor mat over a pedalor laying one floor mat on top of anothercan obstruct pedal operation and lead toa serious accident.

Carrying children in the vehiclel Never leave your vehicle unattended with the

key and children inside the vehicle. Childrenmay play with the driving controls and thiscould lead to an accident.

l Make sure that infants and small children areproperly restrained in accordance with thelaws and regulations, and for maximum pro-tection in case of an accident.

l Prevent children from playing in the luggagecompartment. It is quite dangerous to allowthem to play there while the vehicle is moving.

Loading luggageWhen loading luggage, be careful not to loadabove the height of seats. This is dangerous not on-ly because rearward vision will be obstructed, butalso the luggage may be projected into the passen-ger compartment under hard braking.

Running-in recommendationsE00600402597

During the running-in period for the first 1,000 km(620 miles), it is advisable to drive your new vehi-cle using the following precautions as a guidelineto aid long life as well as future economy and per-formance.l Do not race the engine at high speeds.l Avoid rapid starting, accelerating, braking

and prolonged high-speed running.l Keep to the running-in speed limit shown be-

low.Please note that the legal speed limits dis-played must be adhered to.

l Do not exceed loading limits.l Refrain from towing a trailer.

Vehicles with M/T

Shift point Speed limit

1st gear 35 km/h (22 mph)

2nd gear 65 km/h (40 mph)

3rd gear 95 km/h (59 mph)

4th gear 120 km/h (74 mph)


Vehicles with CVT


“D” (DRIVE) 100 km/h (62 mph)


4-03OA0X13E4

4

Parking brakeE00600501751

To park the vehicle, first bring it to a completestop, fully apply the parking brake sufficiently tohold the vehicle.

To apply

1- Firmly depress and hold the brake pedal,then pull the lever up without pushing the but-ton at the end of hand grip.

CAUTIONl When you intend to apply the parking

brake, firmly press the brake pedal tobring the vehicle to a complete stop be-fore pulling the parking brake lever. Pull-ing the parking brake lever with the vehi-cle moving could make the rear wheelslock up, thereby making the vehicle unsta-ble. It could also make the parking brakemalfunction.

NOTEl Apply sufficient force to the parking brake

lever to hold the vehicle stationary after thefoot brake is released.

l If the parking brake does not hold the vehiclestationary after the foot brake is released,have your vehicle checked immediately.

To release

1- Firmly depress and hold the brake pedal,then pull the lever up slightly.

2- Push the button at the end of hand grip.3- Lower the lever fully.

CAUTIONl Before driving, be sure that the parking

brake is fully released and brake warninglamp is off.If you drive without the parking brakefully released, the warning lamp will illu-minate and a buzzer sounds when the ve-hicle speed exceeds 8 km/h (5 mph).If a vehicle is driven without releasing theparking brake, the brake will be overhea-ted, resulting in ineffective braking andpossible brake failure.

l If the brake warning lamp does not extin-guish when the parking brake is fully re-leased, the brake system may be abnormal.Have your vehicle checked immediately.For details, refer to “Brake warninglamp” on page 3-12.


4-04 OA0X13E4

4

ParkingE00600601589

To park the vehicle, fully engage the parkingbrake, and then move the gearshift lever to 1st or“R” (Reverse) position for vehicles with M/T, orset the selector lever to “P” (PARK) position for ve-hicles with CVT.

Parking on a hillTo prevent the vehicle from rolling, follow theseprocedures:

Parking on a downhill slopeTurn the front wheels towards the kerb and movethe vehicle forward until the kerb side wheel gentlytouches the kerb.Apply the parking brake and place the gearshift lev-er into the “R” (Reverse) position (M/T) or the se-lector lever into the “P” (PARK) position (CVT).If necessary, apply chocks to wheels.

Parking on an uphill slopeTurn the front wheels away from the kerb andmove the vehicle back until the kerb side wheel gen-tly touches the kerb.Apply the parking brake and place the gearshift lev-er into the 1st position (M/T) or the selector leverinto the “P” (PARK) position (CVT).If necessary, apply chocks to wheels.

NOTEl If your vehicle is equipped with CVT, be

sure to apply the parking brake before mov-ing the selector lever to the “P” (PARK) po-sition. If you move the selector lever to the“P” (PARK) position before applying theparking brake, it may be difficult to disen-gage the selector lever from the “P” (PARK)position when next you drive the vehicle, re-quiring application of a strong force to the se-lector lever to move from the “P” (PARK) po-sition.

Parking with the engine runningNever leave the engine running while you take ashort sleep/rest. Also, never leave the engine run-ning in a closed or poorly ventilated place.

WARNINGl Leaving the engine running risks injury

or death from accidentally moving thegearshift lever (M/T) or the selector lever(CVT) or the accumulation of toxic ex-haust fumes on the passenger compart-ment.

Where you park

WARNINGl Do not park your vehicle in areas where

combustible materials such as dry grassor leaves can come in contact with a hotexhaust, since a fire could occur.

Do not keep the steering wheel fullyturned for a long timeMore effort could be required to turn the steeringwheel.Refer to “Electric power steering system (EPS)” onpage 4-30.

When leaving the vehicleAlways carry the key and lock all doors and the tail-gate when leaving the vehicle unattended.Always try to park your vehicle in a well lit area.


4-05OA0X13E4

4

Steering wheel height adjustmentE00600700554

1. Release the lever while holding the steeringwheel up.

2. Adjust the steering wheel to the desired posi-tion.

3. Securely lock the steering wheel by pullingthe lever fully upward.

A- LockedB- Release

WARNINGl Do not attempt to adjust the steering

wheel while you are driving the vehicle.

CAUTIONl When releasing the lever, hold the steer-

ing wheel by hand to prevent it falling tothe lowest position.

Inside rear-view mirrorE00600800816

Adjust the rear-view mirror only after making anyseat adjustments so you have a clear view to therear of the vehicle.

WARNINGl Do not attempt to adjust the rear-view

mirror while driving. This can be danger-ous.Always adjust the mirror before driving.

Adjust the rear-view mirror to maximize the viewthrough the rear window.

To adjust the vertical mirror positionIt is possible to move the mirror up and down to ad-just its position.

To adjust the mirror positionIt is possible to move the mirror up/down and left/right to adjust its position.

To reduce the glareThe lever (A) at the bottom of the mirror can beused to adjust the mirror to reduce the glare fromthe headlamps of vehicles behind you during nightdriving.

1- Normal2- Anti-glare


4-06 OA0X13E4

4

Outside rear-view mirrorsE00600900761

WARNINGl Do not attempt to adjust the rear-view

mirrors while driving. This can be danger-ous.Always adjust the mirrors before driving.

l Your vehicle is equipped with convextype mirrors. Please take into considera-tion. Objects you see in the mirror willlook smaller and farther away comparedto a normal flat mirror.Do not use this mirror to estimate dis-tance of following vehicles when changinglanes.

To adjust the mirror positionE00601000730

Manual outside rear-view mirrors*Adjust the mirror surface by hands as indicated bythe arrows.

Electric remote-controlled outside rear-view mir-rors*

E00610900067

The outside rear-view mirrors can be adjustedwhen the ignition switch or the operation mode isin ON or ACC.

1. Place the lever (A) to the same side as the mir-ror whose adjustment is desired.

L- Left outside mirror adjustmentR- Right outside mirror adjustment

2. Press the switch (B) to the left, right, up ordown to adjust the mirror position.1- Up2- Down3- Right4- Left

3. Return the lever (A) back to the middle posi-tion (•).

Retracting and extending the outsidemirrors

E00618200444

The outside mirror can be folded in towards theside window to prevent damage when parking innarrow areas.

CAUTIONl Do not drive the vehicle with the mirror

folded in.The lack of rearward visibility normallyprovided by the mirror could lead to anaccident.

Push the mirror towards the back of the vehiclewith your hand to retract it in.When extending the mirror, pull it out towards thefront of the vehicle until it clicks to lock in place.

Heated mirror*E00601200569

To demist or defrost the outside rear-view mirrors,press the rear window demister switch.The indication lamp (A) will illuminate while thedemister is on.


4-07OA0X13E4

4

The heater will be turned off automatically in about20 minutes.

Type 1

Type 2

Ignition switch*E00601401975

LOCKThe engine is stopped and the steering wheellocked. The key can only be inserted and removedin this position.

ACCThe engine is stopped, but the audio system and oth-er electric devices can be operated.

ONAll the vehicle’s electrical devices can be operated.

STARTThe starter motor operates. After the engine has star-ted, release the key and it will automatically returnto the “ON” position.

NOTEl If your vehicle is equipped with an electronic

immobilizer. To start the engine, the ID codewhich the transponder inside the key sendsmust match the one registered in the immobil-izer computer.(Refer to “Electronic immobilizer (Anti-theftstarting system)” on page 1-03.)

To remove the keyE00620400502

For vehicles equipped with a M/T, when removingthe key, push the key in at the “ACC” position andkeep it depressed until it is turned to the “LOCK”position and remove it.For vehicles equipped with CVT when removingthe key, first set the selector lever to the “P”(PARK) position, and push the key in at the“ACC” position and keep it depressed until it isturned to the “LOCK” position, and remove it.


4-08 OA0X13E4

4

CAUTIONl Do not remove the ignition key from the

ignition switch while driving. The steer-ing wheel will be locked, causing loss ofcontrol.

l If the engine is stopped while driving, thebrake servomechanism will cease to func-tion and braking efficiency will deterio-rate. Also, the power steering system willnot function and it will require greatermanual effort to operate the steering.

l Do not leave the key in the “ON” positionfor a long time when the engine is not run-ning, doing so will cause the battery to bedischarged.

l Do not turn the key to the “START” posi-tion when the engine is running, doing socould damage the starter motor.

Engine switch*E00631800069

In order to prevent theft, the engine will not start un-less a preregistered keyless operation key is used.(Engine immobilizer function)If you are carrying the keyless operation key, youcan start the engine.

CAUTIONl The indication lamp (A) will flash orange

when there is a problem or malfunctionin the keyless operation system. Neverdrive if the indication lamp on the engineswitch is flashing orange. Immediatelycontact a MITSUBISHI MOTORS Au-thorized Service Point.

l If the engine switch operation is notsmooth and feels like it is sticking, do notoperate the switch. Immediately contact aMITSUBISHI MOTORS AuthorizedService Point.

NOTEl When operating the engine switch, press the

switch all the way in. If the switch is notfully pressed, the engine may not start or theoperation mode may not change. If the en-gine switch is pressed correctly, there is noneed to hold the engine switch down.

l When the battery in the keyless operation sys-tem key has worn out, and taking the keylessoperation key out of the vehicle, a warninglamp will blink for 5 seconds.

Operation mode of the engine switchand its functionOFFThe indication lamp on the engine switch turns off.The operation mode cannot be put in OFF whenthe selector lever is in any position other than the“P” (PARK) position (CVT). ACCElectrical devices such as the audio and accessorysocket can be operated.The indication lamp on the engine switch illumi-nates orange.


4-09OA0X13E4

4

ONAll vehicle’s electrical devices can be operated.The indication lamp on the engine switch illumi-nates green. The indication lamp turns off when theengine is running.

NOTEl Your vehicle is equipped with an electronic

immobilizer.To start the engine, the ID code transmittedby the transponder inside the key must matchthe code registered in the immobilizer com-puter. Refer to “Electronic immobilizer (Anti-theft starting system)” on page 1-03.

Changing the operation modeE00631900015

If you press the engine switch without depressingthe brake pedal (CVT) or the clutch pedal (M/T),you can change the operation mode in the order ofOFF, ACC, ON, OFF.

CAUTIONl When the engine is not running, put the

operation mode in OFF. Leaving the oper-ation mode in ON or ACC for a long timewhen the engine is not running may causethe battery to be discharged, making it im-possible to start the engine, lock and un-lock the steering wheel.

l When the battery is disconnected, the cur-rent operation mode is memorized. Afterreconnecting the battery, the memorizedmode is selected automatically. Before dis-connecting the battery for repair or re-placement, make sure to put the opera-tion mode in OFF.Be careful if you are not sure which oper-ation mode the vehicle is in when the bat-tery is run down.

l The operation mode cannot be changedfrom OFF to ACC or ON if the keyless op-eration key is not detected to be in the ve-hicle. Refer to “Keyless operation system:operating range for starting the engineand changing the operation mode” onpage 1-06.

Operation mode OFF reminder systemE00632200015

When the operation mode is in any mode otherthan OFF, if you close all the doors and the tailgatethen try to lock the doors and tailgate by pressingthe driver’s door switch, or the tailgate switch, awarning lamp will blink and the outer buzzer willsounds for approximately 3 seconds and you can-not lock the doors and tailgate.

Operation mode ON reminder systemE00632300016

If the driver’s door is opened with the engine stop-ped and the operation mode in any mode other thanOFF, the operation mode ON reminder inner buz-zer sounds intermittently to remind you to put theoperation mode in OFF.


4-10 OA0X13E4

4

Steering wheel lockE00601500751

[Except for vehicles equipped with key-less operation system]

To lockRemove the key at the “LOCK” position.Turn the steering wheel until it is locked.

To unlockTurn the key to the “ACC” position while movingthe steering wheel slightly right and left.

CAUTIONl Remove the key when leaving the vehicle.

In some countries, it is prohibited to leavethe key in the vehicle when parked.

[For vehicles equipped with keyless op-eration system]

To lockAfter pressing the engine switch and operationmode in OFF, when driver’s door is opened, thesteering wheel is locked.

NOTEl When the following operation is performed

with the operation mode in OFF, the steeringwheel is locked.

• Open or close the driver’s door.• Close all the doors.• Open one of the doors when all the doors

are closed.• Press the LOCK switch on the keyless op-

eration key, the driver’s door switch orthe tailgate switch.

• The selector lever is the “P” (PARK) po-sition (CVT).

l When the door is opened while the steeringwheel does not unlock, the buzzer sounds toalert the steering wheel is unlocked.

To unlockThe following methods can be used to unlock thesteering wheel.l Put the operation mode in ACC.l Start the engine.

CAUTIONl If the engine is stopped while driving, do

not open a door or press the LOCKswitch on the remote control switch untilthe vehicle stops in a safe place. Thiscould cause the steering wheel to lock,making it impossible to operate the vehicle.

l Carry the key with you when leaving thevehicle.If your vehicle needs to be towed, per-form the following operation to unlockthe steering wheel.

• On vehicles with M/T, put the opera-tion mode in ACC or ON.

• On vehicles with CVT, put the opera-tion mode in ON.

NOTEl When the steering wheel does not unlock,

the warning lamp will blink and the inner buz-zer will sounds. Press the engine switchagain while moving the steering wheel slight-ly right and left.

l When the steering wheel lock is abnormal,the warning lamp illuminates. Put the opera-tion mode in OFF and then press the lockswitch of the keyless operation key. Andthen press the engine switch, If the warninglamp illuminates again, contact a


4-11OA0X13E4

4

MITSUBISHI MOTORS Authorized ServicePoint.

l If there is a fault in the steering wheel lock,the warning lamp illuminates and the innerbuzzer sounds. Immediately stop the vehiclein a safe place and contact a MITSUBISHIMOTORS Authorized Service Point.

StartingE00601601052

Tips for startingE00632400020

[Except for vehicles equipped with keyless opera-tion system]Do not operate the starter motor continuously lon-ger than 10 seconds; doing so could run down thebattery. If the engine does not start, turn the igni-tion switch back to “LOCK”, wait a few seconds,and then try again.Trying repeatedly with the starter motor still turn-ing will damage the starter mechanism.

WARNINGl Never run the engine in a closed or poor-

ly ventilated area any longer than is nee-ded to move your vehicle in or out of thearea. Carbon monoxide gases are odour-less and can be fatal.

CAUTIONl Never attempt to start the engine by push-

ing or pulling the vehicle.l Do not run the engine at high rpm or

drive the vehicle at high speed until the en-gine has had a chance to warm up.

l Release the ignition key as soon as the en-gine starts to avoid damaging the startermotor.

[For vehicles equipped with keyless operation sys-tem]l The operation mode can be in any mode to

start the engine.l The starter motor will be turning for up to ap-

proximately 15 seconds if the engine switchis released at once. Pressing the engineswitch again while the starter motor is stillturning will stop the starter motor. The start-er motor will be turning for up to approxi-mately 30 seconds while the engine switch ispressed.If the engine does not start, wait for a whileand then attempt to start the engine again. Try-ing repeatedly with the starter motor still turn-ing will damage the starter mechanism.

WARNINGl Never run the engine in a closed or poor-

ly ventilated area any longer than is nee-ded to move your vehicle in or out of thearea. Carbon monoxide gases are odour-less and can be fatal.

CAUTIONl Never attempt to start the engine by push-

ing or pulling the vehicle.l Do not run the engine at high rpm or

drive the vehicle at high speed until the en-gine has had a chance to warm up.


4-12 OA0X13E4

4

Starting the engineE00601702409

[Except for vehicles equipped with keyless opera-tion system]The starting procedure is as follows:

1. Insert the ignition key and fasten the seat belt.2. Make sure the parking brake is applied.3. Depress and hold the brake pedal.4. Fully depress the clutch pedal (M/T).5. On vehicles with M/T, place the gearshift lev-

er in the “N” (Neutral) position. On vehicleswith CVT, make sure the selector lever is inthe “P” (PARK) position.

Vehicles with M/T Vehicles with CVT

6. After turning the ignition key to the “ON” po-sition, make certain that all warning lampsare functioning properly before starting theengine.

7. Turn the ignition key to the “START” posi-tion and release it when the engine starts.

NOTEl Minor noises may be heard on engine start-up.

These will disappear as the engine warms up.

When it is difficult to start the engineAfter several attempts, you may experience that theengine still does not start.

1. Make sure that all electric devices, such aslamps, air conditioning blower and rear win-dow demister, are turned off.

2. While depressing the brake pedal on vehiclesequipped with CVT or the clutch pedal onthe vehicles equipped with manual transmis-sion, press the accelerator pedal halfway andhold it there, then crank the engine. Releasethe accelerator pedal, immediately after theengine starts.

3. If the engine still will not start, the enginecould be flooded with too much petrol.While depressing the brake pedal on vehiclesequipped with CVT or the clutch pedal onthe vehicles equipped with manual transmis-sion, push the accelerator pedal all the waydown and hold it there, then crank the enginefor 5 to 6 seconds. Return the ignition switchto the “LOCK” position and release the accel-erator pedal. Wait a few seconds, and thencrank the engine again for 5 to 6 secondswhile depressing the brake pedal or theclutch pedal, but do not push the acceleratorpedal. Release the ignition key if the enginestarts. If the engine fails to start, repeat theseprocedures. If the engine still will not start,we recommend you to have the vehiclechecked.

[For vehicles equipped with keyless operation sys-tem]This vehicle is equipped with an electronically con-trolled fuel injection system. When starting the en-gine, do not depress the accelerator pedal. The starting procedure is as follows:

1. Fasten the seat belt.2. Make sure the parking brake is applied.3. Depress and hold the brake pedal.4. Fully depress and hold the clutch pedal (M/T).5. On vehicles with M/T, place the gearshift lev-

er in the “N” (Neutral) position.On vehicles with CVT, make sure the selec-tor lever is in the “P” (PARK) position.

Vehicles with M/T Vehicles with CVT

6. Press the engine switch.7. Make sure that all warning lamps are func-

tioning properly.

NOTEl Minor noises may be heard on engine start-

up. These will disappear as the engine warmsup.

When it is difficult to start the engineAfter several attempts, you may experience that theengine still does not start.

1. Make sure that all electric devices, such aslamps, air conditioning blower and rear win-dow demister, are turned off.


4-13OA0X13E4

4

2. While depressing the brake pedal on vehiclesequipped with CVT or the clutch pedal onthe vehicles equipped with manual transmis-sion, press the accelerator pedal halfway andhold it there, then crank the engine. Releasethe accelerator pedal, immediately after theengine starts.

3. If the engine still will not start, the enginecould be flooded with too much petrol.While depressing the brake pedal on vehiclesequipped with CVT or the clutch pedal onthe vehicles equipped with manual transmis-sion, push the accelerator pedal all the waydown and hold it there, then press the engineswitch to crank the engine. If the engine doesnot start after 5 to 6 seconds, push the engineswitch to stop cranking the engine, and re-lease the accelerator pedal. Put the operationmode in OFF. Wait a few seconds, and thenpress the engine switch to crank the engineagain while depressing the brake pedal or theclutch pedal, but do not push the acceleratorpedal. If the engine fails to start, repeat theseprocedures. If the engine still will not start,we recommend you to have the vehiclechecked.

Stopping the engineE00632700010

[For vehicles equipped with keyless operation sys-tem]

WARNINGl Do not operate the engine switch while

driving except in an emergency. If the en-gine is stopped while driving, the brakeservomechanism will cease to functionand braking efficiency will deteriorate. Al-so, the power steering system will not func-tion and it will require greater manual ef-fort to operate the steering. This could re-sult in a serious accident.

NOTEl If you have to bring the engine to an emergen-

cy stop while driving, press and hold the en-gine switch for 3 seconds or more, or press itquickly 3 times or more. The engine willstop and the operation mode will go to ACC.

l Do not stop the engine with the selector leverin any position other than the “P” (PARK) po-sition (CVT). If the engine is stopped withthe selector lever in any position other thanthe “P” (PARK) position, the operationmode will go to ACC rather than OFF.Put the operation mode in OFF after placingthe selector lever in the “P” (PARK) position.

1. Stop the vehicle.2. Fully engage the parking brake while depress-

ing the brake pedal.

3. On vehicles with M/T, press the engineswitch to stop the engine, move the gearshiftlever to the 1st (on a uphill) or “R” (Reverse)(on a downhill) position.On vehicles with CVT, move the selector lev-er to the “P” (PARK) position, press the en-gine switch to stop the engine.

If the keyless operation key is not oper-ating properly

E00632500050

Insert the keyless operation key into the key slot.Starting the engine and changing the operationmode should now be possible.Remove the keyless operation key from the keyslot after starting the engine or changing the opera-tion mode.

NOTEl Do not insert into the key slot anything other

than the keyless operation key. This couldcause damage or a malfunction.


4-14 OA0X13E4

4

l Remove the object or additional key from thethe keyless operation key before inserting thekey into the key slot. The vehicle may not beable to receive the registered ID code fromthe registered key. Therefore, the engine maynot start and the operation mode may notchange.

Keyless operation key reminder*E00632600022

If the operation mode is in OFF and the driver’sdoor is opened with the keyless operation key inthe key slot, the warning lamp will blink and theouter buzzer sounds for approximately 3 secondsand the inner buzzer sounds for approximately 1 mi-nute to remind you to remove the key.

Auto Stop & Go (AS&G) system*E00627400080

The Auto Stop & Go (AS&G) system automatical-ly stops and restarts the engine without operatingthe ignition switch or engine switch when the vehi-cle is stopped, such as at a traffic light or in a traf-fic jam, to reduce exhaust gases, increase fuel effi-ciency.

CAUTIONl If the vehicle will be stopped for a long

time or if you will leave the vehicle unat-tended, stop the engine.

NOTEl The accumulated time the engine has been

stopped by Auto Stop & Go (AS&G) systemis displayed in the multi information display.Refer to “AS&G monitor*” on page 3-05.

Automatically stopping the engineE00627500124

The Auto Stop & Go (AS&G) system is automati-cally activated when the ignition switch is turned tothe “ON” position or the operation mode is put inON.You can deactivate the system by pressing the “Au-to Stop & Go (AS&G) OFF” switch.Refer to “To deactivate” on page 4-18.When the Auto Stop & Go (AS&G) system will op-erate, the indication lamp will turn on to inform thedriver.

Indication lamp

[For vehicles with M/T]1. Stop the vehicle.2. While depressing the brake pedal, fully de-

press the clutch pedal and place the gearshiftlever in the “N” (Neutral) position.

3. Release the clutch pedal. The engine willstop automatically.


4-15OA0X13E4

4

[For vehicles with CVT]1. Stop the vehicle.2. Depressing the brake pedal. The engine will

stop automatically.

NOTEl When the engine is automatically stopped,

changes will occur in the driving operations.Pay closel attention to the following.

• The brake booster becomes inoperativeand the pedal effort will increase.If the vehicle is moving, press down thebrake pedal harder than usual.

• The electric power steering system (EPS)becomes inoperative and it will becomeharder to turn the steering wheel.

CAUTIONl Observe the following precautions when

the engine is stopped automatically. Oth-erwise, an unexpected accident might oc-cur when the engine restarts automatical-ly.

CAUTION• Do not depress the accelerator pedal

to race the engine while the vehicle isstopped (regardless of whether the en-gine is running or stopped).Otherwise, an unexpected accidentmight occur when the engine restartsautomatically.

• If the driver’s seat belt is unfastenedand driver’s door is opened or if thebonnet is opened, the indication lamp/indicator display will blink to informthe driver and buzzer sounds (CVT).If this occurs, the engine will not re-start automatically, the seat belt is re-fastened, driver’s door is closed andthe bonnet is closed. On vehicles withM/T, while depressing the brake ped-al, fully depress the clutch pedal tostart the engine.On vehicles with CVT, while depress-ing the brake pedal, move the selectorlever to the “P” (PARK) or “N” (NEU-TRAL) position to start the engine.For details, refer to “Starting” onpage 4-12.

CAUTION• On vehicles with M/T, do not move

the gearshift lever to a position otherthan the “N” (Neutral) position.If the gearshift lever is moved to a po-sition other than the “N” (Neutral) po-sition, the indication lamp/indicatordisplay blinks and the buzzer sounds.If the gearshift lever is returned to the“N” (Neutral) position, the indicationlamp/indicator display stops blinkingand the buzzer stops sounding. The en-gine will not restart if the gearshift lev-er is in a position other than the “N”(Neutral) position.

NOTEl In the following cases, the Auto Stop & Go

(AS&G) system will not operate and the en-gine will not stop automatically even if the ve-hicle is stopped.The indication lamp/indicator display willnot turn on.

• Driver’s seat belt is not fastened• When the driver’s door is opened• Bonnet is open• After the engine restarts automatically,

the vehicle speed has not exceeded ap-proximately 5 km/h (3 mph)

• After the engine start, approximately 30seconds or more have not elapsed

• After the engine restarts automaticallyand the vehicle stops again within 10 sec-onds.

• Engine coolant temperature is low


4-16 OA0X13E4

4

• Ambient temperature is lower than ap-proximately 3 °C

• When the heater is operated, vehicle indi-cator temperature is not still hot enough.

• Air conditioning is operating and passen-ger compartment has not sufficientlycooled

• Demister switch is pressedRefer to “Demisting of the windscreenand door windows: For quick demisting”on page 5-11.

• When the air conditioner is operated inAUTO mode where the temperature con-trol is set to the max. hot or the max. cool.

• Electric power consumption is high, suchas when the rear window demister or oth-er electrical components are operating orthe blower speed is set to a high setting.

• Battery voltage or battery performance islow

• Check engine warning lamp is illumina-ted or the indication lamp is blinking

• Brake booster vacuum pressure is low be-cause the brake pedal is depressed repeat-edly or depressed harder than usual (theindication lamp will turn on)

• The selector lever is other than in the “D”(DRIVE) position (CVT)

• ASC operation indicator and ASC OFF in-dicator is turn on (CVT)

• CVT warning lamp will turn on/warningdisplay will display (CVT)

l In the following cause, the engine will notstop automatically even if indication lamp/in-dicator display turn on.

• Push the accelerator pedal• Brake booster vacuum pressure is low• Operate the steering wheel

• Brake pedal is not sufficiently depressed(CVT)

• Parking on steep hill (CVT)• Parking brake operates (CVT)

l If the Auto Stop & Go (AS&G) system oper-ates while the air conditioner is operating,both the engine and the air conditioning com-pressor will stop. Therefore, only the blowerwill operate.

l If the demisting function and the Auto Stop& Go (AS&G) system are needed at thesame time, it is recommended to set themode selection to the Foot/Demister position.Refer to “Mode selection” on page 5-02.

l If the air conditioner is operating, set the tem-perature control higher to lengthen the timethat the engine is stopped automatically.

Automatically restarting the engineE00627600125

On vehicles with M/T, depress the clutch pedalwhile the gearshift lever is in the “N” (Neutral) po-sition. The indication lamp turns off and the enginerestarts automatically.On vehicles with CVT, Release the brake pedal.The indication lamp turns off and the engine restartautomatically.

NOTEl If the engine does not restart automatically or

if the engine stalls, the charge warning lampand check engine warning lamp will illumi-nate. One vehicles with CVT, indicatorblinks, and buzzer sounds. If the engine isstarted, the buzzer stops sounding. But in-dicator is blinking until the engine is stopped.If this occurs, on vehicles with M/T, the en-gine will not restart even if the clutch pedalis depressed again. While depressing thebrake pedal, fully depress the clutch pedal tostart the engine. On vehicles with CVT, theengine will not restart even if the release thebrake pedal again.While depressing the brake pedal, move theselector lever to the “P” (PARK) or “N”(NEUTRAL) position to start the engine.For details, refer to “Starting” on page 4-12.

CAUTIONl In the following cases, the engine will re-

start automatically even if the engine wasstopped by the Auto Stop & Go (AS&G)system. Pay attention, otherwise an unex-pected accident might occur when the en-gine restarts.

• Vehicle speed is 3 km/h (2 mph) orhigher when coasting down a slope

• Brake booster vacuum pressure is lowbecause the brake pedal is depressedrepeatedly or depressed harder thanusual

• Engine coolant temperature is low• When the air conditioning is operated

by pressing the air conditioning switch.


4-17OA0X13E4

4

CAUTION• When the preset temperature of the

air conditioning is changed significant-ly.

• When the air conditioner is operatedin AUTO mode where the tempera-ture control is set to the max. hot orthe max. cool

• When the air conditioner is ON, thepassenger compartment temperaturerises and the air conditioning compres-sor operates to lower the temperature

• Demister switch is pressedRefer to “For quick demisting” onpage 5-11

• Electric power consumption is high,such as when the rear window demis-ter or other electrical components areoperating or the blower speed is set toa high setting.

• Push the accelerator pedal• Battery voltage or battery perform-

ance is low• Operate the steering wheel• After the engine stop, 3 minute elapse

(CVT)• Move the selector lever to the “R” (RE-

VERSE) position (CVT)• Move the selector lever from the “N”

(NEUTRAL) to “D” (DRIVE) position(CVT)

NOTEl In the following cases, the engine will not re-

start automatically.

• While the engine is stopped automatical-ly, the “Auto Stop & Go (AS&G) OFF”switch is pressed to deactivate the “AutoStop & Go (AS&G) OFF” system.

• The driver has left the driver’s seat afterunfastening the seat belt and opening thedoor.

l When the engine restarts automatically, theaudio volume may temporarily decrease.This does not indicate a malfunction.

l While the engine is stopped automatically,the air volume change of the air conditionermay temporarily be experienced. This doesnot indicate a malfunction.

l While the engine is stopped automatically, ifthe selector lever is moved to the “P”(PARK) position quickly with the brake ped-al is kept depressed, the engine is kept stop-ped with blinking the AS&G indicator evenif you release the brake pedal.If you want to restart the engine, depress thebrake pedal again.

To deactivateE00627700100

The Auto Stop & Go (AS&G) system is automati-cally activated when the ignition switch is turned tothe “ON” position or the operation mode put inON. You can deactivate the system by pressing the“Auto Stop & Go (AS&G) OFF” switch.When the Auto Stop & Go (AS&G) system is deac-tivated, the indicator will be turned on.

To reactivate the Auto Stop & Go (AS&G) system,press the “Auto Stop & Go (AS&G) OFF” switch;the indicator will turn off.

Indication lamp

NOTEl This indicator will also turn on for a few sec-

onds when the ignition switch is turned tothe “ON” position or the operation mode putin ON.

If the indication lamp blinks whiledriving

E00627800084

If the indication lamp blinks, the Auto Stop &Go (AS&G) system is malfunctioning and will notoperate.We recommend you to consult a MITSUBISHIMOTORS Authorized Service Point.


4-18 OA0X13E4

4

Manual transmission*E00602000708

The shift pattern is shown on the gearshift leverknob. To start off, depress the clutch pedal all theway down and shift into 1st or “R” (Reverse) posi-tion. Then gradually release the clutch pedal whiledepressing the accelerator pedal.

CAUTIONl Do not put the gearshift lever into the re-

verse position while the vehicle is movingforward. Doing so could damage the trans-mission.

l Do not rest your foot on the clutch pedalwhile driving. Doing so could cause rapidwear to the clutch.

l Do not coast in the “N” (Neutral) position.l Do not use the gearshift lever as a handr-

est, because this can result in prematurewear of the transmission shift forks.

NOTEl During cold weather, shifting may be diffi-

cult until the transmission lubricant haswarmed up. This is normal and not harmfulto the transmission.

l If it is hard to shift into 1st, depress theclutch pedal again; the shift will then be eas-ier to make.

l To shift into the “R” (Reverse) position from5th gear, move the gearshift lever to the “N”(Neutral) position, and then move it to the“R” (Reverse) position.

Changing gearsE00610600295

Always take care to change the gear with the vehi-cle speed matched to the engine speed. Proper shift-ing will improve fuel economy and prolong enginelife.Avoid shifting down at high speed, as this maycause excessive engine speed and damage the en-gine.

NOTEl The gearshift indicator (if so equipped)

shows recommended gearshift points for fuel-efficient driving. It shows a “ ” when an up-shift is recommended, and it shows a “ ”when a downshift is recommended.


4-19OA0X13E4

4

Possible driving speedE00610801555

Avoid shifting down at high speed, as this may cause excessive engine speed and damage the engine.


1st gear 50 km/h (30 mph)

2nd gear 95 km/h (59 mph)

3rd gear 145 km/h (90 mph)


Use 5 th gear whenever vehicle speed allows, for maximum fuel economy.


4-20 OA0X13E4

4

Automatic transmissionINVECS-III CVT (Intelligent &Innovative Vehicle Electronic

Control System III)*E00602100275

The CVT will automatically and continuouslychange its gear ratio depending on road and drivingconditions. This helps achieve smooth driving andexcellent fuel efficiency.

Selector lever operationE00602200319

The CVT selects an optimum gear ratio automati-cally, depending on the speed of the vehicle andthe position of the accelerator pedal.

LHD RHD

LHD

RHD

While depressing the brake pedal,move the selector lever through the gate.

Move the selector lever through the gate.

WARNINGl Always depress the brake pedal when

shifting the selector lever into the otherposition from the “P” (PARK) or “N”(NEUTRAL) position.Never put your foot on the accelerator ped-al while shifting the selector lever fromthe “P” (PARK) or “N” (NEUTRAL) po-sition.

NOTEl To avoid erroneous operation, move the se-

lector lever firmly into each position and brief-ly hold it there. Always check the positionshown by the selector lever position displayafter moving the selector lever.

l If the brake pedal is not depressed and held,the shift-lock device activates to prevent theselector lever from being moved from the“P” (PARK) position.

When the selector lever cannot be shifted fromthe “P” (PARK) position

E00629000367

When the selector lever cannot be shifted from the“P” (PARK) position to another position while thebrake pedal is pressed and held down with the igni-tion switch or the operation mode in ON, the bat-tery may be flat or the shift-lock mechanism maybe malfunctioning.Immediately have your vehicle checked by aMITSUBISHI MOTORS Authorized Service Point.If you need to move the vehicle, shift the selectorlever as follows.For LHD vehicles

1. Make sure the parking brake is applied.2. Stop the engine if it is running.


4-21OA0X13E4

4

3. Insert a straight blade (or minus) screwdriverwith a cloth over its tip into notch (A) or thecover. Pry gently as shown to remove the cov-er.

4. Depress the brake pedal with the right foot.5. Insert a straight blade (or minus) screwdriver

in the shiftlock release hole (B). Shift the se-lector lever to the “N” (NEUTRAL) positionwhile pressing the straight blade (or minus)screwdriver down.

For RHD vehicles1. Make sure the parking brake is applied.

2. Stop the engine if it is running.3. Depress the brake pedal with the right foot.4. Insert a straight blade (or minus) screwdriver

in the shiftlock release hole (A). Shift the se-lector lever to the “N” (NEUTRAL) positionwhile pressing the straight blade (or minus)screwdriver down.

Selector lever position displayE00602300411

When the ignition switch is turned to the “ON” po-sition or the operation mode is put in ON, the posi-tion of the selector lever is indicated in the multi-information display.

Selector lever positionsE00602400382

“P” PARKThis position locks the transmission to prevent thevehicle from moving. The engine can be started inthis position.

“R” REVERSEThis position is to back up.

CAUTIONl Never shift into the “P” (PARK) or “R”

(REVERSE) position while the vehicle isin motion to avoid transmission damage.

“N” NEUTRALAt this position the transmission is disengaged. It isthe same as the neutral position on a manual trans-mission, and should only be used when the vehicleis stationary for an extended length of time duringdriving, such as in a traffic jam.

WARNINGl Never move the selector lever to the “N”

(NEUTRAL) position while driving. A se-rious accident could occur since youcould accidentally move the lever into the“P” (PARK) or “R” (REVERSE) positionor you will lose engine braking.

l On a gradient the engine should be star-ted in the “P” (PARK) position, not in the“N” (NEUTRAL) position.


4-22 OA0X13E4

4

WARNINGl To prevent rolling, always keep your foot

on the brake pedal when the vehicle is in“N” (NEUTRAL) position, or when shift-ing into or out of “N” (NEUTRAL) posi-tion.

“D” DRIVEThis position is used for most city and highway driv-ing. The transmission will automatically and contin-uously change its gear ratio depending on road anddriving conditions.

CAUTIONl To prevent transmission damage, never

shift into the “D” (DRIVE) position fromthe “R” (REVERSE) position while the ve-hicle is in motion.

“Ds” (DOWNSHIFT & SPORTY DRIVING)Use when engine braking is needed, or for high-power sport drive.

“L” (LOW)This position is for driving up very steep hills andfor engine braking at low speeds when drivingdown steep hills.

WARNINGl This position can be used for maximum

engine braking.Be very careful not to shift into “L”(LOW) suddenly.Sudden engine braking may cause thetires to skid.Select this position according to the roadconditions and vehicle speed.

When a malfunction occurs in the au-tomatic transmission

E00632000013

When the selector lever position indicator blinksE00632100043

When the selector lever position indicator blinkswhile you are driving, there could be a malfunctionin the automatic transmission system or CVT fluidtemperature becomes abnormally high.

NOTEl “A” indicator does brink only the condition

that the CVT positional switch is broken.It does not indicate in normal driving condi-tion.

CAUTIONl If a malfunction occurs in the CVT while

driving, the indication lamp will blink.In this case, immediately park your vehi-cle in a safe place and follow these proce-dures:[If the indication lamp blinks rapidly(once per second), the CVT fluid is over-heating.]Park your vehicle in a safe place but donot turn off the engine. Move the selectorlever to the “P” (PARK) position andopen the bonnet. Keep the engine idling.After a while, move the selector lever intoany position other than “P” (PARK) posi-tion and confirm that the indication lampstops blinking. It is safe to continue driv-ing if the indication lamp no longer blinks.If the indication lamp continues blinkingor blinks intermittently, have your vehi-cle inspected.[If the indication lamp blinks slowly(once per 2 seconds), the CVT safety de-vice may be operating due to a malfunc-tion.]Have the vehicle inspected as soon as pos-sible.


4-23OA0X13E4

4

Operation of the CVTE00602600401

CAUTIONl Before selecting a position with the en-

gine running and the vehicle stationary,fully depress the brake pedal to preventthe vehicle from creeping.The vehicle will begin to move as soon asthe CVT is engaged, especially when theengine speed is high, at fast idle or withthe air conditioning operating, the brakesshould only be released when you areready to drive away.

l Depress the brake pedal with the rightfoot at all times.Using the left foot could cause driver move-ment delay in case of an emergency.

l To prevent sudden acceleration, neverrace the engine when shifting from the“P” (PARK) or “N” (NEUTRAL) position.

l Operating the accelerator pedal while theother foot is resting on the brake pedalwill affect braking efficiency and maycause premature wear of brake pads.

CAUTIONl Use the selector lever in the correct shift

position in accordance with driving condi-tions.Never coast downhill backward with theselector lever in the “D” (DRIVE), “Ds”(DOWNSHIFT & SPORTY DRIVING),“L” (LOW) position or coast forwardwith the selector lever in the “R” (RE-VERSE) position.The engine may stop and the unexpectedincrease in brake pedal effort and steer-ing wheel weight could lead to an accident.

l Do not race the engine with brake pedalpressed when the vehicle is stationary.This can damage the CVT.Also, when you depress the acceleratorpedal while holding down the brake ped-al with the selector lever in the “D”(DRIVE) position, the engine revolutionsmay not rise as high as when performingthe same operation with the selector leverin the “N” (NEUTRAL) position.

Passing accelerationE00602700112

To gain extra acceleration in “D” (DRIVE) posi-tion, push the accelerator to the floor. The CVTwill automatically downshift.

Uphill/downhill drivingE00603000125

DRIVING UPHILLThe transmission prevents unnecessary upshiftseven when the accelerator pedal is released and en-sures smooth driving.

DRIVING DOWNHILLAccording to the conditions, the transmission willautomatically shift to a lower gear ratio to achievestronger engine braking. This may help reduceyour need to use the service brake.

WaitingE00602800113

For short waiting periods, such as at traffic signalsthe vehicle can be left in selector lever position andheld stationary with the service brake.For longer waiting periods with the engine running,place the selector lever in the “N” (NEUTRAL) po-sition and apply the parking brake, while holdingthe vehicle stationary with the service brake.

CAUTIONl Never hold the vehicle stationary while in

CVT on a hill with the accelerator, al-ways apply the parking brake and/or serv-ice brake.

ParkingE00602900039

To park the vehicle, first bring it to a completestop, fully engage the parking brake, and thenmove the selector lever to the “P” (PARK) position.If you are going to leave the vehicle unattended, al-ways switch off the engine and carry the key.


4-24 OA0X13E4

4

NOTEl On a slope, be sure to apply the parking

brake before moving the selector lever to the“P” (PARK) position. If you move the selec-tor lever to the “P” (PARK) position beforeapplying the parking brake, it may be diffi-cult to disengage the selector lever from the“P” (PARK) position when next you drivethe vehicle, requiring application of a strongforce to the selector lever to move from the“P” (PARK) position.

When the CVT makes no speed changeE00603100171

If the transmission does not change speeds whiledriving, or your vehicle does not pick up enoughspeed when starting on an uphill slope, it may bethat there is something unusual happening in thetransmission, causing a safety device to activate.Have your vehicle checked as soon as possible.

BrakingE00607001957

All the parts of the brake system are critical to safe-ty. Have the vehicle checked at regular intervals ac-cording to the service booklet.

CAUTIONl Avoid driving habits that cause heavy

braking and never “ride” the brakes byresting your foot on the brake pedalwhile driving.It causes brake overheating and fade.

Brake systemThe service brake is divided into two brake cir-cuits. And your vehicle is equipped with powerbrakes. If one brake circuit fails, the other is availa-ble to stop the vehicle. If you should lose the pow-er assist for some reason, the brakes will still work.In these situations, even if the brake pedal movesdown to the very end of its possible stroke or re-sists being depressed, keep depressing the brake ped-al down harder and further than usual; stop drivingas soon as possible and have the brake system re-paired.

WARNINGl Do not turn off the engine while your ve-

hicle is in motion. If you turn off the en-gine while driving, the power assistancefor the braking system will stop workingand your brakes will not work effectively.

WARNINGl If the power assist is lost or if either

brake hydraulic system stops workingproperly, have your vehicle checked im-mediately.

Warning lampThe brake warning lamp illuminates to indicate afault in the braking system. Refer to “Brake warn-ing lamp” on page 3-12.

When brakes are wetCheck the brake system while driving at a lowspeed immediately after starting, especially whenthe brakes are wet, to confirm they work normally.A film of water can be formed on the brake discsor brake drums and prevent normal braking afterdriving in heavy rain or through large puddles, orafter the vehicle is washed. If this occurs, dry thebrakes out by driving slowly while lightly depress-ing the brake pedal.

When driving downhillIt is important to take advantage of the engine brak-ing by shifting to a lower shift position while driv-ing on steep downhill roads in order to prevent thebrakes from overheating.


4-25OA0X13E4

4

WARNINGl Do not leave any objects near the brake

pedal or let a floor mat slide under it; do-ing so could prevent the full pedal strokethat would be necessary in an emergency.Make sure that the pedal can be operatedfreely at all times. Make sure the floormat is securely held in place.

Brake padsl New brakes need to be broken-in by moder-

ate use for the first 200 km (125 miles).Avoid hard braking situations.

l The disc brakes are provided with a warningdevice which emits a shrieking metallicsound while braking if the brake pads havereached their wear limit.If you hear this sound, have the brake pads re-placed immediately.

WARNINGl Driving with worn brake pads will make

it harder to stop, and can cause an acci-dent.

Hill start assist*E00628000142

The hill start assist makes it easy to start off on asteep uphill slope by preventing the vehicle frommoving backwards. It keeps the braking force forabout 2 seconds when you move your foot from thebrake pedal to the accelerator pedal.

CAUTIONl Do not overly rely on the hill start assist

to prevent backwards movement of the ve-hicle. Under certain circumstances, evenwhen hill start assist is activated, the vehi-cle may move backwards if the brake ped-al is not sufficiently depressed, if the vehi-cle is heavily loaded, or if the road is verysteep or slippery.

l The hill start assist is not designed tokeep the vehicle stopped in place on up-hill slopes for more than 2 seconds.

l When facing uphill, do not rely on usingthe hill start assist to maintain a stoppedposition as an alternative to depressingthe brake pedal.Doing so could result in an accident.

l Do not perform the following operationwhile the hill start assist is operating.[Except for vehicles equipped with key-less operation system]Turn the ignition switch to the “LOCK”or “ACC” position.[Vehicles equipped with keyless operationsystem]Put the operation mode in OFF or ACC.The hill start assist could stop operating,which could result in an accident.

To operateE00628100358

1. Stop the vehicle completely using the brakepedal.

2. Place the selector lever into the “D” position.

NOTEl When reversing on an uphill slope, the selec-

tor lever into the “R” position.

3. Release the brake pedal and the hill start as-sist will maintain the braking force appliedwhile stopping for approximately 2 seconds.

4. Depress the accelerator pedal and the hillstart assist gradually will decrease the brak-ing force as the vehicle starts moving.

NOTEl The hill start assist is activated when all of

the following conditions are met.• The engine is running.

(The hill start assist will not be activatedwhile the engine is starting or immediate-ly after the engine is started.)

• The selector lever is in any position otherthan “P” or “N”.

• The vehicle is completely stationary,with the brake pedal depressed.

• The parking brake is released.l The hill start assist will not operate if the ac-

celerator pedal is depressed before the brakepedal is released.

l The hill start assist also operates when revers-ing on an uphill slope.


4-26 OA0X13E4

4

l When the hill start assist activated, you mayfeel the operation sound or vibration from un-der the body.This is a normal result of the hill start assistoperation, and does not indicate a problem.

Warning indicatorE00628200359

If an abnormal condition occurs in the system, theindicator will turn on.

- ASC indicator

CAUTIONl If the warning is turn on, the hill start as-

sist will not operate. Start off carefully.l Park your vehicle in a safe place and stop

the engine.Restart the engine and check whether thewarning indicator went out, in which casethe hill start assist is again working nor-mally.If the warning remains displayed or reap-pears frequently, it is not necessary tostop the vehicle immediately, but the vehi-cle should be inspected by aMITSUBISHI MOTORS AuthorizedService Point.

Brake assist systemE00627000549

The brake assist system is a device assisting driverswho cannot depress the brake pedal firmly when itis necessary to do so (such as in emergency stop sit-uations) and provides greater braking force. If the brake pedal is depressed suddenly, the brakeswill be applied with more force than usual.

CAUTIONl The brake assist system is not a device de-

signed to exercise braking force greaterthan its capacity. Make sure to alwayskeep a sufficient distance between vehi-cles in front of you without relying toomuch on the brake assist system.

NOTEl Once the brake assist system is operational,

it maintains great braking force even if thebrake pedal is lightly released.To stop its operation, completely removeyour foot from the brake pedal.

l When the brake assist system is in use, youmay feel as if the depressed brake pedal issoft, the pedal moves in small motions in con-junction with the sound of the ABS opera-tion, or the vehicle body and the steeringwheel vibrate. This occurs when the brake as-sist system is operating normally and doesnot indicate faulty operation. Continue tofirmly depress the brake pedal.

l When the anti-lock brake system lamp is illu-minated, the brake assist system is not func-tioning.


4-27OA0X13E4

4

Emergency stop signal systemE00626000050

This is a device that reduces the possibility of rearend collisions by the rapid and automatic blinkingof the hazard warning lamps to alert vehicles ap-proaching from behind during sudden braking.When the emergency stop signal system operates,the hazard warning indication lamp in the instru-ment cluster blinks rapidly at the same time.

CAUTIONl If the ABS warning or ASC warning is dis-

played, the emergency stop signal systemmay not operate.Refer to “ABS warning lamp” on page4-29.Refer to “ASC warning indicator” onpage 4-31.

NOTEl [Activating condition for the emergency stop

signal system]It activates when all of the following condi-tions are met.

• The vehicle speed is approximately55 km/h (34 mph) or higher.

• The brake pedal has been depressed, andthe system judges that it was sudden brak-ing from the vehicle deceleration and theoperating condition of the anti-lock brakesystem (ABS).

[Deactivating condition for the emergencystop signal system]It deactivates when one of the following con-ditions is met.

• The brake pedal is released.• The hazard warning flasher switch is

pressed.• The system judges that it was not sudden

braking from the vehicle deceleration andthe operating condition of the anti-lockbrake system (ABS).

Anti-lock brake system (ABS)E00607101479

The anti-lock brake system (ABS) helps preventthe wheels from locking during braking. This helpsmaintain vehicle drivability and steering wheel han-dling.

Driving hintsl Always keep a safe distance from the vehicle

in front of you. Even if your vehicle is equip-ped with ABS, leave a greater braking dis-tance when:

• Driving on gravel or snow-covered roads.• Driving with snow traction device (tyre

chains) installed.• Driving on uneven road surfaces.

l Operation of ABS is not restricted to situa-tions where brakes are applied suddenly.This system may also prevent the wheelsfrom locking when you drive over manholes,steel roadwork plates, road markings, or anyuneven road surface.

l When the ABS is activated, you may feel thebrake pedal pulsation and the vibrations ofthe vehicle body and steering wheel. It mayalso feel as if the pedal resists being pressed.In this situation, simply hold the brake ped-al down firmly. Do not pump the brake,which will result in reduced braking per-formance.

l An operation noise is emitted from the en-gine compartment or you can feel a shockfrom the brake pedal when starting to driveimmediately after starting the engine. Theseare normal sounds or operations that theABS makes when performing a self-check. Itdoes not indicate a malfunction.


4-28 OA0X13E4

4

l The ABS can be used after the vehicle hasreached a speed over approximately 10 km/h(6 mph). It stops working when the vehicleslows below approximately 5 km/h (3 mph).

CAUTIONl The ABS cannot prevent accidents. It is

your responsibility to take safety precau-tions and to drive carefully.

l To prevent failure of the ABS, be sure all4 wheels and tyres are the same size andthe same type.

l Do not install any aftermarket limited-slip differential (LSD) on your vehicle.The ABS may stop functioning properly.

ABS warning lampE00607201308

If there is a malfunction in the system, the ABSwarning lamp will come on.

Under normal conditions, the ABS warning lampcomes on when the ignition switch is turned to the“ON” position or the operation mode is put in ONand goes off a few seconds later.

CAUTIONl Any of the following indicates that the

ABS is not functioning and only the stand-ard brake system is working. (The stand-ard brake system is functioning normal-ly.) If this happens, we recommend you tohave your vehicle inspected as soon as pos-sible.

• When the ignition switch is turned tothe “ON” position or the operationmode is put in ON, the warning lampdoes not come on or it remains on anddoes not go off.

• The warning lamp comes on while driv-ing

If the warning lamp illuminates whiledriving

E00607301383

If only the ABS warning lamp illuminateAvoid hard braking and high-speed driving. Stopthe vehicle in a safe place.Restart the engine and check to see whether thelamp goes out after a few minutes driving; if it thenremains off during driving, there is no problem.However, if the warning lamp do not disappear, orif they come on again when the vehicle is driven,we recommend you to have the vehicle checked.

If the ABS warning lamp and brake warninglamp illuminate at the same timeThe ABS and brake force distribution function maynot work, so hard braking could make the vehicleunstable.Avoid hard braking and high-speed driving. Stopthe vehicle in a safe place and we recommend youto have it checked.

After driving on icy roadsE00618800206

After driving on snow or icy roads, remove anysnow and ice which may have accumulated aroundthe wheels. On vehicles that have an ABS, be care-ful not to damage the wheel speed sensors (A) orthe cables located at each wheel.

Front Rear


4-29OA0X13E4

4

Electric power steering system(EPS)

E00629200271

The power steering system operates while the en-gine in running.It helps reduce the effort needed to turn the steer-ing wheel.If the power assist it lost, you will notice it takesmuch more effort to steer.In this happens, have the vehicle inspected by aMITSUBISHI MOTORS Authorized Service Point.

WARNINGl Do not stop the engine while the vehicle is

moving. Stopping the engine would makethe steering wheel extremely hard toturn, possibly resulting in an accident.

NOTEl During repeated full-lock turning of the steer-

ing wheel (for example, while you are ma-noeuvring the vehicle into a parking space),a protection function may be activated to pre-vent overheating of the power steering sys-tem. This function will make the steeringwheel gradually harder to turn. In this event,limit your turning of the steering wheel for awhile. When the system has cooled down,the steering action will return to normal.

l If you turn the steering wheel while the vehi-cle is stationary with the headlamps on, theheadlamps may become dim. This behaviouris not abnormal. The headlamps will returnto their original brightness after a short while.

Electric power steering system warn-ing lamp

If there is a malfunction in the system, the warninglamp will come on.Under normal conditions, the warning lamp comeson when the ignition switch is turned to the “ON”position or the operation mode is put in ON, andgoes off after the engine has started.

CAUTIONl If the warning lamp comes on while the

engine is running, have the vehicle inspec-ted by a MITSUBISHI MOTORS Author-ized Service Point as soon as possible.It may become harder to turn the steer-ing wheel.

Active stability control (ASC)E00616700445

The Active Stability Control (ASC) takes overallcontrol of the anti-lock brake system, traction con-trol function and stability control function to helpmaintain the vehicle’s control and traction. Pleaseread this section in conjunction with the page onthe anti-lock brake system, traction control func-tion and stability control function. Anti-lock brake system (ABS) ® p. 4-28Traction control function ® p. 4-31Stability control function ® p. 4-31

CAUTIONl Do not over-rely on the ASC. Even the

ASC cannot prevent the natural laws ofphysics from acting on the vehicle.This system, like any other system, haslimits and cannot help you to maintaintraction and control of the vehicle in allcircumstances. Reckless driving may leadto accidents. It is the driver’s responsibil-ity to drive carefully. This means takinginto account the traffic, road and environ-mental conditions.

l Be sure to use the same specified type andsize of tyre on all 4 wheels. Otherwise, theASC may not work properly.

l Do not install any aftermarket limited-slip differential (LSD) on your vehicle.The ASC may stop functioning properly.


4-30 OA0X13E4

4

NOTEl An operation noise may be emitted from the

engine compartment in the following situa-tions. The sound is associated with checkingthe operations of the ASC. At this time, youmay feel a shock from the brake pedal if youdepress it. These do not indicate a malfunc-tion.

• When the ignition switch is turned to the“ON” position or the operation mode isput in ON.

• When the vehicle is driven for a while af-ter the engine is turned on.

l When the ASC is activated, you may feel avibration in the vehicle body or hear a whin-ing sound from the engine compartment.This indicates that the system is operating nor-mally. It does not indicate a malfunction.

l When the anti-lock brake system warninglamp is illuminated, the ASC is not active.

Traction control functionE00619000133

On slippery surfaces, the traction control functionprevents the drive wheels from excessive spinning,thus helping the vehicle to start moving from a stop-ped condition. It also provides sufficient drivingforce and steering performance as the vehicle turnswhile pressing the acceleration pedal.

CAUTIONl When driving a vehicle on a snowy or icy

road, be sure to install snow tyres anddrive the vehicle at moderate speeds.

Stability control functionE00619100017

The stability control function is designed to helpthe driver maintain control of the vehicle on slip-pery roads or during rapid steering manoeuvres. Itworks by controlling the engine output and brakeon each wheel.

NOTEl The stability control function operates at

speeds of about 15 km/h (9 mph) or higher.

ASC operation indicatorE00619300615

-ASC indicatorThe indicator will blink when theASC is operating.

CAUTIONl When indicator blinks, ASC is operat-

ing, which means that the road is slipperyor that your vehicle’s wheels are begin-ning to slip. If this happens, drive slowerwith less accelerator input.

NOTEl The indicator may turn on when you start

the engine. This means that the battery volt-age momentarily dropped when the enginewas started. It does not indicate a malfunc-tion, provided that the display goes out imme-diately.

l When a compact spare tyre has been put onyour vehicle, the gripping ability of the tyrewill be lower, making it more likely that the

indicator will blink.

ASC warning indicatorE00619400632

If an abnormal condition occurs in the system, theindicators will turn on.

-ASC indicator

-ASC OFF indicator

CAUTIONl The system may be malfunctioning.

Park your vehicle in a safe place and stopthe engine.Restart the engine and check whether theindicator go out. If they go out, there isno abnormal condition. If they do not goout or appears frequently, it is not neces-sary to stop the vehicle immediately, butwe recommend you to have your vehicleinspected.


4-31OA0X13E4

4

TowingE00624400076

CAUTIONl When towing the vehicle with only the

front wheels or only the rear wheelsraised off the ground, do not place the ig-nition switch in the “ON” position or donot put the operation mode in ON. Plac-ing the ignition switch in the “ON” posi-tion or putting the operation mode in ONcould cause the ASC to operate, resultingin an accident.Note that the correct towing method de-pends on the transmission type and the ve-hicle’s drive configuration.For details, refer to “Towing” on page6-17.

Rear-view camera*E00618400576

The rear-view camera is a system that shows theview behind the vehicle on a screen of theMITSUBISHI Multi Entertainment System.

CAUTIONl The rear-view camera is an assistance sys-

tem that enables the driver to check forobstacles behind the vehicle. Its range ofview is limited, so you should not overlydepend on it. Please drive just as careful-ly as you would if the vehicle did not havethe rear-view camera.

l Be sure to visually confirm safety aroundthe vehicle with your own eyes. Do not de-pend entirely on the rear-view camera.

Range of view of rear-view cameraThe range of view of the rear-view camera is limi-ted to the area shown in the illustrations. It cannotshow both sides and the lower part of the rear bump-er, etc.When reversing, be sure to visually confirm safetyaround the vehicle.

Location of rear-view cameraThe rear-view camera (A) is in the tailgate.

Range of view of rear-view camera


4-32 OA0X13E4

4

How to use the rear-view cameraWhen you place the gearshift lever or the selectorlever in the “R” position with the ignition switch orthe operation mode in ON, the view behind the ve-hicle will automatically appear on the screen of theMITSUBISHI Multi Entertainment System. Whenyou move the gearshift lever or the selector lever toany other position, the screen will return to its orig-inal indication.

CAUTIONl The rear-view camera has a special lens

that can make objects shown on thescreen appear to be closer or furtheraway than they actually are.

NOTEl Because the rear-view camera has a special

lens, the lines on the ground between parkingspaces may not look parallel on the screen.

l In the following situations, the screen indica-tion may be difficult to see. There is no ab-normality.

• Low light (nighttime)• When the light of the sun or the light

from a vehicle’s headlamps shines direct-ly into the lens

l If the camera is hot and is then cooled byrain or a car wash, the lens can mist up. Thisphenomenon does not indicate a malfunction.

l It is not possible to fully see obstacles whenthe lens is dirty. If the lens becomes contami-nated by water droplets, snow, mud or oil,wipe off the contamination, taking care notto scratch the lens.

l Please observe the following cautions. Ignor-ing them could lead to a camera malfunction.

• Do not subject the camera to physicalshock.

• Do not apply wax to the camera.• Do not splash the camera with boiling wa-

ter.• Do not disassemble the camera.

Reference lines on the screenReference lines and upper surface of the rear bump-er (A) are displayed on the screen.l Red line (B) indicates approximately 50 cm

behind the rear bumper.l Two Green lines (C) indicate approximately

20 cm outside of the vehicle body.l Short transverse lines (1 to 3) indicate dis-

tance from the rear bumper.

Check surroundings for safety.

1- Approximately at the rear edge of the rearbumper

2- Approximately 100 cm3- Approximately 200 cm

NOTEl When the vehicle is tilting because of the num-

ber of people in the vehicle, the weight andpositioning of luggage, and/or the conditionof the road surface, the lines in the viewfrom the rear-view camera may not be accu-rately positioned relative to the actual road.The reference lines for distance and vehiclewidth are based on a level, flat road surface.In the following cases, objects shown on thescreen will appear to be farther off than theyactually are.


4-33OA0X13E4

4

• When the rear of the vehicle is weigheddown with the weight of passengers andluggage in the vehicle.

A- Actual objectsB- Objects shown on the screen

• When there is an upward slope at the back.

A- Actual objectsB- Objects shown on the screenl The reference lines for distance and vehicle

width are intended to indicate the distance to

a flat object such as a level, flat road surface.This may make the distance to a projectingobject shown on the screen differ from the ac-tual distance to the projecting object. Do notuse them as a guide for distances to solid ob-jects.Example: On the screen the point B appearsthe nearest, then the point C and A in orderof distance. The points A and B actually arethe same distances from the vehicle, and thepoint C is farther off than the points A and B.

Check surroundings for safety.

Cargo loadsE00609901484

Cargo load precautions

CAUTIONl Do not load cargo or luggage higher than

the top of the seatback. Be sure that yourcargo or luggage cannot move once yourvehicle is moving.Having the driver’s vision blocked, andyour cargo being thrown inside the cabinif you suddenly have to brake can cause aserious accident or injury.

l Load heavy cargo or luggage in the frontof the vehicle. If the load in the back ofthe vehicle is too heavy, steering may be-come unstable.

Loading a roof carrier

CAUTIONl Use a roof carrier that properly fits your

vehicle.Do not load luggage directly onto the roof.For installation, refer to the instructionmanual accompanying the roof carrier.

l When attaching/removing the roof carri-er and loading/removing luggage, do notapply excessive pressure on a single point.Depending on how and where the force isapplied, this may cause dents on the vehi-cle roof.


4-34 OA0X13E4

4

Roof carrier precaution

CAUTIONl Make sure that the weight of the luggage

does not exceed the allowable roof load.If the allowable roof load is exceeded, thismay cause damage to the vehicle.The roof load is the total allowable loadon the roof (the weight of the roof carrierplus the weight of luggage placed on theroof carrier).

l When luggage is loaded onto the vehicle,please make sure to drive slowly andavoid excessive manoeuvres such as sud-den braking or quick turning.In addition, place the luggage on the car-rier so that its weight is distributed even-ly with the heaviest items on the bottom.Do not load items that are wider than theroof carrier.The additional weight on the roof couldraise the vehicle’s centre of gravity and af-fect vehicle handling characteristics.As a result, driving errors or emergencymanoeuvres could lead to a loss of controland result in an accident.

l Before driving and after travelling ashort distance, always check the load tomake sure it is securely fastened to theroof carrier.Check periodically during your travelthat the load remains secure.

NOTEl To prevent wind noise or reduction in fuel

economy, remove the roof carrier when notin use.

l Before using an automatic car wash, removethe roof carrier.

l Be sure that adequate clearance is main-tained for raising the tailgate when installinga roof carrier.

Trailer towing (1200 models)E00610000648

In order to tow a trailer with your vehicle, when hav-ing a trailer towing device mounted that meets allrelevant regulations in your area, consult aMITSUBISHI MOTORS Authorized Service Point.The regulations concerning the towing of a trailermay differ from country to country. You are ad-vised to obey the regulations in each area.

CAUTIONl Danger of Accident!

A towing bar should be fitted accordingto MITSUBISHI MOTORS guidelines.

Maximum towable weight with brakeand maximum trailer-nose weightNever exceed the maximum towable weight withbrake and the maximum trailer-nose weight as lis-ted in the specifications.(Refer to page 9-06.)If you tow a trailer at an altitude of more than1,000 m above sea-level, reduce your weight by10 % of the gross combination weight for every in-crease of 1,000 m above sea-level, as the engine out-put is lowered owing to decrease in atmosphericpressure.


4-35OA0X13E4

4

Towing bar mounting specificationsSee the following table for fixing points (A) for thetowing bar.

1 606.5 mm

2 140.5 mm

3 154.5 mm

4 76 mm

5 Left side: 183 mm,Right side: 140 mm

6 Left side: 42.5 mm,Right side: 0.5 mm

7 Left side: 112 mm,Right side: 155 mm

8 46.5 mm

9 494.5 mm497 mm

(at kerb weight condition)

375 mm to 388 mm(at laden condition)

10 467 mm

11 505 mm

Operating hintsl To prevent the clutch from slipping (Vehicle

with a M/T only), do not rev the engine morethan is required when starting off.

l Be sure that the driving speed does not ex-ceed 100 km/h (62 mph) for trailer operation.It is also recommended that you obey the lo-cal regulations in case driving speed with atrailer is limited to less than 100 km/h(62 mph).

l To prevent shocks from the overrun brake, de-press the brake pedal lightly at first and thenmore strongly.

l To make full use of engine braking, changeto a lower shift point before descending aslope.

Additional precautions for vehicles equipped witha CVTIt is recommended the “D” position on slopes or atlow speed.Use the sports mode in mountainous areas in orderto make better use of engine braking and to assistthe brake system. However, be sure that the speeddoes not exceed the maximum speed limit for theselected shift position.

OverheatingThis will normally occur as a result of some me-chanical failure. If your vehicle should overheat,stop and check for a loose or broken water pump/alternator drive belt, a blocked radiator air intakeor a low coolant level. If these items are satisfacto-ry the overheating could be caused by a number ofmechanical causes that would have to be checkedat a competent service centre.

CAUTIONl If the engine overheats, please refer to the

“Engine overheating” section of “Foremergencies” prior to taking any correc-tive action.

l On vehicles equipped with CVT, if the se-lector lever position indicator blinks, thetemperature of the CVT fluid is high.Read the reference page and take the re-quired measures.Refer to “When the selector lever posi-tion indicator blinks” on page 4-23.


4-36 OA0X13E4

4

Ventilators....................................................................................5-02Heater/Manual air conditioning*..................................................5-03Automatic air conditioning*.........................................................5-06Important operation tips for the air conditioning..........................5-12Air purifier*..................................................................................5-13LW/MW/FM electronic tuning radio with CD player*................5-13To play tracks from USB device*................................................5-23Error codes....................................................................................5-27Handling of compact discs...........................................................5-29Antenna.........................................................................................5-30Link System*................................................................................5-31USB input terminal*.....................................................................5-31Sun visors.....................................................................................5-34Accessory socket..........................................................................5-35Interior lamps................................................................................5-35Storage spaces...............................................................................5-36Cup holder....................................................................................5-37Bottle holder.................................................................................5-38Rear shelf panel*..........................................................................5-38Convenient hook...........................................................................5-39Assist grip.....................................................................................5-39

For pleasant driving

OA0X13E4

5

VentilatorsE00700101006

*: Optional equipment1- Centre ventilators2- Side ventilators

NOTEl Do not place beverages on top of the instru-

ment panel. If they splash into the air condi-tioning ventilators, they could damage the sys-tem.

Air flow and direction adjustmentsE00700201010

Centre ventilatorsMove the knob (A) to make adjustments.

Side ventilatorsWhen the dimple (A) is pressed, the ventilators open.To close the ventilators, press the dimple on the op-posite side. Change the direction of the air flow byturning the ventilator itself.

1- Open2- Close

NOTEl On vehicles with air conditioning, the cool

air from the ventilators may appear as a mist.This is due to moist air being suddenlycooled by the air conditioning. This willclear after a few moments.

Mode selectionE00726500421

To change the position and amount of air flowingfrom the ventilators, turn the mode selection dial.On vehicles with the automatic air conditioning,press the MODE switch or demister switch. (Referto “MODE switch” on page 5-10, “Demisterswitch” on page 5-10.)

Face positionAir flows only to the upper part of the passengercompartment.

Foot/Face positionAir flows to the upper part of the passenger com-partment, and flows to the leg area.

Foot positionAir flows mainly to the leg area.


5-02 OA0X13E4

5

Foot/Demister position

Air flows to the leg area, the windscreen and thedoor windows.

Demister positionAir flows mainly to the windscreen and the doorwindows.

CAUTIONl On vehicles with the manual air condition-

ing, when using the mode selection dial be-tween the “ ” and “ ” positions, pre-vent fogging by moving the air selectionlever to select outside air.(Refer to “Air selection lever” on page5-04.)

NOTEl With the mode selection dial between the

“ ” and “ ” positions, the air flows main-ly to the upper part of the passenger compart-ment. With the mode selection dial betweenthe “ ” and “ ” positions, the air flowsmainly to the leg area.

l With the mode selection dial in the “ ” po-sition, a small amount of air flows to the wind-screen and the door windows.

l With the mode selection dial between the“ ” and “ ” positions, the air flows main-ly to the leg area. With the mode selection di-al between the “ ” and “ ” positions, theair flows mainly to the windscreen and doorwindows.

Heater/Manual air conditioning*E00700500537

The air conditioning can only be used while the en-gine is running.

Control panelE00700600639

1- Temperature control lever2- Air selection lever3- Mode selection dial4- Rear window demister switch ® p. 3-235- Air conditioning switch*6- Blower speed selection dial

Blower speed selection dialE00700700311

Select the blower speed by turning the blowerspeed selection dial clockwise or anticlockwise.

The blower speed will gradually increase as the di-al is turned to the right.

Temperature control leverE00700900443

The temperature control lever is used to select thedesired air temperature.

1- Cooler2- Warmer


5-03OA0X13E4

5

NOTEl While the engine coolant temperature is low,

the temperature of the air from the heaterwill be cool/cold until the engine warms up,even if you have selected warm air with thelever.

Air selection leverE00701300776

To change the air selection, use the air selection lev-er.l “ ” Outside air

Outside air is introduced into the passengercompartment.

l “ ” Recirculated airAir is recirculated inside the passenger com-partment.

LHD RHD

CAUTIONl Use of the recirculation position for exten-

ded time may cause the windows to fog up.

NOTEl Normally, use the outside position to keep

the windscreen and side windows clear andquickly remove fog or frost from the wind-screen.If high cooling performance is desired, or ifthe outside air is dusty or otherwise contami-nated use the recirculation position. Switchto the outside position periodically to in-crease ventilation so that the windows do notbecome fogged up.

Air conditioning switch*E00701501023

Push the switch to turn the air conditioning on, indi-cation lamp (A) will come on.

Push the switch again to switch it off.

CAUTIONl When using the air conditioning, the

idling speed may slightly increase as theair conditioning compressor is switchedon/off automatically. While the vehiclewith a CVT is stationary, fully depressthe brake pedal to prevent the vehiclefrom creeping.

Operating the air conditioning systemE00701800511

Select dials and levers as shown in the illustrationaccording to your purpose.

Heating

LHD

RHD


5-04 OA0X13E4

5

NOTEl For maximum heat, set the blower speed at

the 3rd position.

Cooling (manual air conditioning)E00701900785

LHD

RHD

CAUTIONl If the outside air is dusty or otherwise con-

taminated, or if high cooling performanceis desired, set air selection lever to the re-circulation position and the temperaturecontrol lever all the way to the right.Switch to the outside position periodicallyto increase ventilation so that the win-dows do not become fogged up.

Combination of unheated air and heated airE00702000552

LHD

RHD

Demisting of the windscreen and door windowsE00702100931

CAUTIONl For safety, make sure you have a clear

view through all the windows.

For ordinary demisting

LHD

RHD

*: Optional equipment


5-05OA0X13E4

5

For quick demisting

LHD

RHD

*: Optional equipment

NOTEl To demist effectively, direct the air flow

from the side ventilators towards the door win-dows.

l Do not set the temperature control lever tothe max. cool position. Cool air will blowagainst the window glasses and prevent de-misting.

Introduction of outside airE00702200479

LHD

RHD

Automatic air conditioning*E00702400413

The air conditioning can only be used while the en-gine is running.


5-06 OA0X13E4

5

Control panelE00702501466

1- Temperature control switch2- Air conditioning switch3- MODE switch4- Air selection switch5- Blower speed selection switch6- Demister switch7- AUTO switch8- Rear window demister switch ® p. 3-239- OFF switch

10- Temperature display ® p. 5-0811- Mode selection display12- Air selection indicator13- Air conditioning indicator14- AUTO indicator15- Blower speed display

NOTEl There is an interior air temperature sensor

(A) in the illustrated position.

Never place anything on top of the sensor,since doing so will prevent it from function-ing properly.


5-07OA0X13E4

5

l A sound will be made every time you pushall the switches.

Blower speed selection switchE00702800358

Press of the blower speed selection switch to in-crease the blower speed.Press of the blower speed selection switch to de-crease the blower speed.The selected blower speed will be shown in the dis-play (A).

1- Increase2- Decrease

Temperature control switchE00703000676

Press or of the temperature control switchto the desired temperature.

The selected temperature will be shown in the dis-play (A).

NOTEl The temperature value of air conditioning is

switched in conjunction with outside temper-ature display unit of the multi information dis-play.Refer to “Changing the temperature unit” onpage 3-09.

l While the engine coolant temperature is low,the temperature of the air from the heaterwill be cool/cold until the engine warms up,even if you have selected warm air with theswitch.To prevent the windscreen and windowsfrom fogging up, the ventilator mode will bechanged to “ ” and the blower speed willbe reduced.

l When the temperature is set to the highest orthe lowest, the air selection and the air condi-tioning will be automatically changed as fol-lows.

• Quick Heating (When the temperature isset to the highest setting)Outside air will be introduced and the airconditioning will stop.

• Quick Cooling (When the temperature isset to the lowest setting)Inside air will be recirculated and the airconditioning will operate.

The settings described above are the factory settings.The air selection and air conditioning switches canbe customized (function setting changed), and theautomatic switching of outside air and the air condi-tioning according to operating conditions can bechanged as desired.For further information, we recommend you to con-sult a MITSUBISHI MOTORS Authorized ServicePoint.Refer to “Customizing the air conditioning switch”on page 5-09.Refer to “Customizing the air selection” on page5-08.

Air selection switchE00703400801

To change the air selection, simply press the air se-lection switch.The selected position will be shown in the display(A).l Outside air: “ ” indicator is ON

Outside air is introduced into the passengercompartment.

l Recirculated air: “ ” indicator is ON


5-08 OA0X13E4

5

Air is recirculated inside the passenger com-partment.

CAUTIONl Use of the recirculation position for exten-

ded time may cause the windows to fog up.

NOTEl Normally, use the outside position to keep

the windscreen and side windows clear andquickly remove fog or frost from the wind-screen.If high cooling performance is desired, or ifthe outside air is dusty or otherwise contami-nated use the recirculation position.Switch to the outside position periodically toincrease ventilation so that the windows donot become fogged up.

l If you press the AUTO switch to select auto-matic control after manually switching be-tween outside air and recirculated air, the airselection will also be automatically controlled.

Customizing the air selectionFunctions can be changed as desired, as stated below.l Enable automatic air control

When the AUTO switch pressed, the air se-lection switch is also controlled automatically.

l Disable automatic air controlEven when the AUTO switch is pressed, theair selection switch is not controlled automat-ically.

l Setting change methodHold down the air selection switch for about10 seconds or more.

• When the setting is changed from enableto disable 3 sounds are emitted and the“ ” indicator flashes 3 times.

• When the setting is changed from disableto enable 2 sounds are emitted and the“ ” indicator flashes 3 times.

NOTEl The factory setting is “Enable automatic air

control.”l When the demister switch is pressed, in or-

der to prevent misting of the windows the ven-tilator automatically switches to outside aireven if “Disable automatic air control” is set.

AUTO switchE00702600040

When the AUTO switch is pressed, the mode selec-tion, blower speed adjustment, recirculated/outsideair selection, temperature adjustment, and air condi-tioner ON/OFF status are all controlled automatical-ly.

The “AUTO” indicator will be shown in the dis-play (A).

Air conditioning switchE00703501320

Push the switch to turn the air conditioning on, the“ ” indicator will be shown in the display (A).

Push the switch again to switch it off.


5-09OA0X13E4

5



Customizing the air conditioning switchFunctions can be changed as desired, as stated below.l Enable automatic air conditioning control:

When the AUTO switch is pressed, or the tem-perature control switch is set to the minimumtemperature, the air conditioning switch iscontrolled automatically.

l Disable automatic air conditioning control:The air conditioning switch is not controlledautomatically as long as the air conditioningswitch is not operated.

l Setting change methodHold down the air conditioning switch forabout 10 seconds or more.

• When the setting is changed from enableto disable 3 sounds are emitted and the“ ” indicator flashes 3 times.

• When the setting is changed from disableto enable 2 sounds are emitted and the“ ” indicator flashes 3 times.

NOTEl The factory setting is “Enable automatic air

conditioning control”.

l When the demister switch is pressed, in or-der to prevent misting of the windows the airconditioning operates automatically even if“Disable automatic air conditioning control”is set.

OFF switchE00702700041

Push the switch to turn off the air conditioning sys-tem.

MODE switchE00703300044

Each time the MODE switch is pressed, the modechanges to the next one in the following sequence:“ ” → “ ” → “ ” → “ ” → “ ”. Theselected mode is shown in the display (A). (Referto “Mode selection” on page 5-02.)

Demister switchE00703900066

When this switch is pressed, the mode changes tothe “ ” mode. The indication lamp (A) willcome on. The selected mode is shown in the dis-play (B). (Refer to “Mode selection” on page 5-02.)


5-10 OA0X13E4

5

NOTEl When the demister switch is pressed, the air

conditioning system automatically operatesand outside air (as opposed to recirculatedair) is selected.(Refer to “Demisting of the windscreen anddoor windows” on page 5-11.)

Operating the system in automaticmode

E00704101134

In normal conditions, use the system in the AUTOmode and follow these procedures:

1. Push the AUTO switch.2. Set the temperature control switch to the de-

sired temperature. The mode selection, blower speed adjust-ment, recirculated/outside air selection, tem-perature adjustment, and air conditioner ON/OFF status are all controlled automatically



NOTEl If the blower speed selection switch, air con-

ditioning switch, Mode switch, or air selec-tion switch is operated while the system is op-erating in the AUTO mode, the activated func-tion overrides the corresponding function ofautomatic control. All other functions remainunder automatic control.

Operating the system in manual modeE00704200239

Blower speed and ventilator mode may be control-led manually by setting the blower speed selectionswitch and the MODE switch to the desired posi-tions.To return to automatic operation, press the AUTOswitch.

Demisting of the windscreen and door windowsE00704300940

CAUTIONl For safety, make sure you have a clear

view through all the windows.

For ordinary demisting

1. Set the air selection switch to the outside po-sition.

2. Set the MODE switch to the “ ” position.3. Select your desired blower speed by pressing

the blower speed selection switch.4. Select your desired temperature by pressing

the temperature control switch.5. Push the air conditioning switch.


5-11OA0X13E4

5

For quick demisting

1. Push the demister switch to change to the“ ” position.

2. Set the blower to the maximum speed.3. Set the temperature to the highest position.

NOTEl To demist effectively, direct the air flow

from the side ventilators towards the door win-dows.

l Do not set the temperature to the max. coolposition. Cool air will blow against the win-dow glasses and prevent demisting.

Important operation tips for theair conditioning

E00708301091

l Park the vehicle in the shade.Parking in the hot sun will make the vehicleinside extremely hot, and it will require moretime to cool the interior.If it is necessary to park in the sun, open thewindows for the first few minutes of air con-ditioning operation to expel the hot air.

l Close the windows when the air conditioningis in use. The entry of outside air throughopen windows will reduce the cooling effi-ciency.

l Too much cooling is not good for the health.The inside air temperature should only be 5to 6 °C below the outside air temperature.

l When operating the system, make sure theair intake, which is located in front of thewindscreen, is free of obstructions such asleaves and snow. Leaves collected in the air-intake plenum may reduce air flow and plugthe plenum water drains.

Air conditioning system refrigerantand lubricant recommendationsIf the air conditioning seems less effective than usu-al, the cause might be a refrigerant leak. We recom-mend you to have the system inspected.The air conditioning system in your vehicle mustbe charged with the refrigerant HFO-1234yf andthe lubricant VC 200YF.Use of any other refrigerant or lubricant will causesevere damage which will result in the need to re-place your vehicle’s entire air conditioning system.The release of refrigerant into the atmosphereshould be prevented.

We recommend you to recover and recycle the re-frigerant for reuse.

During a long period of disuseThe air conditioning should be operated for at leastfive minutes each week, even in cold weather. Thisis to prevent the compressor from seizing and tomaintain the air conditioning in the best operatingcondition.


5-12 OA0X13E4

5

Air purifier*E00708400675

An air filter has been incorporated into this air con-ditioning so that dirt and dust are cleaned from theair.Replace the air filter periodically as its ability toclean the air will be reduced as it collects pollenand dirt. For the maintenance interval, refer to the“SERVICE BOOKLET”.

NOTEl Operation in certain conditions such as driv-

ing on a dusty road and frequent use of theair conditioning can lead to reduction of serv-ice life of the filter. When you feel that theair flow is lower than normal or when thewindscreen or windows start to fog up easily,replace the air filter.We recommend you to have it checked.

LW/MW/FM electronic tuningradio with CD player*

E00708502377

The audio system can only be used when the igni-tion switch or the operation mode is in ON or ACC.

NOTEl To listen to the audio system while the en-

gine is not running, turn the ignition switchto the “ACC” position or put the operationmode in ACC.

l If a cellular phone is used inside the vehicle,it may create noise from the audio equip-ment. This does not mean that anything iswrong with your audio equipment. In such acase, use the cellular phone at a place as faraway as possible from the audio equipment.

l If foreign objects or water get into the audioequipment, or if smoke or a strange odourcomes from it, immediately turn off the au-dio system. We recommend you to have itchecked. Never try to repair it by yourself.Avoid continuous usage without inspectionby a qualified person.

Volume and tone control panelE00708601195

1- PWR (On-Off) switch2- VOL (Volume control) knob3- Display4- /MENU (Mode change) button5- Sound control button

To adjust the volumeE00708700610

VOL (Volume control)Turn the VOL knob clockwise to increase the vol-ume; anticlockwise to decrease the volume.

To adjust the toneE00708801328

Press the /MENU button to select BASS → TRE-BLE → FADER → BALANCE → Sound controlmode off.

BASS (Bass tone control)Press the sound control button either or toselect the desired bass level.


5-13OA0X13E4

5

TREBLE (Treble tone control)Press the sound control button either or toselect the desired treble level.

FADER (Front/Rear balance control)Press the sound control button either or tobalance the volume of sound from the front and therear speakers.

BALANCE (Left/Right balance control)Press the sound control button either or tobalance the volume of sound from the left and theright speakers.

NOTEl The sound control mode will be cancelled

when the another mode is selected or no ad-justment is performed for more than 10 sec-onds.

l In a two-speakers vehicle, keep the FADERsetting in the middle position. Since no rearspeakers are connected, adjusting the FAD-ER setting towards the “REAR” side will re-sult in a loss of sound output.

Radio control panel and displayE00708901273

1- RADIO (FM/MW/LW selection) button2- PWR (On-Off) switch3- Display4- Seek (Down-seek) button5- Seek (Up-seek) button6- Memory select buttons

To listen to the radioE00709000926

1. Press the PWR switch or the RADIO buttonto turn ON the radio.Press and hold the PWR switch for 2 secondsor longer to turn OFF the radio.

2. Press the RADIO button to select the desiredband.

3. Press the seek button or memory select but-tons to tune into a radio broadcasting station.

To tune the radioE00709100679

Manual tuningThe frequency changes every time the seek buttonis pressed. Press the button to select the desired ra-dio broadcasting station.

Automatic tuningAfter keeping the seek button depressed until itbeeps, release the button, and the selected station re-ception will start.

To enter frequencies into the memoryE00716101229

Manual settingYou can assign to the memory select buttons a max-imum of 18 stations in the FM band (6 FM1, 6FM2 and 6 FM3 stations) and 6 stations each in theMW and LW band. (Stations already assigned tothe memory select buttons are replaced by any new-ly assigned stations.)Follow the steps described below.

1. Press the seek to tune to the frequency youwish to keep in the memory.

2. Press one of the memory select buttons untilit beeps.The sound will be momentarily interruptedwhile the frequency is being entered into thememory. The number of the button matchingthe entry in the memory as well as the fre-quency is displayed.

3. The preset memory setting is retrieved bypressing the button and then releasing it with-in 1 second.

Automatic settingWith the method, all manually set stations in theband currently selected for reception are replacedwith stations in the same band that are automatical-ly selected in order of signal strength. The radio au-tomatically selects 6 stations in the FM band (FM3station only) and 6 stations each in the MW andLW band. Follow the steps described below.


5-14 OA0X13E4

5

1. With the radio mode selected, hold down theRADIO button for 2 seconds or longer. The6 stations with the best signal strength will au-tomatically be assigned to the memory selectbuttons, with the lowest-frequency station be-ing assigned to the lowest-number button.

2. When you subsequently press a memory se-lect button to select a channel number, the ra-dio will begin receiving the station assignedto that number.

NOTEl If you press the RADIO button for 2 seconds

or longer while tuning in the FM1 or FM2band, the radio will automatically switch tothe FM3 band, where the automatic seeking/storing will be activated.

Radio data system (RDS)E00709200481

1- RADIO (FM/MW/LW selection) button2- PWR (On-Off)/SEL (Select) switch3- RDS (Radio data system) indicator4- Display5- TP (Traffic program identification) indicator

6- PTY (Program type) indicator7- CT (Clock time) indicator8- REG (Regional program) indicator9- /MENU button

10- TP (Traffic program)/PTY (Program type)button

11- SEEK (Down-seek) button12- SEEK (Up-seek) button13- Memory select buttons

RDS uses PI (program identification) signal andAF (alternative frequency) list transmitted in addi-tion to the normal FM broadcasting programs, andpicks up the FM stations that are transmitting thesame program from the AF list and automaticallytunes to the station with the strongest signal intensi-ty.Therefore, you can continue listening to one pro-gram in, for example, a long distance driving with-out retuning to the other station transmitting thesame program when you are leaving the servicearea of the currently receiving station.The RDS radio also features the limited receptionof the program types, the break-in reception of thetraffic announcement to the EON (enhanced othernetwork) and emergency broadcast, and the limited/unlimited reception of the regional programs.

AF (Alternative Frequencies) functionE00720900162

The AF function finds a station broadcasting thesame program and selects the station with the stron-gest signal of AF lists.The AF function is turned on at all times unlessyou manually switch it off. The AF function can be turned ON and OFF.Refer to “Function setup mode” on page 5-17.

CT (Clock Time) functionE00721000173

The clock can be set automatically by using the sig-nal from the local RDS stations. Refer to “To ad-just the clock” on page 5-21.

REG (Regional) functionE00721100116

REG function limits to receive the stations broad-casting regional programs.Regional programming and regional networks areorganized differently depending on the country orarea (they may be changed according to the hour,state, or broadcast area), so if you don’t want to re-ceive the regional programs automatically, you canset up REG ON not to receive regional programs. The REG function can be turned ON and OFF.Refer to “Function setup mode” on page 5-17.

PI (Program Identification) search functionE00721200292

When travelling long distance and the recalled pre-set station is weak, the radio searches another fre-quency broadcasting the same programming withthe same PI code in AF list.If there are no frequencies broadcasting the sameprogramming, the radio searches a frequency broad-casting the regional programming. The radio suc-ceeds in searching the regional programming, thenthe display shows the REG indicator.If the radio does not succeed in searching the re-gional programming, the radio returns to the recal-led preset station. The PI function can be turned ON and OFF.Refer to “Function setup mode” on page 5-17.


5-15OA0X13E4

5

NOTEl While searching, the audio system is muted.

The display shows “PI-SEARCH”.

PTY (Program type)E00721300365

RDS broadcasts are classified according to pro-gram type (PTY) as follows. Use the SEL switch toselect your desired PTY.

1. NEWS2. AFFAIRS (Current affairs)3. INFO (Information)4. SPORT5. EDUCATE (Education)6. DRAMA7. CULTURE8. SCIENCE9. VARIED

10. POP M (Pop music)11. ROCK M (Rock music)12. EASY M (Easy music)13. LIGHT M (Light classics)14. CLASSICS15. OTHER M (Other music)16. WEATHER (Weather information)17. FINANCE18. CHILDREN19. SOCIAL20. RELIGION21. PHONE IN22. TRAVEL23. LEISURE24. JAZZ25. COUNTRY26. NATION M (National music)27. OLDIES28. FOLK M (Folk music)29. DOCUMENT

To search for a broadcast of desired program type:1. Press the PTY button.2. Turn the SEL switch or press a memory se-

lect button to select your desired PTY.3. Two seconds after a desired PTY has been se-

lected, the radio will begin to search for abroadcast of your selected PTY. Duringsearch, the selected PTY on the display blinks.

4. When the radio picks up a station with yourdesired PTY, the display will show the nameof the station.

NOTEl If the SEEK button is pressed, the radio will

try to find out another broadcast of the sameprogram type as currently selected.

l If no station is found with your desired PTY,the display will show “EMPTY” for about 5seconds and the radio will return to the previ-ous station.

How to enter PTYs in the memoryE00721400177

As many as 6 PTYs can be entered in the memory.Follow the steps described below.

1. Turn the SEL switch to tune the PTY to beentered in the memory.

2. Press one of the memory select buttons for 2seconds or longer. The sound will be momen-tarily interrupted while the PTY is being en-tered into the memory. The number of the but-ton corresponding to the entry into the mem-ory and the PTY are displayed.

3. The preset memory setting is retrieved bypressing the button and then releasing it with-in about 2 seconds.

To change the language of PTY displayE00721500253

You can select your favourite language among ENG-LISH (English), FRANCAIS (French), DEUTSCH(German), SVENSK (Swedish), ESPANOL (Span-ish) and ITALIANO (Italian).

1. Press the /MENU button for 2 seconds orlonger to select the language of PTY displaymode.Refer to “Function setup mode” on page5-17.

2. Press the SEEK button to select a language.

NOTEl After selecting a mode, you can leave the func-

tion setup mode by taking either of the fol-lowing steps:

• Press the /MENU button for at least 2seconds.

• Make no entry for 10 seconds.

Traffic informationE00721600270

The radio will automatically tune in to traffic infor-mation broadcasts while receiving FM broadcastsor playing compact discs.To select this function, follow the instructions below.

1. Press the TP button. The display will show“TP”.If the RDS data can be read, the display willshow “RDS”. If not, the display will show“NO RDS” for about 5 seconds.


5-16 OA0X13E4

5

2. If the radio detects traffic information on ei-ther the station currently selected or anotherstation, the display will show “TRAF INF”for 5 seconds followed by a 2-second indica-tion of the frequency. Then, it will show thename of the station broadcasting the traffic in-formation to which you will listen. The vol-ume level is set separately for listening to nor-mal audio programs and for listening to traf-fic information. The volume level will there-fore change automatically to that set whentraffic information was last received. Whenthe traffic information broadcast is over, theradio will return to the previously receivedprogram and to the corresponding volume lev-el.

3. Press the TP button to return to the previouscondition.

NOTEl While “TP” is illuminated, the radio stops on-

ly at TP stations, even if the SEEK button ispressed.

TP (Traffic information Program) search functionE00721800197

The traffic information program standby functionis turned on (with the TP indicator shown on the dis-play) and after about 45 seconds since the RDS in-dicator turns off due to weak signal or the tuningstation is changed over from a TP station to a sta-tion which does not broadcast traffic information,the sound will beep 5 times and seeks out a TP sta-tion in all frequencies automatically. The TP search function can be turned ON and OFF.Refer to “Function setup mode” on page 5-17.

Emergency broadcastsE00721700268

If an emergency broadcast is caught while receiv-ing a FM broadcast or playing back a compact discwith the ignition switch or the operation mode is inON or ACC, the display will show “ALARM” andthe emergency broadcast will interrupt the currentprogram. The volume level is set separately for lis-tening to normal audio programs and for listeningto emergency broadcasts. The volume level willtherefore change automatically to that set when anemergency broadcast or traffic information broad-cast was last received. When the emergency broad-cast is over, the radio will return to the previouslyreceived program and to the corresponding volumelevel.

Function setup modeE00722500465

It is possible to change the following functions:l AFl REG*l TP-Sl PI-S*l Language of PTY display

1. Press the /MENU button for 2 seconds orlonger to select the function setup mode.

2. Press the SEEK button repeatedly to selectthe mode you wish to change.The order is: AF → REG* → TP-S → PI-S*→ Language of PTY display → Function set-up mode OFF.

3. Select the desired setting for each mode to beturned ON and OFF as shown below.

The setting will be shown on the display.

Example



• Press the /MENU button for at least 2seconds.

• Make no entry for 10 seconds.

CD control panel and displayE00709501263


5-17OA0X13E4

5

1- CD (CD mode changeover) button2- RADIO button3- (Return) button4- CD eject button5- CD indicator6- Disc-loading slot7- FOLDER (Folder number) indicator8- TRACK (Track number) indicator9- Display

10- RPT (Repeat) button/F-RPT (Folder repeatmode) indicator

11- RDM (Random mode)/F-RDM (Folder ran-dom mode) indicator

12- SEL (Select) indicator13- (Fast-reverse/Track down) button14- (Fast-forward/Track up) button15- DISP (Display) button16- PAGE (Title scroll) button17- PWR (On-Off)/SEL (Select) switch18- RPT (Repeat) button19- RDM (Random) button

To listen to a CDE00709602362

To set a disc1. Insert disc with label facing up.

When a disc is inserted, the CD indicatorwill come on and the CD player will beginplaying even if the radio is being used. TheCD player will also start playback when theCD button is pressed with a disc in the play-er or with a disc set in the Disc-loading slot,even if the radio is being used.

2. To stop the CD, turn off the power by press-ing the PWR switch for 2 seconds or longer,or change over to the radio mode by pressingthe RADIO button, or eject the disc by press-ing the eject button.

NOTEl For information on adjusting the volume and

tone, refer to “To adjust the volume” on page5-13 and “To adjust the tone” on page 5-13.

l An 8 cm compact disc cannot be played onthis CD player.

l For information concerning the handling ofcompact discs, refer to “Handling of compactdiscs” on page 5-29.

To eject a discWhen the CD eject button is pressed, the disc auto-matically stops and is ejected.

NOTEl If you do not remove the disc before 15 sec-

onds have elapsed, the CD player will auto-matically reload the disc and stop.

To listen to a music CDPress the CD button if a disc is already in the CDplayer. The CD player will enter CD mode andstart playback. The track number and the playingtime will appear on the display. The tracks in thedisc will be played continuously.

To listen to an MP3 CDThis CD player allows you to play MP3 (MPEG Au-dio Layer-3) files recorded on CD-ROMs, CD-Rs(recordable CDs), and CD-RWs (rewritable CDs)in ISO9660 Level 1/Level 2, Joliet, and Romeo for-mats. Each disc can hold up to 255 files in up to100 folders, up to a maximum of 16 levels. TheID3 tag information can be displayed during MP3playback. For information concerning ID3 tags, re-fer to “CD text and MP3 title display” on page5-20.

1. Insert a disc containing MP3 files into the slot.

2. Press the CD button if a disc is already in theCD player.The display shows “READING”, then play-back will begin.

NOTEl While listening to a disc on which CD-DA

(CD-Digital Audio) and MP3 files have bothbeen recorded, you can switch between read-ing of the CD-DA, reading of the MP3 files,and the external audio input mode by press-ing the CD button for 2 seconds or longer (un-til you hear a beep).For information on the external audio input,refer to “To use the external audio input func-tion” on page 5-22.

l With a disc that contains both CD-DA andMP3 files, the CD-DA files are automatical-ly played first.

l The playback sound quality differs depend-ing on the encoder software and the bit rate.For more information, refer to the owner’smanual for the encoder software.

l Depending on the layout of the files and fold-ers on the disc, it may take some time untilplayback starts.

l MP3 conversion software and writing soft-ware are not supplied with this unit.

l You may encounter trouble in playing anMP3 or displaying the information of MP3files recorded with certain writing softwareor CD recorders (CD-R/RW drivers).

l If you write many folders or files other thanMP3 files, it may take some time before play-back starts.

l This unit does not record MP3 files.


5-18 OA0X13E4

5

l For information on CD-Rs/RWs, refer to“Notes on CD-Rs/RWs” on page 5-29.

CAUTIONl Attempting to play a file not in the MP3

format which has a “.mp3” file name mayproduce noise from the speakers andspeaker damage, and can significantlydamage your hearing.

Folder selection order/MP3 file playback order(Example)

Root folder (Root directory)

Level 1 Level 2 Level 3 Level 4

Folder selectionIn the order

File selectionIn the order

To fast-forward/reverse the disc

Fast-forwardThe disc is fast-forwarded while the button isheld down. Playback will begin once the button isreleased.

Fast-reverseThe disc is fast-reversed while the button isheld down. Playback will begin once the button isreleased.

To select a desired track

Track upThe disc will skip as many songs as the number oftimes the button is pressed.The display window will display the track numberof the track selected.

Track downThe disc will skip as many songs as the number oftimes the button is pressed.The display window will display the track numberof the track selected.

To find a file (MP3 CDs only)Operate the SEL switch to select desired file.When this mode is activated by pressing the SELswitch, the SEL indicator will be displayed in thedisplay.

Press the SELswitch

: To start this mode or to selectthe folder or file.

Turn the SELswitch

: To show the folder or file

NOTEl To cancel the selection, press the button

to return to the previous step.l If no operation is performed for 10 seconds

or more or other button is operated after theSEL switch has been turned, searching of thedesired file is cancelled.

l If no operation is performed for 5 seconds ormore after the file is displayed, playbackstarts.

l When the SEL indicator is not shown on thedisplay and the SEL switch is operated, thevolume adjustment is effective.

To repeat tracks

To repeat a trackPress the RPT button to repeat the same track.If the RPT button is pressed, the RPT indicator willcome on.To exit this mode, press the button again.

To repeat songs in the same folder (MP3 CDs on-ly)While a song is playing, press the RPT button for 2seconds or longer (until you hear a beep). The F-RPT indicator will come on and the disc will repeatall the songs in the folder that contains the song cur-rently playing.To exit this mode, press the button again.


5-19OA0X13E4

5

NOTEl With a disc that contains both CD-DA and

MP3 files, the repeat mode causes only filesof the same format (CD-DA only or MP3files only) to be repeated.

To change track playback order

Random playback for a disc (music CDs only)If the RDM button is pressed, the RDM indicatorwill come on and the tracks that are played will beselected at random.To exit this mode, press the button again.

Random playback for a folder (MP3 CDs only)If the RDM button is pressed, the F-RDM indicatorwill come on and the tracks that are played will beselected at random from the folder that is currentlyselected.To exit this mode, press the button again.

Random playback for all folders on a disc (MP3CDs only)Press the RDM button for 2 seconds or longer (un-til you hear a beep). The RDM indicator will comeon and the tracks that are played will be selected atrandom from all folders on the disc currently selec-ted.To exit this mode, press the button again.

NOTEl With a disc that contains both CD-DA and

MP3 files, the random mode causes onlyfiles of the same format (CD-DA only orMP3 files only) to be played in a random se-quence.

CD text and MP3 title displayE00725000706

This CD player can display CD text and MP3 titlesincluding ID3 tag information.

CD textThe CD player can display disc and track titles fordiscs with converted disc and track title informa-tion. Press the DISP button repeatedly to make se-lections in the following sequence: disc name →track name → normal display mode.

NOTEl The display can show up to 11 characters. If

a disc name or track name has more than 11characters, press the PAGE button to viewthe next 11 characters.

l When there is no title information to be dis-played, the display shows “NO TITLE”.

l Characters that the CD player cannot displayare shown as “•”.

MP3 titlesThe CD player can display folder and file titles fordiscs with converted folder and file information.Press the DISP button repeatedly to make selec-tions in the following sequence: folder name → filename → normal display mode.

ID3 tag informationThe CD player can display ID3 tag information forfiles that have been recorded with ID3 tag informa-tion.

1. Press the DISP button for 2 seconds or lon-ger to switch to the ID3 tag information.

2. Press the DISP button repeatedly to make se-lections in the following sequence: albumTAG → track TAG → artist TAG → normaldisplay mode.

NOTEl To return from ID3 tag information to the

folder name, press the DISP button again for2 seconds or longer.

l When there is no title information to be dis-played, the display shows “NO TITLE”.

l The display can show up to 11 characters. Ifa folder name, track name, or item of ID3 taginformation has more than 11 characters,press the PAGE button to view the next 11characters.

l Characters that the CD player cannot displayare shown as “•”.

To display the clockE00766500029

Press the button to switch the clock mode. Toexit the clock mode, press the button.

Example

CD player mode Clock mode

A- (Clock) button


5-20 OA0X13E4

5

NOTEl While the clock mode is selected, the display

will switch to the applicable operation dis-play whenever the CD player, external audioinput mode or radio, etc. is operated. Then, ifno entries are made for 7 seconds, the dis-play will automatically return to the clockmode.

To adjust the clockE00766200042

Automatic mode and manual mode is available fordigital clock adjustment.Select the automatic mode or the manual mode byperforming the following operations:

1. Press the PWR switch to turn ON the audiosystem.

2. Enter the function setup mode by pressingthe button for 2 seconds or longer.

A- (Clock) buttonB- POWER (On-Off) buttonC- SEEK buttonD- CT indicator

3. Select the desired setting for each mode to beturned ON and OFF.

CT ON- Automatic modeCT OFF- Manual mode



• Press the button for at least 2 seconds.• Make no entry for 7 seconds.

Automatic modeThe automatic adjustment mode can set the localtime automatically by using the signal from localRDS stations. In this mode, CT indicator is shownin the display. Refer to “Radio data system (RDS)”on page 5-15.

Manual modeThe manual mode is also available in case the auto-matic mode shows the incorrect time when the ad-jacent local RDS stations are located in a differenttime zone. Refer to “Radio data system (RDS)” onpage 5-15.

A- (Clock) buttonB- (clock adjustment up) buttonC- (clock adjustment down) button

1. Press and hold the button and the clockdisplay flashes.

2. Press the or button to adjust the“hours” digit.If you keep pressing the button, fast-forwardbegins.

3. When the “hours” digit is adjusted, press the button to flash the “minutes” digit.

Press the or button to adjust the “mi-nutes” digit.If you keep pressing the button, fast-forwardbegins.

4. When the time is set, press the button tostop the clock display from flashing.


5-21OA0X13E4

5

NOTEl When using the manual mode to adjust the

clock, set the “CT” function to “OFF”. If the“CT” function is set to “ON”, the time willautomatically be corrected using the signalsfrom the local RDS stations even if it was setmanually.

l Reset the time after the battery terminals aredisconnected and reconnected.

l Seconds do not appear in the clock display,but after adjusting the “minutes” setting, theclock begins to operate from 0 seconds.

To use the external audio input functionE00766300043

A- Auxiliary Audio connector (mini-jack)B- AUX buttonC- Display

You can listen to commercially available audioequipment, such as a portable audio system, fromyour vehicle’s speakers, by connecting the audioequipment to the auxiliary audio connector.

NOTEl Use a stereo mini-jack connector to connect

the audio equipment to the auxiliary audioconnector.

To activate the external audio input modeE00766400044

1. Connect the headphone port of the portableaudio system to the auxiliary audio connec-tor using a commercially available connec-tion cord.

2. Press the AUX button several times toswitch to the AUX mode. The display willshow “AUX” and then the external audio in-put mode will be activated.

3. To deactivate the external audio input mode,press the AUX button to switch to anothermode.

CAUTIONl Do not operate the connected audio equip-

ment while driving.This could distract you and an accidentmight occur.

NOTEl The connected audio equipment cannot be op-

erated with the vehicle’s audio system.l Depending on the connected audio equip-

ment, it may produce noise from the speakers.

l Use the connected audio equipment’s ownpower source, such as its battery.Noise may be produced from the speakers ifthe connected audio equipment is used whilecharging it using the accessory socket of thevehicle.

l Do not activate the external audio inputmode when no audio equipment is connected.Otherwise, noise may be produced from thespeakers.

l Connect audio equipment when the externalaudio input mode is deactivated or lower thevehicle’s speaker volume before connecting it.Noise may be produced from the speakers ifaudio equipment is connected after the exter-nal audio input mode is activated.

l Compared to the CD player mode and radiomode, the vehicle’s speaker volume will belower in the external audio input mode. There-fore, be careful when switching from the ex-ternal audio input mode to the CD playermode or radio mode since the speaker vol-ume will be higher.

l Do not use excessive force on the connectioncord. Otherwise, the cord and connectorsmay be damaged.

l If the connection cord alone is left connectedto the auxiliary audio connector, noise maybe produced from the speakers.

l For information on how to connect and oper-ate the commercially available audio equip-ment, refer to the owner’s manual for the com-mercially available audio equipment.


5-22 OA0X13E4

5

To play tracks from USB device*E00756100240

If your vehicle is equipped with the USB input ter-minal, you can connect your iPod or USB memorydevice to the USB input terminal and play musicfiles stored in the iPod or USB memory device.See the following section for the types of connecta-ble devices and supported files.Refer to “Types of connectable devices and suppor-ted file specifications” on page 5-33.See the following sections for the connecting meth-ods, “How to connect an iPod” on page 5-32 and“How to connect a USB memory device” on page5-31.

NOTEl A file protected by copyright may not be

able to playback.l It is recommended to adjust the equalizer of

the connected device to 0 db or neutral.

iPod control panel and displayE00756200296

1- CD (Mode changeover) button

2- RADIO button3- (Return) button4- (USB device active) indicator5- iPod indicator6- Display7- TRACK (Track number) indicator8- RPT (Repeat mode) indicator9- RDM (Random mode)/F-RDM (Folder ran-

dom mode) indicator10- SEL (Select) indicator11- (Fast-reverse/Track down) button12- (Fast-forward/Track up) button13- DISP (Title display) button14- PAGE (Title scroll) button15- PWR (On-Off)/SEL (Select) switch16- RPT (Repeat) button17- RDM (Random) button

To play from an iPodE00756300398

1. Press the PWR button to turn on the audio sys-tem. The system turns on in the last mode used.

2. Connect your iPod to the USB input terminal.Refer to “How to connect an iPod” on page5-32.

3. Press the CD button several times to switchto the iPod mode. The input mode changesas follows every time the CD button is press-ed: CD mode → iPod mode → AUX mode→ CD mode.The iPod indicator is illuminated and thenthe iPod mode will be activated.

4. Once the device is selected, playback startsand indicator appears on the display.

NOTEl Depending on the condition of your iPod, it

may take a longer time before the playbackstarts.

5. To stop the playback, press the RADIO but-ton or CD button to switch to a different mode.

NOTEl Buttons on the iPod are disabled while the

iPod is connected to the audio system.l To adjust the volume and tone, refer to “To

adjust the volume” on page 5-13 and “To ad-just the tone” on page 5-13.

To fast-forward/reverse the trackE00756400139

To fast-forward/reverse the current track, press the button or button.

Fast-forwardTo fast-forward the current track, press the but-ton. While the button is kept pressed, the track willbe fast-forwarded.

Fast-reverseTo fast-reverse the current track, press the but-ton. While the button is kept pressed, the track willbe fast-reversed.

To select a desired trackE00756500130

Track upPress the button repeatedly until the desiredtrack number appears on the display.

Track downPress the button repeatedly until the desiredtrack number appears on the display.


5-23OA0X13E4

5

NOTEl Pressing the button once during the song

will cause the audio system to restart play-back from the beginning of the song.

To find a track from the iPod menuE00756600203

You can select desired tracks from the “Playlists”,“Artists”, “Albums” or “Songs” menus on your iPod. Operate the SEL switch to select desired tracks.The selected menu or category or track is shown inthe display.When this mode is activated by pressing the SELswitch, the SEL indicator will be displayed in thedisplay.

Press the SELswitch

:To start this mode or to selectthe menu or category or track.

Turn the SELswitch

:To show the menu or categoryor track.



or more or other button is operated after theSEL switch has been pressed, searching ofthe desired tracks is cancelled.

l If no operation is performed for 5 seconds ormore after the track is displayed, playbackstarts.


To play the same track repeatedlyE00756700044

Press the RPT button during playback to show“RPT” in the display.To exit this mode, press the button again.

To play tracks in random orderE00756900046

Press the RDM button to show “RDM” in the dis-play.The iPod randomly selects tracks from the currentcategory and plays the selected tracks.To exit this mode, press the button again.

To play tracks in each album in random orderE00757000103

Press and hold the RDM button until you hear abeep to show “F-RDM” in the display.The iPod randomly selects tracks in the albumfrom the current category and play the selectedtracks.To exit this mode, press the button again.

To switch the displayE00757100120

You can display the track titles, artist names and al-bum titles recorded in the iPod.The display changes as follows every time theDISP button is pressed during playback: Album ti-tle → Track name → Artist name → Normal display.

NOTEl Up to 11 characters are shown in the display

at once. If the title is cut off in the middle,press the PAGE button. The next charactersare displayed every time this button is pressed.

l If no title is stored, “NO TITLE” is shown inthe display.

l Characters that cannot be displayed are sub-stituted by “•”.

USB control panel and displayE00758100299

1- CD (Mode changeover) button2- RADIO button3- (Return) button4- (USB device active) indicator5- USB indicator6- Display7- TRACK (Track number) indicator8- RPT (Repeat mode)/F-RPT (Folder repeat

mode) indicator9- RDM (Random mode)/F-RDM (Folder ran-

dom mode) indicator10- SEL (Select) indicator11- (Fast-reverse/Track down) button12- (Fast-forward/Track up) button13- DISP (Title display) button14- PAGE (Title scroll) button15- PWR (On-Off)/SEL (Select) switch16- RPT (Repeat) button17- RDM (Random) button


5-24 OA0X13E4

5

To play from a USB memory deviceE00762500382

1. Press the PWR button to turn on the audio sys-tem. The system turns on in the last mode used.

2. Connect your USB memory device to theUSB input terminal.Refer to “How to connect a USB memory de-vice” on page 5-31.

3. Press the CD button several times to switchto the USB mode. The input mode changesas follows every time the CD button is press-ed: CD mode → USB mode → AUX mode→ CD mode.The USB indicator is illuminated and thenthe USB mode will be activated.

4. Once the device is selected, playback startsand indicator appears on the display.

NOTEl Depending on the condition of your USB de-

vice, it may take a longer time before the play-back starts.

5. To stop the playback, press the RADIO but-ton or CD button to switch to a different mode.

NOTEl To adjust the volume and tone, refer to “To

adjust the volume” on page 5-13 and “To ad-just the tone” on page 5-13.

Supported compressed music filesE00758300389

This audio can play MP3, WMA and AAC files re-corded in a USB memory device. This audio sup-ports up to 65,535 files in 700 folders on 8 levels.

Folder selection order/file playback order (exam-ple)The folder and file hierarchy in the USB memorydevice is shown below.

Root folder (Root directory)

Level 4Level 3Level 2Level 1

Folder selectionIn the order

File selectionIn the order

NOTEl If a file protected by copyrights is played, the

file will be skipped.

To fast-forward/reverse the trackE00758400117

To fast-forward/reverse the current track, press the button or button.

Fast-forwardTo fast-forward the current track, press the but-ton. While the button is kept pressed, the track willbe fast-forwarded.

Fast-reverseTo fast-reverse the current track, press the but-ton. While the button is kept pressed, the track willbe fast-reversed.

To select a fileE00758500134

Track upPress the button repeatedly until the desiredfile number appears on the display.

Track downPress the button repeatedly until the desiredfile number appears on the display.

NOTEl Pressing the button once during the song

will cause the audio system to restart play-back from the beginning of the file.

To find a fileE00758600340

Operate the SEL switch to select desired file.When this mode is activated by pressing the SELswitch, the SEL indicator will be displayed in thedisplay.

Press the SELswitch : To start this mode or to select

the folder or file.


5-25OA0X13E4

5

Turn the SELswitch

: To show the folder or file.



or more or other button is operated after theSEL switch has been turned, searching of thedesired file is cancelled.

l If no operation is performed for 5 seconds ormore after the file is displayed, playbackstarts.


To play the same file repeatedlyE00758700048

Press the RPT button to show “RPT” in the dis-play. To cancel this mode, press the button again.

To play the files in the same folder repeatedlyE00758800108

Press and hold the RPT button until you hear abeep to show “F-RPT” in the display.All tracks in the current folder are played repeatedly.To exit this mode, press the button again.

To play a folder in random orderE00758900109

Press the RDM button to show “F-RDM” in the dis-play.The audio randomly selects tracks from the currentfolder and plays the selected tracks.To exit this mode, press the button again.

To play all folders in random orderE00759000107

Press and hold the RDM button until you hear abeep to show “RDM” in the display.The audio randomly selects tracks from all foldersand plays the selected tracks.To exit this mode, press the button again.

To switch the displayE00759300214

You can displays titles with tag information.

Folder titleThe display changes as follows every time theDISP button is pressed during playback: Foldername → File name → Normal display.

Tag information1. Press and hold the DISP button until you

hear a beep.2. The display changes as follows every time

the DISP button is pressed briefly: AlbumTAG → Track TAG → Artist TAG → Nor-mal display.

NOTEl Press and hold the DISP button again until

you hear a beep, and the tag information dis-play returns to the folder title display.

l Up to 11 characters are shown in the displayat once. If the title is cut off in the middle,press the PAGE button. The next charactersare displayed every time this button is pressed.

l If no title is stored, “NO TITLE” is shown inthe display.

l Characters that cannot be displayed are sub-stituted by “•”.


5-26 OA0X13E4

5

Error codesE00710101373

If an error code appears in the display, take action in accordance with the table below.Audio system

Error display Item Repair

CHECK DISC Disc is not loaded correctly, or condensation on disc. Insert disc with label facing up.Remove moisture from disc.

DISC ERROR Disc is dirty, scratched, or deformed; or excessive vehicle vibration. Clean or replace disc. Retry when vibrations stop.

INTERNAL E Loading or eject error. Pick-up is out of position. Eject disc and reload. If disc will not eject, have the equipment in-spected.

HEAT ERROR Internal protection against high temperatures. Allow radio to cool by waiting about 30 minutes.

ERROR DC Foreign material is inside the radio or amplifier. Bring your vehicle to a MITSUBISHI MOTORS Authorized Serv-ice Point.

iPod*


NO SONG There are no playable music files. Record music files in the iPod.

VER ERROR The iPod or its software cannot be recognized. Connect a supported iPod.

USB memory device*


FILE ERROR The file cannot be played.The file is protected by copyrights, etc. An error is displayed forseveral seconds, and then the next playable file is played automat-ically.

UNSUPPORTED (first) → DEVICE(after) The USB memory device cannot be recognized. Remove the USB memory device.

UNSUPPORTED (first) → FOR-MAT (after) The USB memory device format cannot be recognized. Remove the USB memory device.

USB BUS PWR An overcurrent or other power-supply error has occurred.Remove the USB memory device.Have the vehicle inspected at a MITSUBISHI MOTORS Author-ized Service Point.


5-27OA0X13E4

5


LSI ERROR Internal device errors Have the vehicle inspected at a MITSUBISHI MOTORS Author-ized Service Point.


5-28 OA0X13E4

5

Handling of compact discsE00723000454

l Use only the type of compact discs that havethe mark shown in the illustration below.(Playback of CD-R or CD-RW discs maycause problems.)

l The use of special shaped, damaged compactdiscs (like cracked discs) or low-quality com-pact discs (like warped discs or burrs on thediscs) such as those shown will damage theCD player. l In the following circumstances, moisture can

form on discs and inside the audio system,preventing normal operation.

• When there is high humidity (for exam-ple, when it is raining).

• When the temperature suddenly rises,such as right after the heater is turned onin cold weather. In this case, wait until the moisture hashad time to dry out.

l When the CD player is subjected to violent vi-brations, such as during off-road driving, thetracking may not work.

l When storing compact discs, always storethem in their separate cases. Never place com-pact discs in direct sunlight, or in any placewhere the temperature or humidity is high.

l Never touch the flat surface of the disc with-out a label. This will damage the disc surfaceand could affect the sound quality. When han-dling a compact disc, always hold it by theouter edge and the centre hole.

l To clean a disc, use a soft, clean, dry cloth.Wipe directly from the centre hole towardsthe outer edge. Do not wipe in a circle. Nev-er use any chemicals such as benzine, paintthinner, a disc spray cleaner, or an anti-staticagent on the disc.

l Do not use a ball point pen, felt pen, pencil,etc. to write on the label surface of the disc.

l Do not put additional labels or stickers oncompact discs. Also, do not use any compactdisc on which a label or sticker has started topeel off or any compact disc that has sticki-ness or other contamination left by a peeled-off label or sticker. If you use such a com-pact disc, the CD player may stop workingproperly and you may not be able to eject thecompact disc.

Notes on CD-Rs/RWsE00725100055

l You may have trouble playing back someCD-R/RW discs recorded on CD recorders(CD-R/RW drives), either due to their record-ing characteristics or dirt, fingerprints,scratches, etc. on the disc surface.

l CD-R/RW discs are less resistant to high tem-peratures and high humidity than ordinary mu-sic CDs and can therefore be damaged andrendered unplayable if left inside your vehi-cle for a long time.


5-29OA0X13E4

5

l Depending on the combination of the writingsoftware, the CD recorder (CD-R/RW drive),and the disc used to create a CD-R/RW, thedisc might not play successfully.

l This player cannot play the CD-R/RW discsif the session is not closed.

l This player cannot play CD-R/RW discswhich contain other than CD-DA or MP3 da-ta (Video CD, etc.).

l Be sure to observe the handling instructionsfor the CD-R/RW disc.

WARNINGl Operating the CD player in a manner oth-

er than specifically instructed herein mayresult in hazardous radiation exposure.Do not remove the cover and attempt torepair the CD player by yourself. Thereare no user serviceable parts inside. If theCD player is not working correctly, it isrecommended that you have it inspected.

AntennaE00710500022

Roof antennaE00710900127

When listening to the radio, fully raise the antennaup.

To removeTurn the pole (A) anticlockwise.

To installScrew the pole (A) clockwise into the base (B) un-til it is securely retained.

NOTEl Be sure to remove the roof antenna in the fol-

lowing cases:• When using an automatic car wash.• When placing a car cover over the vehicle.

l Before driving into a structure that has a lowceiling, fold down the antenna to prevent itfrom hitting the ceiling.


5-30 OA0X13E4

5

Link System*E00764500155

The Link System takes overall control of the devi-ces connected via the USB input terminal allowingthe connected devices to be operated by using theswitches in the vehicle.See the following section for details on how to op-erate. Refer to “USB input terminal” on page 5-31.Refer to “To play tracks from USB device” onpage 5-23.

USB input terminal*E00761900015

You can connect your USB memory device oriPod* to play music files stored in the USB memo-ry device or iPod.The following explains how to connect and removea USB memory device or iPod.Refer to the following sections for details on howto play music files:Refer to “To play tracks from USB device” onpage 5-23. *: “iPod” is a registered trademark of Apple Inc. inthe United States and other countries.

How to connect a USB memory deviceE00762000404

To connect1. Park your vehicle in a safe place and turn the

ignition switch to the “LOCK” position orput the operation mode in OFF.

2. Open the glove box and remove the terminalpart (A) of the connector cable (B) from clip(C).

3. Connect a commercially available USB con-nector cable (D) to the USB memory device(E).

4. Connect the commercially available USB con-nector cable (D) to the vehicle’s connector ca-ble (B).Be sure to hold the terminal part (A) of theconnector cable as shown in the illustration.

5. Fix the terminal part (A) of the connector ca-ble on the clip.


5-31OA0X13E4

5

CAUTIONl Keep the lid of the glove box closed while

driving the vehicle. A lid or the contentsof the glove box could otherwise cause in-juries.

NOTEl Do not connect the USB memory device to

the vehicle’s connector cable directly.The USB memory device may be damaged.

l When closing the glove box, be careful notto trap the connector cable and USB memorydevice.

To remove1. Turn the ignition switch to the “LOCK” posi-

tion or put the operation mode in OFF.2. Remove the commercially available USB con-

nector cable (D).Be sure to hold the terminal part (A) of theconnector cable as shown in the illustration.

3. Fix the terminal part (A) of the connector ca-ble on the clip and close the glove box.

How to connect an iPodE00762100304

To connect1. Park your vehicle in a safe place and turn the

ignition switch to the “LOCK” position orput the operation mode in OFF.

2. Open the glove box and remove the terminalpart (A) of the connector cable (B) from clip(C).

3. Connect the Dock connector (D) to the iPod(E).

NOTEl Use a genuine Dock connector from Apple

Inc.On vehicles equipped with MITSUBISHIMulti-Entertainment System (MMES), referto the separate “MITSUBISHI Multi-Enter-tainment System owner’s manual” for detailsof connection.

4. Connect the Dock connector (D) to the con-nector cable (B).Be sure to hold the terminal part (A) of theconnector cable as shown in the illustration.

5. Fix the terminal part (A) of the connector ca-ble on the clip.

CAUTIONl Keep the lid of the glove box closed while

driving the vehicle. A lid or the contentsof the glove box could otherwise cause in-juries.


5-32 OA0X13E4

5

NOTEl When closing the glove box, be careful not

to trap the connector cable and iPod.

To remove1. Turn the ignition switch to the “LOCK” posi-

tion or put the operation mode in OFF.2. Remove the Dock connector (D).

Be sure to hold the terminal part (A) of theconnector cable as shown in the illustration.

3. Fix the terminal part (A) of the connector ca-ble on the clip and close the glove box.

Types of connectable devices and sup-ported file specifications

E00762200015

Device typesE00762300263

Devices of the following types can be connected.

Model name Condition

USB memory device Storage capacity of256 Mbytes or more

iPod* fifth generation F/W Ver.1.3 or later

iPod clas-sic*

80GB/180GB F/W Ver.1.1.2 or later

120GB F/W Ver.2.0.1 or later

160GB (late2009)

F/W Ver.2.0.4 or later

iPodnano*

first generation F/W Ver.1.3.1 or later

second genera-tion


third generation F/W Ver.1.1.3 or later

fourth genera-tion


fifth generation F/W Ver.1.0.2 or later

sixth generation F/W Ver.1.0 or later

iPodtouch*

first generation F/W Ver.3.1.3 or later

second genera-tion


third generation F/W Ver.4.3.1 or later

fourth genera-tion


*: “iPod,” “iPod classic,” “iPod nano,” “iPodtouch” and “iPhone” are registered trademarks ofApple Inc. in the United States and other countries.

Model name Condition

iPhone* iPhone F/W Ver.3.1.3 or later

iPhone 3G F/W Ver.4.2.1 or later

iPhone 3GS F/W Ver.4.3.1 or later

iPhone 4 F/W Ver.4.3.1 or later

iPhone 4S F/W Ver.5.0.1 or later

Models other than USBmemory devices and iPods

Digital audio playersupporting mass stor-age class

*: “iPod,” “iPod classic,” “iPod nano,” “iPodtouch” and “iPhone” are registered trademarks ofApple Inc. in the United States and other countries.

NOTEl Depending on the type of the USB memory

device or other device connected, the connec-ted device may not function properly or theavailable functions may be limited.

l Use the iPod whose firmware has been upda-ted to the latest version.

l You can charge your iPod by connecting it tothe USB input terminal when the ignitionswitch or the operation mode is in ON or ACC.

l Do not keep your USB memory device oriPod in your vehicle.

l It is recommended that you back up files incase of data damage.


5-33OA0X13E4

5

l Do not connect to the USB input terminalany device (hard disk, card reader, memoryreader, etc.) other than the connectable devi-ces specified in the previous section. The de-vice and/or data may be damaged. If any ofthese devices was connected by mistake, re-move it after turning the ignition switch tothe “LOCK” position or putting the opera-tion mode in OFF.

File specificationsE00762400033

You can play music files of the following specifica-tions that are saved in a USB memory device or oth-er device supporting mass storage class. When youconnect your iPod, playable file specifications de-pend on the connected iPod.

Item Condition

File format MP3, WMA, AAC

Maximum number oflevels (including theroot)

Level 8

Number of folders 700

Number of files 65,535

Sun visorsE00711201270

1- To eliminate front glare2- To eliminate side glare

Vanity mirrorA vanity mirror is fitted to the back of the sun visoron the driver side.

Card holderCards can be slipped into the holder (A) on theback of the sun visor on the driver side.


5-34 OA0X13E4

5

Accessory socketE00711601519

The accessory socket can be used while the igni-tion switch or the operation mode is in ON or ACC.To use a plug-in type accessory, open the cap, andinsert the plug in the accessory socket.

CAUTIONl Be sure to use a “plug-in” type accessory

operating at 12 V and at 120 W or less.l Long use of the electric appliance without

running the engine may run down the bat-tery.

l When the accessory socket is not in use,be sure to close the cap, because the sock-et might become clogged by foreign mate-rial and be short-circuited.

Interior lampsE00712001318

1- Luggage room lamp*2- Room lamp

NOTEl If you leave the lamp on without running the

engine, you will run down the battery. Be-fore you leave the vehicle, make sure that thelamp is off.

Room lampE00712600421

1- ( )The lamp illuminates regardless of whether a dooror the tailgate is open or closed.2- (•)

Delayed off function[Vehicles without central door locks system]The lamp illuminates when a door or the tailgate isopened. It goes off about 7 seconds after all doorsand the tailgate are closed.However, the lamp goes off immediately when theignition switch is turned to the “ON” position withall doors and the tailgate closed.[Vehicles with central door locks system]The lamp illuminates when a door or the tailgate isopened. It goes off about 15 seconds after the dooror tailgate is closed.However, the lamp goes off immediately with alldoors and the tailgate closed in the following cases:l When the ignition switch is turned to the

“ON” position or the operation mode is putin ON.

l When the central door lock function is usedto lock the vehicle.

l When the keyless entry key or the keyless op-eration key is used to lock the vehicle.

l If the vehicle is equipped with the keyless op-eration system, when the keyless operationfunction is used to lock the vehicle.

Auto cut-out functionIf the lamp is left switched on with the ignitionswitch is in the “LOCK” or “ACC” position or theoperation mode is in OFF or ACC, and a door orthe tailgate is opened, it goes off automatically af-ter approximately 30 minutes.The lamp will illuminate again after it automatical-ly goes off in the following cases:


5-35OA0X13E4

5

l When the ignition switch is turned to the“ON” position or the operation mode is putin ON.

l When the keyless entry system or the keylessoperation system is operated.

l When all doors and the tailgate are closed.

NOTEl When the key was used to start the engine, if

the key is removed while the doors and tail-gate are closed, the lamp is illuminated andafter a few seconds it goes off.

l When the keyless operation function wasused to start the engine, if the operationmode is put in OFF while the doors and tail-gate are closed, the lamp illuminates and af-ter about 15 seconds it goes off. (if so equip-ped)

l The time until the lamp goes off (delayedoff) can be adjusted. For details, please con-sult a MITSUBISHI MOTORS AuthorizedService Point

l The auto cut-out function cannot be operatedwhen the room lamp switch is in the “ ” po-sition.Also, this function can be deactivated. For de-tails, please consult a MITSUBISHIMOTORS Authorized Service Point

3- ( )The lamp goes off regardless of whether a door orthe tailgate is open or closed.

Luggage room lamp*E00712700725

The lamp illuminates when the tailgate is opened,and goes out when the tailgate is closed.

Storage spacesE00713101895

CAUTIONl Never leave lighters, cans of carbonated

drink, and spectacles in the cabin whenparking the vehicle in hot sunshine. Thecabin will become extremely hot, so light-ers and other flammable items may catchfire and unopened drink cans may rup-ture. Also, spectacles with plastic lensesor materials could deform or crack.

l Keep the lids of storage spaces closedwhile driving the vehicle. A lid or the con-tents of a storage space could otherwisecause injuries.

Glove boxE00717601595

To open, pull the lever (A).


5-36 OA0X13E4

5

NOTEl The USB input terminal (if so equipped) is lo-

cated in the glove box.For details, refer to “USB input terminal” onpage 5-31.

Cup holderE00714501027

CAUTIONl Do not drink beverages while driving.

This is distracting and could cause an ac-cident.

For the front seatThe cup holder is located in front of the floor console.

For the rear seatE00718900152

The cup holder is located behind the parking brakelever.


5-37OA0X13E4

5

Bottle holderE00718200357

CAUTIONl Do not drink beverages while driving.

This is distracting and could cause an ac-cident.

l Drinks could be spilled by the vibrationand jolts while driving. If the spilt drinkis very hot, you could be burnt.

There are bottle holders located on the front doors.

NOTEl Do not store cup or drink can in the bottle

holder.l Tightly close the cap on drink bottles before

storing them.l Some bottles may be too big or the wrong

shape to fit in the holder.

Rear shelf panel*E00715400156

CAUTIONl Do not place luggage or other items on

the rear shelf panel. Any items on therear shelf panel would obstruct your rear-ward view, and they could fly forwardand cause injuries or other mishap in theevent of hard braking.

To install1. Insert the concave portion (A) on the under-

side of the rear shelf panel into the inside pro-truding portion (B) of the rear pillar.

CAUTIONl Lightly push the rear shelf panel to make

sure that the concave portion (A) is setfirmly in the protruding portion (B) ofthe tailgate. If the rear shelf panel is notsecurely locked in place, it could unhookwhile driving and cause injuries.

2. Hang the strap (C) of the rear shelf panel onthe hook (D).

To removeFollow this procedure in reverse to remove.


5-38 OA0X13E4

5

Convenient hookE00732900169

Light items of luggage can be hung from the hook.

NOTEl Do not hang heavy luggage (more than about

4 kg) on the hook.Doing so could cause damage to the hook.

Assist gripE00732800302

The grip is to support the body by hand while seat-ed in the vehicle.

CAUTIONl Do not use the assist grip when getting in-

to or out of the vehicle. The assist gripcould detach causing you to fall.


5-39OA0X13E4

5

OA0X13E4

If the vehicle breaks down............................................................6-02Emergency starting.......................................................................6-02Engine overheating.......................................................................6-04Tool and jack................................................................................6-05Tyre repair kit*.............................................................................6-06How to change a tyre (Vehicles equipped with spare tyre)..........6-11Wheel covers*..............................................................................6-16Towing..........................................................................................6-17Operation under adverse driving conditions.................................6-20

For emergencies

OA0X13E4

6

If the vehicle breaks downE00800101137

If the vehicle breaks down on the road, move it tothe shoulder and use the hazard warning flashers and/or the warning triangle etc.Refer to “Hazard warning flasher switch” on page3-18.

If the engine stops/failsVehicle operation and control are affected if the en-gine stops. Before moving the vehicle to a safearea, be aware of the following:l The brake booster becomes inoperative and

the pedal effort will increase. Press down thebrake pedal harder than usual.

l Since the power steering system is no longeroperative, the steering wheel feels heavywhen turning it.

Emergency startingE00800502910

If the engine cannot be started because the batteryis weak or dead, the battery from another vehiclecan be used with jumper cables to start the engine.

WARNINGl To start the engine using jumper cables

connected to another vehicle, perform thecorrect procedures according to the in-struction below. Incorrect procedurescould result in a fire or explosion or dam-age to the vehicles.

l Keep sparks, cigarettes and flames awayfrom the battery because the battery mayproduce an explosion.

CAUTIONl Do not attempt to start the engine by pull-

ing or pushing the vehicle.It could damage your vehicle.

l Check the other vehicle. It must have a 12-volt battery.If the other system isn’t 12-volt, shortingcan damage both vehicles.

l Use the proper cables suitable for the bat-tery size to prevent overheating of the ca-bles.

l Check the jumper cables for damage andcorrosion before use.

l Always wear protective eye goggles whenworking near the battery.

l Keep the battery out of the reach of chil-dren.

1. Get the vehicles close enough so the jumpercables can reach, but be sure the vehiclesaren’t touching each other.

2. Turn off all lamps, heater and other electricalloads.

3. Set the parking brake firmly on each vehicle.Put an A/T or CVT in “P” (PARK) or a M/Tin “N” (Neutral). Stop the engine.

WARNINGl Turn off the ignition on both vehicles be-

forehand. Make sure that the cables oryour clothes cannot be caught by the fanor drive belt. Personal injury could result.

4. Make sure battery electrolyte is at the properlevel.Refer to “Battery” on page 8-08.

WARNINGl If electrolyte fluid is not visible, or ap-

pears to be frozen, Do Not Attempt JumpStarting!A battery might rupture or explode if thetemperature is below the freezing pointor if it is not filled to the proper level.

For emergencies

6-02 OA0X13E4

6

WARNINGl Electrolyte is corrosive diluted sulphuric

acid.If electrolyte (battery acid) comes into con-tact with your hands, eyes, clothes andthe painted surface of your vehicle, itshould be thoroughly flushed with water.If electrolyte gets in your eyes, flush themwith water immediately and thoroughly,and get prompt medical attention.

5. Connect one end of one jumper cable tothe positive (+) terminal of the discharged bat-tery (A), and the other end to the positive(+) terminal of the booster battery (B).Connect one end of the other jumper cable

to the negative (-) terminal of the boosterbattery, and the other end to the designa-ted ground location of the vehicle with the dis-charged battery at the point farthest from thebattery.

WARNINGl Make sure that the connection is made

to the appointed position (shown in the il-lustration). If the connection is made di-rectly to the negative side of the battery,the inflammable gasses generated fromthe battery might catch fire and explode.

l When connecting the jumper cable, donot connect the positive (+) cable to thenegative (-) terminal.Otherwise sparks might cause explosionof the battery.

CAUTIONl Take care not to get the jumper cable

caught in the cooling fan or other rotat-ing part in the engine compartment.

6. Start the engine in the vehicle which has thebooster battery, let the engine idle a few mi-nutes, then start the engine in the vehiclewith the discharged battery.

CAUTIONl Keep the engine of the vehicle giving assis-

tance running.

NOTEl For vehicles equipped with the Auto Stop &

Go (AS&G) system, press the “Auto Stop &Go (AS&G) OFF” switch to deactivate theAuto Stop & Go (AS&G) system and pre-vent the engine from automatically stoppingbefore the battery is sufficiently charged.Refer to “To deactivate” on page 4-18.

7. After the engine is started, disconnect the ca-bles in the reverse order and keep the enginerunning for several minutes.

NOTEl If the vehicle is put in motion without fully

charging the battery, it might cause the lossof smooth engine operation and the anti-lockbrake warning lamp to illuminate.Refer to “Anti-lock brake system (ABS)” onpage 4-28.

For emergencies

6-03OA0X13E4

6

Engine overheatingE00800602722

If the high coolant temperature warning lamp illu-minates during the engine is running, the enginemay be overheating.If this occurs, take the following corrective meas-ures:

1. Stop the vehicle in a safe place.2. Check whether steam is coming from the en-

gine compartment. [If steam does not come from the engine com-partment]With the engine still running, raise the bon-net to ventilate the engine compartment.


Go (AS&G) system, press the “Auto Stop &Go (AS&G) OFF” switch to deactivate theAuto Stop & Go (AS&G) system before stop-ping the vehicle.Refer to “To deactivate” on page 4-18.

[If steam is coming from the engine compart-ment]Stop the engine, and when the steam stops,raise the bonnet to ventilate the engine com-partment. Restart the engine.

WARNINGl Do not open the bonnet while steam is com-

ing from the engine compartment. Itcould cause steam or hot water to spurtout, causing burns. Hot water could spurtout even when there is no steam comingout, and some parts will be very hot. Bevery careful when opening the bonnet.

l Be careful of hot steam, which could beblowing off the reserve tank cap.

l Do not attempt to remove the radiatorcap while the engine is hot.

3. Confirm that the cooling fan (A) is turning.[If the cooling fan is turning]After the high coolant temperature warninglamp has gone off, stop the engine.[If the cooling fan is not turning]Stop the engine immediately and contact aMITSUBISHI MOTORS Authorized ServicePoint for assistance.

*: Front of the vehicle

WARNINGl Be careful not to get your hands or

clothes caught in the cooling fan.

4. Check the coolant level in the reserve tank (B).

Full

Low

5. Add coolant to the radiator and/or reservetank if necessary. (Refer to the “Mainte-nance” section.)

WARNINGl Make sure that the engine has cooled

down before removing the radiator cap(C), because hot steam or boiling waterotherwise will gush from the filler portand may scald you.

For emergencies

6-04 OA0X13E4

6

CAUTIONl Do not add coolant while the engine is

hot. Suddenly adding cold coolant coulddamage the engine. Wait for the engine tocool down, then add coolant a little at atime.

6. Examine the radiator hoses for coolant leak-age and the drive belt for looseness or damage.If there is anything wrong with the coolingsystem or drive belt, we recommend you tohave it checked and repaired.

Tool and jackE00800901496

StorageThe tools are stored beneath the luggage floorboard of the luggage compartment.The jack (if so equipped) is stored under the frontleft side seat. The storage location of the tools andjack should be remembered in case of an emergency.

Type 1

Type 2

1- Tools2- Jack*

ToolsE00801900627

1- Tool case*2- Wheel nut wrench3- Jack bar4- Towing hook

Jack*E00802000595

Before removing or storing the jack, move thefront left side seat fully forward to access the jackfrom the rear seat area. (Refer to “Front seat” onpage 2-02.)

CAUTIONl Never access, remove or store the jack

from the front of the seat. Doing so coulddamage electrical wires under the seat.

To removeTurn the shaft end of the jack in the direction (1)until the jack fully retracts and remove the jackfrom the holder (A).

For emergencies

6-05OA0X13E4

6

To storePut the jack in the holder (A) and turn the shaft endof the jack in the direction (2) by hand until thejack is firmly secured.

WARNINGl After storing the jack in place, make sure

the jack is securely fixed in the holder. Ifthe jack is not fixed securely, it may moveand hit an occupant in an accident result-ing in serious injury or death.

Tyre repair kit*E00804500028

This kit enables emergency repair of a small punc-ture in the tread area of a tyre that has run over anail, screw, or similar object.

StorageThe tyre repair kit is stored beneath the luggagefloor board of the luggage compartment.The storage location of the tyre repair kit should beremembered in case of an emergency.

1- Tyre repair set2- Tyre compressor3- Tyre sealant bottle4- Filler hose5- Extension hose

(This hose is used for removal of sealant. Itis not used in emergency puncture repair.)

6- Valve insert (spare)7- Valve remover

8- Speed restriction sticker

How to use the tyre repair kitE00804600016

CAUTIONl The tyre sealant can cause health damage

if swallowed. If you accidentally swallowit, drink as much water as possible and im-mediately consult a doctor.

l If the tyre sealant gets in your eyes or onyour skin, rinse with lots of water. If youstill sense an abnormality, consult a doc-tor.

l Consult a doctor immediately if any aller-gic reactions occur.

l Do not allow children to touch the tyresealant.

l Do not breathe in the vapours of tyre seal-ant.

l Be sure to use a MITSUBISHI MOTORSGENUINE tyre sealant.

NOTEl The tyre sealant cannot be used in any of the

situations listed below. If any of these situa-tions occurs, please contact a MITSUBISHIMOTORS Authorized Service Point or anoth-er specialist.

• The tyre sealant’s expiry date has passed.(The expiry date is shown on the bottle la-bel.)

For emergencies

6-06 OA0X13E4

6

• More than one tyre is punctured.• The puncture hole has a length or width

of 4 mm or more.• The tyre is punctured in the side wall (A),

not in the tread (B).

• The vehicle has been driven with the tyrealmost completely flat.

• The tyre has completely slipped over thewheel rim and has come off the wheel.

• The wheel is damaged.

l Use the tyre sealant only at ambient tempera-tures of -30 °C to + 60 °C.

l Effect an emergency repair without pullingout the object (nail, screw, etc.) that is stuckin the tyre.

l Do not use the tyre sealant if the tyre hasbeen damaged by being driven when insuffi-ciently inflated (e.g. bumps, cuts, cracks etc.on the tyre).

l Wipe tyre sealant off the paintwork immedi-ately with a damp cloth.

l Immediately wash clothes contaminated withtyre sealant.

Before repairing a tyre, first stop your vehicle in asafe, flat location.

1. Park the vehicle on level and stable ground.2. Set the parking brake firmly.3. On vehicles with M/T, stop the engine and

move the gearshift lever to the “R” (Reverse)position.On vehicles with CVT, move the selector lev-er to the “P” (PARK) position and stop the en-gine.

4. Turn on the hazard warning flashers and setup a warning triangle, flashing signal lamp,etc., at an adequate distance from the vehi-cle, and have all your passengers leave the ve-hicle.

5. Take out the tyre repair kit.6. Shake the tyre sealant bottle well.

NOTEl In cold conditions (when the ambient temper-

ature is 0 °C or lower), thickening of the tyresealant can make the tyre sealant hard tosqueeze out of the bottle. Warm the bottle in-side the vehicle.

7. Take the cap (C) off the tyre sealant bottle(D). Do not remove the seal (E). Screw thefiller hose (D) onto the bottle (E). As youscrew the filler hose onto the bottle, the sealwill break, allowing the sealant to be used.

For emergencies

6-07OA0X13E4

6

CAUTIONl If you shake the bottle after screwing on

the hose, sealant may spray out of the hose.

8. Take the valve cap (G) off the tyre valve (H),then press the valve remover (I) onto thevalve as illustrated. Allow all of the air in thetyre to escape.

9. Remove the valve insert (J) by turning it anti-clockwise using the valve remover (I). Putthe removed valve insert in a clean place soit does not get dirty.

CAUTIONl If there is any air left in the tyre when

you remove the valve insert, the valve in-sert may fly out and injure you. Makesure the tyre contains no air before remov-ing the valve insert.

10. Remove the plug (K) from the free end of thehose (L). Press the hose onto the valve (H).

11. Holding the sealant bottle upside-down,squeeze it again and again to inject all of thesealant into the tyre.

NOTEl When injecting the sealant, position the

valve away from the bottom, i.e., away fromthe point where the tyre touches the ground.If the valve is near the point where the tyretouches the ground, the sealant may not go in-to the tyre easily.

12. After injecting the sealant, pull the hose offthe valve, remove any residual sealant fromthe valve, rim and/or tyre.

For emergencies

6-08 OA0X13E4

6

Fit the valve insert (J) into the valve (H), andscrew the valve insert securely into place us-ing the valve remover (I).

NOTEl When removing and screwing in the valve in-

sert using the valve remover, turn the valveremover by hand. Using a tool to turn thevalve remover could damage it.

13. Pull out the compressor hose (M) from theside of the tyre compressor, and then secure-ly attach the hose to the tyre valve (H).

14. Place the compressor (N) with its air pres-sure gauge (O) on top.Pull out the compressor’s power cord (P), in-sert the plug on the cord into the accessorysocket (Q), and then turn the ignition switchto the “ACC” position or put the operationmode in ACC. (Refer to “Accessory socket”on page 5-35.)Turn ON the compressor switch (R) and in-flate the tyre to the specified pressure. (Referto “Tyre inflation pressures” on page 8-10.)

CAUTIONl The supplied compressor is designed only

for inflation of your vehicle tyres.l The compressor is designed to run on a ve-

hicle’s 12 V power supply. Do not connectit to any other power source.

CAUTIONl The compressor is not waterproof. If you

use it in rain, make sure water does notget on it.

l Any sand or dust sucked into the compres-sor could make the compressor breakdown. Do not place the compressor direct-ly on any sandy or dusty surface when us-ing it.

l Do not disassemble or modify the com-pressor. Also, do not subject the air pres-sure gauge to shock. It could malfunction.

15. Check and adjust the tyre pressure with refer-ence to the air pressure gauge on the compres-sor. If you overinflate the tyre, release air byloosening the hose’s end fitting.If there is a gap between the tyre and wheelbecause the tyre has moved inward from thewheel rim, press the periphery of the tyre to-wards the wheel to close the gap before run-ning the compressor. (With no gaps, the tyrepressure will rise.)

CAUTIONl Be careful not to get your fingers trapped

between the tyre and wheel as the tyre in-flates.

l The surface of the compressor will gethot while the compressor is running. Donot keep the compressor running continu-ously for more than 10 minutes. After us-ing the compressor, wait for the compres-sor to cool before using it again.

For emergencies

6-09OA0X13E4

6

CAUTIONl If the compressor becomes sluggish or

hot while operating, it is overheating. Im-mediately place the switch in the OFF po-sition and let the compressor cool downfor at least 30 minutes.

NOTEl If the tyre pressure does not rise to the speci-

fied level within 10 minutes, the tyre may beso severely damaged that the tyre sealant can-not be used to effect an emergency repair.Please contact a MITSUBISHI MOTORS Au-thorized Service Point or another specialistin this event.

16. Turn OFF the compressor switch, then pullthe power cord plug out of the socket.

NOTEl Simply putting sealant and air into the tyre us-

ing the tyre repair kit does not seal the punc-ture hole. Air will leak through the puncturehole until the emergency repair procedure iscompleted (through step 19 or step 20 ofthese instructions).

17. Affix the speed restriction sticker (R) to thethree-diamond mark on the steering wheel.

CAUTIONl Do not affix the sticker anywhere except

the specified position on the pad of thesteering wheel. Affixing the sticker in anincorrect position could prevent the SRSairbag from working normally.

18. When you have inflated the tyre to the speci-fied pressure, stow the compressor, bottle,and other items in the vehicle and promptlystart driving the vehicle so that the tyre seal-ant can spread evenly in the tyre. Drive withgreat care. Do not exceed a speed of 80 km/h(50 mph). Observe local speed limits.

CAUTIONl If you sense any abnormality while driv-

ing, stop the vehicle and contact aMITSUBISHI MOTORS AuthorizedService Point or another specialist. Other-wise the tyre pressure may drop beforethe emergency repair procedure is com-pleted, rendering the vehicle unsafe.

NOTEl Driving faster than 80 km/h (50 mph) can

make the vehicle vibrate.

19. After driving for 10 minutes or 5 km, checkthe tyre pressure using the air pressure gaugeon the compressor. If the tyre pressure has ap-parently not dropped, the emergency repairprocedure is complete. Continue the processfrom step 21.If the tyre pressure is not sufficient, inflatethe tyre to the specified pressure again anddrive the vehicle carefully without exceedinga speed of 80 km/h (50 mph).

CAUTIONl If the tyre pressure is lower than the min-

imum permitted pressure (1.3 bar{130 kPa}), the tyre cannot successfullybe repaired with the tyre sealant. Do notdrive the vehicle any further. Contact aMITSUBISHI MOTORS AuthorizedService Point or another specialist.

20. After driving for 10 minutes or 5 km, checkthe tyre pressure using the air pressure gauge

For emergencies

6-10 OA0X13E4

6

on the compressor. If the tyre pressure has ap-parently not dropped, the emergency repairprocedure is complete. You must still not ex-ceed a speed of 80 km/h (50 mph). Observelocal speed limits.

NOTEl If the tyre pressure has dropped below the

specified level when you check it at the endof the repair procedure, do not drive the vehi-cle any further. Contact a MITSUBISHIMOTORS Authorized Service Point or anoth-er specialist.

l In cold conditions (when the ambient temper-ature is 0 °C or lower), the time and drivingdistance necessary until completion of the re-pair can be longer than in warmer conditions,meaning that the tyre pressure can drop be-low the specified level even when you haveinflated the tyre a second time and subsequent-ly driven the vehicle. If this happens, inflatethe tyre to the specified pressure once more,drive for about 10 minutes or 5 km, thencheck the tyre pressure again. If the tyre pres-sure has again dropped below the specifiedlevel, stop driving the vehicle and contact aMITSUBISHI MOTORS Authorized ServicePoint or another specialist.

21. Immediately drive with great care to aMITSUBISHI MOTORS Authorized ServicePoint or another specialist and have tyre re-pair/replacement performed.

CAUTIONl Be sure to check the tyre pressure for con-

firmation that the emergency repair pro-cedure is complete.

NOTEl Please give the empty sealant bottle to your

MITSUBISHI MOTORS Authorized ServicePoint when you purchase new sealant or dis-pose of the sealant bottle according to nation-al regulations for the disposal of chemicalwaste.

l A tyre in which puncture sealant has beenused should ideally be replaced with a newone. If you wish to have such a tyre properlyrepaired for reuse, please contact aMITSUBISHI MOTORS Authorized ServicePoint or another specialist. Note that a properrepair is impossible following an emergencyrepair if the puncture hole cannot be located.

l The manufacturer is unable to guarantee thatall tyre punctures can be repaired with thetyre repair kit, in particular cuts or perfora-tions with a diameter of more than 4 mm oraway from the tyre’s tread. The manufactureris not liable for damage sustained through im-proper use of the tyre repair kit.

l The manufacturer is not liable for damage sus-tained through re-use of any tyre in whichtyre sealant has been used.

How to change a tyre (Vehiclesequipped with spare tyre)

E00801202969

Before changing a tyre, first stop your vehicle in asafe, flat location.

1. Park the vehicle on level and stable ground,free of loose pebbles, etc.

2. Set the parking brake firmly.3. On vehicles with M/T, stop the engine and

move the gearshift lever to the “R” (Reverse)position.On vehicles with CVT, move the selector lev-er to the “P” (PARK) position and stop the en-gine.

4. Turn on the hazard warning flashers and setup a warning triangle, flashing signal lamp,etc., at an adequate distance from the vehi-cle, and have all your passengers leave the ve-hicle.

5. To prevent the vehicle from rolling when jack-ing up the vehicle, place chocks or blocks(A) at the tyre that is diagonally oppositefrom the tyre (B) you are changing.

For emergencies

6-11OA0X13E4

6

WARNINGl Be sure to apply chocks or blocks to the

correct tyre when jacking up the vehicle.If the vehicle moves while jacked up, thejack could slip out of position, leading toan accident.

NOTEl The chocks shown in the illustration do not

come with your vehicle. It is recommendedthat you keep some in the vehicle for use ifneeded.

l If chocks are not available, use stones or anyother objects that are large enough to holdthe wheel in position.

6. Get the jack bar and wheel nut wrench ready.Refer to “Tool and jack” on page 6-05.

Spare wheel informationE00803600729

The spare wheel is stored beneath the luggage floorboard of the luggage compartment.Check the air pressure of the spare tyre frequentlyand make sure it is ready for emergency use at anytime.Maintaining the spare wheel at the highest speci-fied air pressure will ensure that it can always beused under any conditions (city/high-speed driving,varying load weight, etc.).

CAUTIONl The tyre pressure should be periodically

checked and maintained at the specifiedpressure while the tyre is stowed.Driving with an insufficient tyre pressurecan lead to an accident. If you have nochoice but to drive with an insufficienttyre pressure, keep your speed down andinflate the tyre to the correct pressure assoon as possible. (Refer to “Tyre inflationpressures” on page 8-10.)

Compact spare wheelThe compact spare wheel is designed to save spacein the luggage compartment and its lighter weightmakes it easier to use if a flat tyre occurs.

CAUTIONl The compact spare wheel is for tempora-

ry use only and should be removed assoon as the original wheel can be re-paired or replaced.

l The vehicle must not be driven at speedsin excess of 80 km/h (50 mph) while usingthe compact spare wheel.

l The compact spare tyre is not as good asa standard tyre in controllability and sta-bility. When the compact spare tyre isused, avoid quick starts, sudden brakingand sharp steering.

l The compact spare wheel is specifically de-signed for your vehicle and it should notbe used on any other vehicle.

CAUTIONl Do not use snow traction device (tyre

chains) with your compact spare wheel.Because of the smaller tyre size, a snowtraction device (tyre chains) will not fitproperly. This could cause damage to thewheel and result in loss of the chain.If a front tyre becomes flat when usingsnow traction device (tyre chains), first re-place a rear wheel with the compactspare wheel and then use the removedrear wheel to replace the flat front wheelso that you can continue to use the snowtraction device (tyre chains).

CAUTIONl Upon installation of the compact spare

wheel, the ground clearance is reduced asthe tyre is smaller in diameter than thestandard tyre. When passing over the pro-jections on the road, take care not to dam-age the vehicle’s undercarriage.

For emergencies

6-12 OA0X13E4

6

CAUTIONl Do not install more than one compact

spare wheel at the same time.

To remove the spare tyreE00803500467

1. Lift up the luggage floor board.2. To remove the spare tyre, remove the instal-

lation clamp (A) by turning it anticlockwise.

NOTEl Put the spare wheel under the vehicle body

near the jack. This makes it safer if the jackslips out of position.

To change a tyreE00803200914

1. On vehicles equipped with wheel covers,first remove the covers (refer to “Wheel cov-ers” on page 6-16). Then loosen the wheelnuts a quarter turn with the wheel nutwrench. Do not remove the wheel nuts yet.

2. Place the jack under one of the jackingpoints (A) shown in the illustration. Use thejacking point closest to the tyre you wish tochange.

WARNINGl Set the jack only at the positions shown

here. If the jack is set at a wrong position,it could dent your vehicle or the jackmight fall over and cause personal injury.

l Do not use the jack on a tilted or soft sur-face.Otherwise, the jack might slip and causepersonal injury. Always use the jack on aflat, hard surface. Before setting the jack,make sure there are no sand or pebblesunder the jack base.

NOTEl If you raise the vehicle with a garage jack, re-

fer to “If your vehicle is raised with a garagejack” on page 8-03.

For emergencies

6-13OA0X13E4

6

3. Rotate the jack by hand until the flange por-tion (B) fits in the groove (C) at the top ofthe jack.

4. Insert the bar (D) into the wheel nut wrench(E). Then put the end of the bar into theshaft’s jack end, as shown in the illustration.Slowly rotate the wheel nut wrench until thetyre is raised slightly off the ground surface.

WARNINGl Stop jacking up the vehicle as soon as the

tyre is raised off the ground. It is danger-ous to raise the vehicle any higher.

l Do not get under your vehicle while usingthe jack.

l Do not bump the raised vehicle or leave itsitting on the jack for a long time. Bothare very dangerous.

l Do not use a jack except the one thatcame with your vehicle.

l The jack should not be used for any pur-pose other than to change a tyre.

l No one should be in your vehicle when us-ing the jack.

l Do not start or run the engine while yourvehicle is on the jack.

l Do not turn the raised wheel. The tyresstill on the ground could turn and makeyour vehicle fall off the jack.

5. Remove the wheel nuts with the wheel nutwrench, then take the wheel off.

CAUTIONl Handle the wheel carefully when chang-

ing the tyre, to avoid scratching the wheelsurface.

6. Clean out any mud, etc. on the hub surface(F), hub bolts (G) or in the installation holes(H) in the wheel, and then mount the sparetyre.

WARNINGl Mount the spare wheel with the valve

stem (I) facing outboard. If you cannotsee the valve stem (I), you have installedthe wheel backwards.Operating the vehicle with the sparewheel installed backwards can cause vehi-cle damage and result in an accident.

7. Temporarily tighten the wheel nuts by handuntil the tapered parts of the wheel nuts

For emergencies

6-14 OA0X13E4

6

make light contact with the seats of thewheel holes and the wheel is not loose.

Steel wheel

Aluminium wheel

CAUTIONl Never apply oil to either the wheel bolts

or the nuts, or they will tighten too much.

8. Lower the vehicle slowly by rotating thewheel nut wrench anticlockwise until thetyre touches the ground.

9. Tighten the nuts in the order shown in the il-lustration until each nut has been tightenedto the torque listed here. Tightening torque88 to 108 Nm

CAUTIONl Never use your foot or a pipe extension

for extra force in the wheel nut wrench.If you do so, you will tighten the nut toomuch.

10. Lower the jack all the way and remove it.11. Check your tyre inflation pressure at the next

gasstation. The correct pressures are shownon the door label. See the illustration.

CAUTIONl After changing the tyre and driving the ve-

hicle about 1,000 km (620 miles), retight-en the wheel nuts to make sure that theyhave not come loose.

l If the steering wheel vibrates when driv-ing after changing the tyre, we recom-mend you to have the tyres checked forbalance.

l Do not mix one type of tyre with anotheror use a different size from the one listed.This would cause early wear and poor han-dling.

To store the flat tyre or spare wheelE00803700485

1. To store the flat tyre or spare wheel, fit theinstallation clamp (A) by turning it clockwise.

For emergencies

6-15OA0X13E4

6

NOTEl The flat tyre (normal wheel) cannot be stored

beneath the luggage floor board. Store theflat tyre in the luggage compartment.

2. Have your damaged tyre repaired as soon aspossible.

To store the tools and jackE00803800053

Reverse the removing procedure when storing thejack, bar and wheel nut wrench. Refer to “Tool andjack” on page 6-05.

Wheel covers*E00804700017

To remove1. Wrap the tip of the jack bar with a cloth, in-

sert it into the notch provided in the wheelcover, and use it to lever up the cover a little.

2. With the cover raised a little, pry it off com-pletely using the jack bar. Insert the jack barunder the cover, and move it around the cir-cumference, prying the cover away from thewheel little by little as you move the bararound.

CAUTIONl If you try to use your hands, they may get

hurt by the edge of the wheel cover.

NOTEl The wheel cover is made of plastic; take care

when prying it off.

To install1. Make sure the tabs (A) of the back of the

wheel cover are not broken and correctly fit-ted on the rings (B). If in doubt, do not in-stall the wheel cover and consult aMITSUBISHI MOTORS Authorized ServicePoint.

2. Align the air valve (C) of the tyre with thenotch (D) in the wheel cover.

For emergencies

6-16 OA0X13E4

6

NOTEl Full wheel covers have a symbol mark (E)

provided on the reverse side to show the airvalve location.Before installing the wheel cover to thewheel, make sure that the opening with thesymbol mark is correctly aligned with the airvalve.

3. Push the bottom part (F) of the wheel coverinto the wheel.

4. Gently push both sides (G) of the wheel cov-er and hold them in place with both knees.

5. Gently tap around the circumference of thewheel cover at the top (H), then push thewheel cover into place.

TowingE00801503930

If your vehicle needs to be towedIf towing is necessary, we recommend you to haveit done by your MITSUBISHI MOTORS Author-ized Service Point or a commercial tow truck service. In the following cases, transport the vehicle using atow truck.l The engine runs but the vehicle does not

move or abnormal noise is produced.l Inspection of the vehicle’s underside reveals

that oil or some other fluid is leaking.

If a wheel gets stuck in a ditch, do not try to towthe vehicle. Please contact your MITSUBISHIMOTORS Authorized Service Point or a commer-cial tow truck service for assistance. Only when you cannot receive a towing servicefrom a MITSUBISHI MOTORS Authorized Serv-ice Point or commercial tow truck service, towyour vehicle carefully in accordance with the in-structions given in “Emergency towing” in this part.

The regulations concerning towing may differ fromcountry to country. It is recommended that youobey the regulations of the area where you are driv-ing your vehicle.

Do not tow CVT vehicles with this style.

For emergencies

6-17OA0X13E4

6

Towing the vehicle by a tow truck

CAUTIONl This vehicle must not be towed by a tow

truck using sling lift type equipment(Type A) as illustrated. Using a sling liftwill damage the bumper and front end.

l Do not tow CVT vehicles with the drivingwheels on the ground (Type B) as illustra-ted. If the vehicle is towed like this, the au-tomatic transmission (CVT) fluid maynot reach all parts of the transmission,thus damaging it.If you tow CVT vehicles, use Type C, Dor E equipment.

l If the transmission is malfunctioning ordamaged, transport the vehicle with thedriving wheels on a carriage (Type C, Dor E) as illustrated.

CAUTIONl If the vehicle is towed with the ignition

switch in the “ON” position or the opera-tion mode in ON and only the frontwheels or only the rear wheels raised offthe ground (Type B or C), the Active Sta-bility Control (ASC) may operate, result-ing in an accident. When towing the vehi-cle with the rear wheels raised, turn the ig-nition switch to the “ACC” position orput the operation mode in ACC. Whentowing the vehicle with the front wheelsraised, keep the ignition switch or the op-eration mode as follows.[Except vehicles equipped with keyless op-eration system]The ignition switch is in the “LOCK” or“ACC” position.[Vehicles equipped with keyless operationsystem]The operation mode is in OFF or ACC.

Towing with rear wheels off the ground (Type B -M/T vehicles only)Place the gearshift lever in the “Neutral” position.Turn the ignition switch to the “ACC” position orput the operation mode in ACC and secure the steer-ing wheel in a straightahead position with a rope ortie-down strap. Never place the ignition switch inthe “LOCK” position or put the operation mode inOFF when towing.

Towing with front wheels off the ground (Type C)Release the parking brake.Place the gearshift lever in the “Neutral” position(M/T) or the selector lever in the “N” (NEUTRAL)position (CVT).

Emergency towingIf towing service is not available in an emergency,your vehicle may be temporarily towed by a ropesecured to the towing hook.In case of your vehicle is to be towed by anothervehicle, pay careful attention to the following points.

If your vehicle is to be towed forward by anothervehicle

1. Take out the towing hook, wheel nut wrenchand jack bar.(Refer to “Tools” on page 6-05.)

2. Cover the tip of the jack bar with a cloth,then use it to remove the cover (A) that is lo-cated on the front bumper.

For emergencies

6-18 OA0X13E4

6

3. Use the wheel nut wrench (B) to securelymount the towing hook (C).

4. Secure the tow rope to the front towing hook.

CAUTIONl Do not tow the vehicle with the rope at an

excessive diagonal angle.

NOTEl To avoid deforming or otherwise damaging

the vehicle body when hooking the rope ontothe towing hook, observe the following in-structions:

• Mount the towing hook securely.• Do not attach the rope to any part of the

vehicle other than the towing hook.• Ensure that the tow rope is taut when the

towing vehicle moves away.

5. Keep the engine running.If the engine is not running, perform the fol-lowing operation to unlock the steering wheel.

[Except for vehicles equipped with keylessoperation system]On vehicles with M/T, turn the ignition keyto the “ACC” or “ON” position.On vehicles with CVT, turn the ignition keyto the “ON” position.[For vehicles with the keyless operation sys-tem]On vehicles with M/T, put the operationmode in ACC or ON.On vehicles with CVT, put the operationmode in ON.


Go (AS&G) system, press the “Auto Stop &Go (AS&G) OFF” switch to deactivate theAuto Stop & Go (AS&G) system before stop-ping the vehicle.Refer to “To deactivate” on page 4-18.

WARNINGl When the engine is not running, the

brake booster and power steering systemdo not operate. This means higher brakedepression force and higher steering ef-fort are required. Therefore, vehicle oper-ation is more difficult than usual.

CAUTIONl Do not leave the key in the “LOCK” posi-

tion or the operation mode in OFF. Thesteering wheel will lock, causing loss ofcontrol.

6. Place the gearshift lever in the “Neutral” po-sition (M/T) or the selector lever in the “N”(NEUTRAL) position (CVT).

7. Turn on the hazard warning lamps if requiredby law. (Follow the local driving laws andregulations.)

8. During towing make sure that close contactis maintained between the drivers of both ve-hicles, and that the vehicles travel at lowspeed.

WARNINGl Avoid sudden braking, sudden accelera-

tion and sharp turning; such operationcould cause damage to the towing hooksor the tow rope.People in the vicinity could be injured asa result.

l When towing or being towed down a longslope, the brakes may overheat reducingthe effectiveness. In this situation, haveyour vehicle transported by a tow truck.

CAUTIONl The person in the vehicle being towed

must pay attention to the brake lamps ofthe towing vehicle and make sure therope never becomes slack.

For emergencies

6-19OA0X13E4

6

CAUTIONl When the vehicle with CVT is to be tow-

ed by another vehicle with the all wheelson the ground, make sure that the towingspeed and distance given below are neverexceeded, causing damage to the transmis-sion. Towing speed: 40 km/h (25 mph)Towing distance: 40 km (25 miles) For the towing speed and the towing dis-tance, follow the local driving laws andregulations.

9. When finished towing, remove the towinghook, and stow it in the specified location.Refer to “Tools” on page 6-05.When installing the cover, align the hookwith the cut out area on the vehicle, and firm-ly insert.

If your vehicle is to be towed rearward by anothervehicleIf your vehicle is stuck in sand, mad, snow, etc.,use the rear towing hook (A) as shown in the illus-tration.

Secure the tow rope to the rear towing hook.

WARNINGl When towing your vehicle out of a stuck

position, be sure that the area around thevehicle is clear of people and physical ob-jects.

NOTEl Using nay part other than the designated tow-

ing hooks (A) could result in damage to thevehicle body.

Towing another vehicleYour vehicle cannot be used to tow another vehicle.

Operation under adverse drivingconditions

E00801702818

On a flooded roadl Avoid flooded roads. Water could enter the

brake discs, resulting in temporarily ineffec-tive brakes. In such cases, lightly depress thebrake pedal to see if the brakes operate prop-erly. If they do not, lightly depress the pedalseveral times while driving in order to drythe brake pads.

l When driving in rain or on a road with manypuddles a layer of water may form betweenthe tyres and the road surface.This reduces a tyre’s frictional resistance onthe road, resulting in loss of steering stabilityand braking capability. To cope with this, observe the following items:

(a) Drive your vehicle at slow speed. (b) Do not drive on worn tyres. (c) Always maintain the specified

tyre inflation pressures.

On a snow-covered or frozen roadl When driving on a snow-covered or frozen

road, it is recommended that you use snowtyres or snow traction device (tyre chains).Refer to the “Snow tyres” and “Snow trac-tion device (tyre chains)” sections.

l Avoid high-speed operation, sudden acceler-ation, abrupt brake application and sharp cor-nering.

For emergencies

6-20 OA0X13E4

6

l Depressing the brake pedal during travel onsnowy or icy roads may cause tyre slippageand skidding. When traction between thetyres and the road is reduced the wheels mayskid and the vehicle cannot readily bebrought to a stop by conventional brakingtechniques. Braking will differ, dependingupon whether you have anti-lock brake sys-tem (ABS). As your vehicle is equipped withABS, brake by pressing the brake pedal hard,and keeping it pressed.

l Allow extra distance between your vehicleand the vehicle in front of you, and avoid sud-den braking.

l Accumulation of ice on the braking systemcan cause the wheels to lock. Pull away froma standstill slowly after confirming safetyaround the vehicle.

CAUTIONl Do not press the accelerator pedal rapid-

ly. If the wheels break free of the ice, thevehicle could suddenly start moving andpossibly cause an accident.

On a bumpy or rutted roadDrive as slow as possible when driving on bumpyor rutted roads.

CAUTIONl The impact on tyres and/or wheels when

driving on a bumpy or rutted road candamage the tyre and/or wheel.

CAUTIONl The vehicle’s body, bumper, muffler and

other parts may be damaged if the vehi-cle is:

• driven over a step (for example, at theentrance or exit of a parking lot);

• parked too closely against a kerb orparking block, or by the side of a roadwith kerbstones;

• driven on a steep slope;

For emergencies

6-21OA0X13E4

6

OA0X13E4

Vehicle care precautions...............................................................7-02Cleaning the interior of your vehicle............................................7-02Cleaning the exterior of your vehicle...........................................7-03

Vehicle care

OA0X13E4

7

Vehicle care precautionsE00900100984

In order to maintain the value of your vehicle, it isnecessary to perform regular maintenance using theproper procedures. Always maintain your vehiclein compliance with environmental pollution controlregulations. Carefully select the materials used forwashing, etc., to be sure that they do not contain cor-rosives. If in doubt, we recommend you to consulta specialist for selection of these materials.

CAUTIONl Cleaning products can be dangerous. Al-

ways follow the instructions of the clean-ing product supplier.

l To avoid damage, never use the followingto clean your vehicle:

• Petrol• Paint Thinner• Benzine• Kerosene• Turpentine• Naphtha• Lacquer Thinner• Carbon Tetrachloride• Nail Polish Remover• Acetone

Cleaning the interior of yourvehicle

E00900200611

After cleaning the interior of your vehicle with wa-ter, cleaner or similar, wipe and dry in a shady, well-ventilated area.

NOTEl To clean the inside of the tailgate window, al-

ways use a soft cloth and wipe the windowglass along the demister heater element so asnot to cause damage.

CAUTIONl Do not use organic substances (solvents,

benzine, kerosene, alcohol, petrol, etc.) oralkaline or acidic solutions.These chemicals can cause discolouring,staining or cracking of the surface.If you use cleaners or polishing agents,make sure their ingredients do not in-clude the substances mentioned above.

Plastic, vinyl leather, fabric andflocked parts

E00900300436

1. Lightly wipe these off with a soft clothsoaked in a mild soap and water solution.

2. Dip cloth in fresh water and wring out well.Using this cloth, wipe off the detergent thor-oughly.

NOTEl Do not use cleaners, conditioners, and protec-

tants containing silicons or wax.Such products, when applied to the instru-ment panels or other parts, may cause reflec-tions on the windscreen and obscure vision.Also, if such products get on the switches ofthe electrical accessories, it may lead to fail-ure of these accessories.

l The surface of gloss center panel may bescratched if it is rubbed hard by a brush, syn-thetic fiber or hard cloth.

UpholsteryE00900500193

1. To maintain the value of your new vehicle,handle the upholstery carefully and keep theinterior clean.Use a vacuum cleaner and brush to clean theseats. If stained, vinyl and synthetic leathershould be cleaned with an appropriate clean-er, Cloth fabrics can be cleaned with eitherupholstery cleaner or a mild soap and watersolution.

2. Clean the carpeting with a vacuum cleanerand remove any stains with carpet cleaner.Oil and grease can be removed by lightly dab-bing with a clean colourfast cloth and stain re-mover.

Genuine leather*E00900600963

1. To clean, lightly wipe the leather with a softcloth soaked in a mild soap and water solution.

2. Dip cloth in fresh water and wring it outwell. Using this cloth, wipe off the detergentthoroughly.

3. Apply leather protecting agent to the genuineleather surface.

Vehicle care

7-02 OA0X13E4

7

NOTEl If genuine leather is wet with water or is wash-

ed in water, wipe off water as quickly as pos-sible with a dry, soft cloth. If left damp, mil-dew may grow.

l Organic solvents such as benzine, kerosene,alcohol and petrol, acid or alkaline solventsmay discolour the genuine leather surface.Be sure to use neutral detergents.

l Remove dirty patches or oil substances quick-ly as they can stain genuine leather.

l The genuine leather surface may harden andshrink if it is exposed to direct sun for longhours. When your vehicle is parked, place itin the shade as much as possible.

Cleaning the exterior of yourvehicle

E00900700137

If the following is left on your vehicle, it maycause corrosion, discolouration and stains, washthe vehicle as soon as possible.l Seawater, road deicing products.l Soot and dust, iron powder from factories,

chemical substance (acids, alkalis, coal-tar,etc.).

l Droppings from birds, carcasses of insects,tree sap, etc.

WashingE00900902537

Chemicals contained in the dirt and dust picked upfrom the road surface can damage the paint coatand body of your vehicle if left in prolonged contact.Frequent washing and waxing is the best way to pro-tect your vehicle from this damage. This will alsobe effective in protecting it from environmental el-ements such as rain, snow, salt air, etc.Do not wash the vehicle in direct sunlight. Park thevehicle in the shade and spray it with water to re-move dust. Next, using an ample amount of cleanwater and a car washing brush or sponge, wash thevehicle from top to bottom.Use a mild car washing soap if necessary. Rinsethoroughly and wipe dry with a soft cloth. Afterwashing the vehicle, carefully clean the joints andflanges of the doors, bonnet, etc., where dirt is like-ly to remain.

CAUTIONl When washing the under side of your ve-

hicle or wheel, be careful not to injureyour hands.

l If your vehicle has rain sensor wipers,place the wiper switch lever in the “OFF”position to deactivate the rain sensor be-fore washing the vehicle. Otherwise, thewipers will operate in the presence of wa-ter spray on the windscreen and may getdamaged as a result.

l Refrain from excessively using a car washas its brushes may scratch the paint sur-face, causing it to lose its gloss.Scratches will be especially visible ondarker coloured vehicles.

l Never spray or splash water on the electri-cal components in the engine compart-ment, as this may adversely affect enginestarting.Exercise caution also when washing theunderbody; be careful not to spray waterinto the engine compartment.

l Some types of hot water washing equip-ment apply high pressure and heat to thevehicle. They may cause heat distortionand damage to the vehicle resin parts andmay result in flooding of the vehicle inte-rior. Therefore;

• Maintain a distance of approx. 70 cmor more between the vehicle body andthe washing nozzle.

• When washing around the door glass,hold the nozzle at a distance of morethan 70 cm and at right angles to theglass surface.

Vehicle care

7-03OA0X13E4

7

CAUTIONl After washing the vehicle, drive the vehi-

cle slowly while lightly depressing thebrake pedal several times in order to dryout the brakes.Leaving the brakes wet could result in re-duced braking performance. Also, thereis a possibility that they could freeze upor become inoperative due to rust, render-ing the vehicle unable to move.

l When using an automatic car wash, payattention to the following items, referringto the operation manual or consulting acar wash operator. If the following proce-dure is not followed, it could result in dam-age to your vehicle.

• The outside mirrors are retracted.• The antenna is removed.• The wiper arm assembly is taped.• If your vehicle is equipped with a rear

spoiler, consult a car wash operator be-fore using the car wash.

• If your vehicle has rain sensor wipers,place the wiper switch lever in the“OFF” position to deactivate the rainsensor.

During cold weatherSalt and other chemicals spread on the roads insome areas in winter can have a harmful effect onthe vehicle body. You should therefore wash the ve-hicle as often as possible in accordance with ourcare-instructions. It is recommended to have a pres-ervative applied and the underfloor protectionchecked before and after the cold weather season.After washing your vehicle, wipe off all water-drops from the rubber parts around the doors to pre-vent the doors from freezing.

NOTEl To prevent freezing of the weatherstripping

on the doors, bonnet, etc., they should be trea-ted with silicone spray.

WaxingE00901000906

Waxing the vehicle will help prevent the adherenceof dust and road chemicals to the paintwork. Applya wax solution after washing the vehicle, or at leastonce every three months to assist displacing of water.Do not wax your vehicle in direct sunlight. Youshould wax after the surfaces have cooled.For information on how to use wax refer to the in-struction manual of the wax.

CAUTIONl Waxes containing high abrasive com-

pounds should not be used.

PolishingE00901100082

The vehicle should only be polished if the paint-work has become stained or lost its lustre. Matt-fin-ish parts and plastic bumpers must not be polished,polishing these parts will stain them or damagetheir finish.

Cleaning plastic partsE00901300794

Use a sponge or chamois leather.If a car wax adheres on a grey or black rough sur-face of the bumper, moulding or lamps, the surfacebecomes white. In such a case, wipe it off usinglukewarm water and soft cloth or chamois leather.

CAUTIONl Do not use a scrubbing brush or other

hard tools as they may damage the plasticpart surface.

l Do not bring the plastic parts into contactwith petrol, light oil, brake fluids, engineoils, greases, paint thinners, and sulphu-ric acid (battery electrolyte) which maycrack, stain or discolour the plastic parts.If they touch the plastic parts wipe themoff with soft cloth, chamois or the likeand an aqueous solution of neutral deter-gent then immediately rinse the affectedparts with water.

Chrome partsE00901400128

In order to prevent spots and corrosion of chromeparts, wash with water, dry thoroughly, and apply aspecial protective coating. This should be donemore frequently in winter.

Aluminium wheels*E00901500565

1. Remove dirt using a sponge while sprinklingwater on the wheel.

2. Use neutral detergent on any dirt that cannotbe removed easily with water.Rinse off the neutral detergent after washingthe wheel.

3. Dry the vehicle thoroughly using a chamoisleather or a soft cloth.

Vehicle care

7-04 OA0X13E4

7

CAUTIONl Do not use a brush or other hard imple-

ment on the wheels.Doing so could scratch the wheels.

l Do not use any cleaner that contains anabrasive substance or is acidic or alka-line. Doing so could cause the coating onthe wheels to peel or become discolouredor stained.

l Do not directly apply hot water using asteam cleaner or by any other means.

l Contact with seawater and road deicercan cause corrosion. Rinse off such sub-stances as soon as possible.

Window glassE00901600120

The window glass can normally be cleaned usingonly a sponge and water.Glass cleaner can be used to remove oil, grease,dead insects, etc. After washing the glass, wipe drywith a clean, dry, soft cloth. Never use the samecloth to wipe the window glass as would be used towipe the paintwork; wax from the painted surfacescould adhere to the glass and reduce its transparen-cy and visibility.

NOTEl To clean the inside of the tailgate window, al-

ways use a soft cloth and wipe the windowglass along the demister heater element so asnot to cause damage.

Wiper bladesE00901700088

Use a soft cloth and glass cleaner to remove grease,dead insects, etc., from the wiper blades. Replacethe wiper blades when they no longer wipe proper-ly. (Refer to page 8-13.)

Engine compartmentE00902100379

Clean the engine compartment at the beginning andend of winter. Pay particular attention to flanges,crevices and peripheral parts where dust containingroad chemicals and other corrosive materials mightcollect.If salt and other chemicals are used on the roads inyour area, clean the engine compartment at least ev-ery three months.Never spray or splash water on the electrical com-ponents in the engine compartment, as this maycause damage.Do not bring the nearby parts, the plastic parts andso on into contact with sulphuric acid (battery elec-trolyte) which may crack, stain or discolour them.If they are in contact, wipe off with soft cloth, cha-mois or the like and an aqueous solution of neutraldetergent then immediately rinse the affected partswith plenty of water.

Vehicle care

7-05OA0X13E4

7

OA0X13E4

Service precautions.......................................................................8-02Catalytic converter........................................................................8-03Bonnet...........................................................................................8-04Engine oil......................................................................................8-05Engine coolant..............................................................................8-06Washer fluid.................................................................................8-07Brake fluid....................................................................................8-07Battery..........................................................................................8-08Tyres.............................................................................................8-09Wiper blade rubber replacement...................................................8-13General maintenance....................................................................8-14Fusible links..................................................................................8-15Fuses.............................................................................................8-15Replacement of lamp bulbs..........................................................8-19Masking the headlamps................................................................8-25

Maintenance

OA0X13E4

8

Service precautionsE01000101035

Adequate care of your vehicle at regular intervalsserves to preserve the value and appearance as longas possible.Maintenance items as described in this owner’s man-ual can be performed by the owner.We recommend you to have the periodic inspectionand maintenance performed by a MITSUBISHIMOTORS Authorized Service Point or another spe-cialist.In the event a malfunction or a problem is discov-ered, we recommend you to have it checked and re-paired. This section contains information on inspec-tion maintenance procedures that you can do your-self. Follow the instructions and cautions for eachof the various procedures.

WARNINGl When checking or servicing the inside of

the engine compartment, make sure theengine is switched off and has had achance to cool down.

l If it is necessary to do work in the enginecompartment with the engine running, beespecially careful that your clothing, hair,etc., does not become caught by the fan,drive belts, or other moving parts.

l The fan may turn on automatically evenif the engine is not running. Turn the igni-tion switch to the “LOCK” position orput the operation mode in OFF to be safewhile you work in the engine compart-ment.

WARNINGl Do not smoke, cause sparks or allow open

flames around fuel or battery. The fumesare flammable.

l Be extremely cautious when workingaround the battery. It contains poisonousand corrosive sulphuric acid.

l Do not get under your vehicle with justthe body jack supporting it. Always useautomotive jack stands.

l Improper handling of components andmaterials used in the vehicle can endan-ger your personal safety. We recommendyou to consult a specialist for necessary in-formation.

Check items of engine compartment are located asshown in the figure below.

1. Brake fluid reservoir (RHD)2. Engine oil level gauge3. Battery4. Brake fluid reservoir (LHD)5. Washer fluid reservoir6. Engine oil cap7. Engine coolant reservoir

Maintenance

8-02 OA0X13E4

8

If your vehicle is raised with a garagejack

E01011500032

Only use the appointed position as shown in the il-lustration.

Never use the rear suspensions as a jacking point.


WARNINGl Set the jack only at the positions shown

here. If the jack is set at a wrong position,it could damage your vehicle or the jackmight fall over and cause personal injury.

WARNINGl Do not use the jack on a tilted or soft sur-

face.Otherwise, the jack might slip and causepersonal injury. Always use the jack on aflat, hard surface. Before setting the jack,make sure there are no sand or pebblesunder the jack base.

Catalytic converterE01000200765

The exhaust gas scavenging devices used with thecatalytic converter are extremely efficient for the re-duction of noxious gases. The catalytic converter isinstalled in the exhaust system.It is important to keep the engine properly tuned toensure proper catalyst operation and prevent possi-ble catalyst damage.

WARNINGl As with any vehicle, do not park or oper-

ate this vehicle in areas where combusti-ble materials such as dry grass or leavescan come in contact with a hot exhaustsince a fire could occur.

l Paint should not be applied to the catalyt-ic converter.

NOTEl Use fuel of the type recommended in “Fuel

selection” on page 02.

Maintenance

8-03OA0X13E4

8

BonnetE01000302858

To open1. Pull the release lever towards you to unlock

the bonnet.

2. Raise the bonnet while pressing the safetylock.

NOTEl Only open the bonnet when the wipers are in

the parked position. Failure to do so maycause damage to the bonnet, wiper arms orwindscreen.

3. Support the bonnet by inserting the supportbar in its slot.

CAUTIONl Note that the support bar may disengage

the bonnet if the open bonnet is lifted bya strong wind.

l After inserting the support bar into theslot, make sure the bar supports the bon-net securely from falling down on to yourhead or body.

To close1. Unlatch the support bar and clip it in its holder.2. Slowly lower the bonnet to a position about

20 cm above the closed position, then let itdrop.

3. Make sure the bonnet is securely locked bysoftly lifting the centre of the bonnet.

CAUTIONl Be careful that hands or fingers are not

trapped when closing the bonnet.l Before driving, make sure that the bon-

net is securely locked. An incompletelylocked bonnet can suddenly open whiledriving. This can be extremely dangerous.

NOTEl If this does not close the bonnet, release it

from a slightly higher position.l Do not press down the bonnet hard with a

hand as it may damage the bonnet.

Maintenance

8-04 OA0X13E4

8

Engine oilE01000403058

To check and refill engine oil

MAX. MIN.

The engine oil used has a significant effect on theengine’s performance, service life and startability.Be sure to use oil of the recommended quality andappropriate viscosity.All engines consume a certain amount of oil duringnormal operation. Therefore, it is important tocheck the oil level at regular intervals or before start-ing a long trip.

1. Park the car on a horizontal surface.2. Switch off the engine.3. Wait a few minutes.4. Remove the dipstick and wipe it with a clean

cloth.5. Reinsert the dipstick as far as it goes.6. Remove the dipstick and read the oil level,

which should always be within the range in-dicated.

7. If the oil level is below the specified limit, re-move the cap located on the cylinder headcover and add enough oil to raise the level towithin the specified range. Do not overfill toavoid engine damage. Be sure to use the speci-fied engine oil and do not mix various typesof oil.

8. After adding oil, close the cap securely.9. Confirm the oil level by repeating step 4 to 6.

NOTEl The engine oil will deteriorate rapidly if the

vehicle is subjected to severe conditions, re-quiring earlier oil replacement.Please refer to the maintenance schedule.

l For handling of used engine oils, refer topage 05.

Selection of engine oil

l Select engine oil of the proper SAE viscositynumber according to the atmospheric temper-ature.SAE 0W-20, 0W-30, 5W-30 and 5W-40 en-gine oils can only be used if they meetACEA A3/B3, A3/B4 or A5/B5 and API SM(or higher) specifications.

l Use engine oil conforming to the followingclassification:

• API classification: “For service SM” orhigher

• ILSAC certificated oil• ACEA classification:

“For service A1/B1, A3/B3, A3/B4 orA5/B5”

NOTEl Use of additives is not recommended since

they may reduce the effectiveness of addi-tives already included in the engine oil. Itmay result in failure of the mechanical assem-bly.

Maintenance

8-05OA0X13E4

8

Engine coolantE01000502108

To check the coolant levelA translucent coolant reservoir (A) is located in theengine compartment.The coolant level in this tank should be kept be-tween the “L” (LOW) and “F” (FULL) markswhen measured while the engine is cold.

FULL

LOW

To add coolantThe cooling system is a closed system and normal-ly the loss of coolant should be very slight. A no-ticeable drop in the coolant level could indicate leak-age. If this occurs, we recommend you to have thesystem checked as soon as possible.If the level should drop below the “L” (LOW) levelon the reservoir, open the lid and add coolant.Also, if the reservoir is completely empty, removethe radiator cap (B) and add coolant until the levelreaches the filler neck.

WARNINGl Do not open the radiator cap while the en-

gine is hot. The coolant system is underpressure and any hot coolant escapingcould cause severe burns.

Anti-freezeThe engine coolant contains an ethylene glycol anti-corrosion agent. Some parts of the engine are castaluminium alloy, and periodic changing of the en-gine coolant is necessary to prevent corrosion ofthese parts. Use “MITSUBISHI MOTORS GENUINE SUPERLONG LIFE COOLANT PREMIUM” or equiva-lent*.*: similar high quality ethylene glycol based non-silicate, non-amine, non-nitrate and non-borate cool-ant with long life hybrid organic acid technologyMITSUBISHI MOTORS GENUINE Coolant hasexcellent protection against corrosion and rust for-mation of all metals including aluminium and canavoid blockages in the radiator, heater, cylinderhead, engine block, etc.Because of the necessity of this anti-corrosionagent, the coolant must not be replaced with plainwater even in summer. The required concentrationof anti-freeze differs depending on the expected am-bient temperature. Above -35 °C: 50 % concentration of anti-freezeBelow -35 °C: 60 % concentration of anti-freeze

CAUTIONl Do not use alcohol or methanol anti-

freeze or any engine coolants mixed withalcohol or methanol anti-freeze. The useof an improper anti-freeze can cause cor-rosion of the aluminium components.

l Do not use water to adjust the concentra-tion of coolant.

l Concentrations exceeding 60 % will re-sult in a reduction of both the anti-freezeand cooling performance thus adverselyaffecting the engine.

l Do not top up with water only.

During cold weatherThe concentration should be checked before thestart of cold weather and anti-freeze added to thesystem if necessary to prevent damage to engineand radiator due to freezing.

Maintenance

8-06 OA0X13E4

8

Washer fluidE01000700920

Open the washer fluid reservoir cap and check thelevel of washer fluid.If the level is low, replenish the container with wash-er fluid.

NOTEl The washer fluid container serves the wind-

screen and rear window.

During cold weatherTo ensure proper operation of the washers at lowtemperatures, use a fluid containing an anti-freez-ing agent.

Brake fluidE01000900922

To check the fluid levelThe fluid level must be between the “MAX” and“MIN” marks on the reservoir.

LHD

RHD

The fluid level is monitored by a float. When thefluid level falls below the “MIN” mark, the brakefluid warning lamp lights up.The fluid level falls slightly with wear of the brakepads, but this does not indicate any abnormality.

If the fluid level falls markedly in a short length oftime, it indicates leaks from the brake system.If this occurs, we recommend you to have the vehi-cle checked.

Fluid typeUse brake fluid conforming to DOT3 or DOT4from a sealed container. The brake fluid is hygro-scopic. Too much moisture in the brake fluid willadversely affect the brake system, reducing the per-formance.

CAUTIONl Take care in handling brake fluid as it is

harmful to the eyes, may irritate yourskin and also damage painted surfaces.

l Use only the specified brake fluid.Do not mix or add different brands ofbrake fluid to prevent chemical reactions.Do not let any petroleum-based fluidtouch, mix with, or get into the brake fluid.This will damage the seals.

l Keep the reservoir tank cap closed to pre-vent the brake fluid from deteriorating ex-cept maintenance.

l Clean the filler cap before removing andclose the cap securely after maintenance.

Maintenance

8-07OA0X13E4

8

BatteryE01001202274

The condition of the battery is very important forquick starting of the engine and proper functioningof the vehicle’s electrical system. Regular inspec-tion and care are especially important in cold weath-er.

Checking battery electrolyte level

The electrolyte level must be between the specifiedlimit on the outside of the battery. Replenish withdistilled water as necessary.The inside of the battery is divided into several com-partments; remove the cap from each compartmentand fill to the upper mark. Do not top up beyondthe upper mark because spillage during drivingcould cause damage.Check the electrolyte level at least once every 4weeks, depending on the operating conditions.If the battery is not used, it will discharge by itselfwith time. Check it once every 4 weeks and chargewith low current as necessary.

During cold weatherE01010900084

The capacity of the battery is reduced at low tem-peratures. This is an inevitable result of its chemi-cal and physical properties.This is why a very cold battery, particularly onethat is not fully charged, will only deliver a fractionof the starter current which is normally available.We recommended you to have the battery checkedbefore the start of cold weather and, if necessary,have it charged or replaced.This does not only ensure reliable starting, but a bat-tery which is kept fully charged also has a longer life.

Disconnection and connectionE01011000196

To disconnect the battery cable, stop the engine,first disconnect the negative (-) terminal and thenthe positive (+) terminal. When connecting the bat-tery, first connect the positive (+) terminal and thenthe negative (-) terminal.

NOTEl Open the terminal cover (A) before discon-

necting or connecting the positive (+) termi-nal of the battery.

l Loosen the nut (B), and then disconnect thebattery cable from the positive (+) terminal.

WARNINGl Keep sparks, cigarettes, and flames away

from the battery because the batterycould explode.

l The battery electrolyte is extremely caus-tic. Do not allow it to come in contactwith your eyes, skin, clothing, or the pain-ted surfaces of the vehicle.Spilt electrolyte should be flushed imme-diately with ample amounts of water.Irritation to eyes or skin from contactwith electrolyte requires immediate medi-cal attention.

l Ventilate when charging or using the bat-tery in an enclosed space.

CAUTIONl Keep it out of reach of children.l Never disconnect the battery when the ig-

nition switch is in the “ON” position. Do-ing so could damage electric components.

Maintenance

8-08 OA0X13E4

8

CAUTIONl Never short-circuit the battery. This

could cause it to overheat and be damaged.l If the battery is to be quick-charged, first

disconnect the battery cables.l In order to prevent a short circuit, be

sure to disconnect the negative (-) termi-nal first.

l Always wear protective eye goggles whenworking near the battery.

l Do not bring the nearby parts, the plasticparts and so on into contact with sulphu-ric acid (battery electrolyte) which maycrack, stain or discolour them.If they are in contact, wipe off with softcloth, chamois or the like and an aqueoussolution of neutral detergent then imme-diately rinse the affected parts with plen-ty of water.

NOTEl Keep the terminals clean. After the battery is

connected, apply terminal protection grease.To clean the terminals, use lukewarm water.

l Check to see if the battery is securely instal-led and cannot be moved during travel. Alsocheck each terminal for tightness.

l When the vehicle is to be left unused for along period of time, remove the battery andstore it in a place where the battery fluid willnot freeze. The battery should be stored onlyin a fully charged condition.

TyresE01001300301

WARNINGl Driving with tyres that are worn, dam-

aged or improperly inflated can lead to aloss of control or blow out of the tyreswhich can result in a collision with seri-ous or fatal injury.

Maintenance

8-09OA0X13E4

8

Tyre inflation pressuresE01001402843

Item Tyre size Front Rear

Normal tyre 165/65R14 79S 2.7 bar (39 psi) [270 kPa]

175/55R15 77V 2.2 bar (32 psi) [220 kPa],2.4 bar (35 psi) [240 kPa]*

Compact spare tyre T115/70D14 88M 4.2 bar (60 psi) [420 kPa]*: Above 160 km/h (99 mph)

Check the tyre inflation pressure of all the tyres while they are cold: if insufficient or excessive, adjust to the specified value.After the tyre inflation pressure has been adjusted, check the tyres for damage and air leaks. Be sure to put caps on the valves.

Maintenance

8-10 OA0X13E4

8

Wheel conditionE01001800957

1- Location of the tread wear indicator2- Tread wear indicator

Check the tyres for cuts, cracks and other damage.Replace the tyres if there are deep cuts or cracks.Also check each tyre for pieces of metal or pebbles.The use of worn tyres can be very dangerous be-cause of the greater chance of skidding or hydro-planing. The tread depth of the tyres must exceed1.6 mm in order for the tyres to meet the minimumrequirement for use.Tread wear indicators will appear on the surface ofthe tyre as the tyre wears, thereby indicating thatthe tyre no longer meets the minimum requirementfor use. When these wear indicators appear, thetyres must be replaced with new ones.

Replacing tyres and wheelsE01007200490

CAUTIONl Avoid using different size tyres from the

one listed and the combined use of differ-ent types of tyres, as this can affect driv-ing safety.Refer to “Tyres and wheels” on page9-10.

l Even if a wheel has the same rim size andoffset as the specified type of wheel, itsshape may prevent it from being fitted cor-rectly. We recommend you to consult aspecialist before using wheels that youhave.

Tyre rotationE01001901489

Tyre wear varies with vehicle conditions, road sur-face conditions and individual driver’s driving hab-its. To equalize the wear and help extend tyre life,it is recommended to rotate the tyres immediatelyafter discovery of abnormal wear, or whenever thewear difference between the front and rear tyres isrecognizable.

When rotating tyres, check for uneven wear anddamage. Abnormal wear is usually caused by incor-rect tyre pressure, improper wheel alignment, outof balance wheel, or severe braking. We recom-mend you to have it checked to determine thecause of irregular tread wear.

Tyres that do not have arrows showing rotation direction

Tyres that have arrows showing rotation direction

Front

Front

CAUTIONl A compact spare tyre can be fitted tempo-

rarily in place of a tyre that has been re-moved during the tyre rotation. However,it must not be included in the regular tyrerotation sequence.

Maintenance

8-11OA0X13E4

8

CAUTIONl If the tyres have arrows (A) indicating

the correct direction of rotation, swap thefront and rear wheels on the left handside of the vehicle and the front and rearwheels on the right hand side of the vehi-cle separately. Keep each tyre on its origi-nal side of the vehicle. When fitting thetyres, make sure the arrows point in thedirection in which the wheels will turnwhen the vehicle moves forward. Anytyre whose arrow points in the wrong di-rection will not perform to its full poten-tial.

Front

CAUTIONl Avoid the combined use of different types

of tyres. Using different types of tyres canaffect vehicle performance and safety.

Snow tyresE01002000839

The use of snow tyres is recommended for drivingon snow and ice. To preserve driving stability,mount snow tyres of the same size and tread pat-tern on all 4 wheels.A snow tyres that is worn down more than 50 % isno longer appropriate to use.Snow tyres which do not meet specifications mustnot be used.

CAUTIONl Observe permissible maximum speed for

your snow tyres and the legal speed limit.

NOTEl The laws and regulations concerning snow

tyres (driving speed, required use, type, etc.)vary. Find out and follow the laws and regu-lations in the area you intend to drive.

l If flange nuts are used on your vehicle,change to tapered nuts when steel wheels areused.

Snow traction device (tyre chains)E01002101941

If snow traction device (tyre chains) have to beused, ensure that they are fitted only on the drivewheels (front) in accordance with the manufactur-er’s instructions.Use only snow traction device (tyre chains) whichare designed for use with the tyres mounted on thevehicle: use of the incorrect size or type of snowtraction device (tyre chains) could result in damageto the vehicle body.

Contact a MITSUBISHI MOTORS AuthorizedService Point before putting on snow traction de-vice (tyre chains). The max. snow traction device(tyre chains) height is as follows.

Tyre size Wheel size Max. snow trac-tion device

(tyre chains)height [mm]

165/65R14 79S 14 x 4 1/2 J 9 mm

175/55R15 77V 15 x 5 J

When driving with snow traction device (tyrechains) on the tyres, do not drive faster than50 km/h (30 mph). When you reach roads that arenot covered in snow, immediately remove the snowtraction device (tyre chains).

CAUTIONl Choose a clear straight stretch of road

where you can pull off and still be seenwhile you are fitting the snow traction de-vice (tyre chains).

l Do not fit snow traction device (tyrechains) before you need them. This willwear out your tyres and the road surface.

l After driving around 100-300 meters,stop and retighten the snow traction de-vice (tyre chains).

l Drive carefully and do not exceed50 km/h (30 mph). Remember that pre-venting accidents is not the purpose ofsnow traction device (tyre chains).

Maintenance

8-12 OA0X13E4

8

CAUTIONl When snow traction device (tyre chains)

are installed, take care that they do notdamage the disc wheel or body.

l Do not install a snow traction device (tyrechains) on an emergency wheel which iscompact in size. If one of the front wheelshas punctured, replace it with one of therear wheels and install the compact sparewheel in that place before fitting a snowtraction device (tyre chains).

l An aluminium wheel can be damaged bya snow traction device (tyre chains) whiledriving. When fitting a snow traction de-vice (tyre chains) on an aluminium wheel,take care that any part of the snow trac-tion device (tyre chains) and fitting can-not be brought into contact with the wheel.

l Remove the wheel covers before instal-ling a snow traction device (tyre chains),otherwise they may be damaged by thesnow traction device (tyre chains). (Seepage 6-16.)

l When installing or removing a snow trac-tion device (tyre chains), take care thathands and other parts of your body arenot injured by the sharp edges of the vehi-cle body.

NOTEl The laws and regulations concerning the use

of snow traction device (tyre chains) vary. Al-ways follow local laws and regulations.In most countries, it is prohibited by the lawto use of snow traction device (tyre chains)on roads without snow.

Wiper blade rubber replacementE01008200338

Windscreen wiper blades (Driver’sside)

1. Lift the wiper arm off the windscreen.2. Pull the wiper blade until its stopper (A) dis-

engages from the hook (B). Then, pull thewiper blade further to remove it.

NOTEl Do not allow the wiper arm to fall onto the

windscreen; it could damage the glass.

3. Attach the retainers (C) to a new wiper blade.

Refer to the illustration to ensure that the re-tainers are correctly aligned as you attachthem.

4. Insert the wiper blade into the arm, startingwith the opposite end of the blade from thestopper. Make sure the hook (B) is fitted cor-rectly in the grooves in the blade.

NOTEl If retainers are not supplied with the new wip-

er blade, use the retainers from the old blade.

Maintenance

8-13OA0X13E4

8

5. Push the wiper blade until the hook (B) en-gages securely with the stopper (A).

Windscreen wiper blades (Passenger’sside)/Rear window wiper blades

1. Lift the wiper arm off the window glass.2. Pull the wiper blade downward to disengage

it from the stopper (A) at the end of the wip-er arm. Pull the wiper blade further to re-move it.

3. Slide a new wiper blade through the hook(B) on the wiper arm.

NOTEl Do not allow the wiper arm to fall onto the

window glass; it could damage the glass.

4. Firmly insert the retainer (C) into the groove(D) in the wiper blade.Refer to the illustration to ensure that the re-tainers are correctly aligned as you insertthem into the groove.

NOTEl If a retainer is not supplied with the new wip-

er blade, use the retainer from the old blade.

General maintenanceE01002700559

Fuel, engine coolant, oil and exhaustgas leakageLook under the body of your vehicle to check forfuel, engine coolant, oil and exhaust gas leaks.

WARNINGl If you see a suspicious fuel leak or if you

smell fuel, do not operate the vehicle; callyour MITSUBISHI MOTORS Author-ized Service Point for assistance.

Exterior and interior lamp operationOperate the combination lamp switch to check thatall lamps are functioning properly.If the lamps do not illuminate, the probable causeis a blown fuse or defective lamp bulb. Check thefuses first. If there is no blown fuses, check thelamp bulbs.For information regarding the inspection and re-placement of the fuses and the lamp bulbs, refer to“Fuses” on page 8-15 and “Replacement of lampbulbs” on page 8-19.If the fuses and bulbs are all OK, we recommendyou to have your vehicle checked and repaired.

Meter, gauge and indicator/warninglamps operationRun the engine to check the operation of all meters,gauges, and indicator/warning lamps.If there is anything wrong, we recommend you tohave your vehicle inspected.

Maintenance

8-14 OA0X13E4

8

Hinges and latches lubricationCheck all latches and hinges, and, if necessary,have them lubricated.

Fusible linksE01002900636

The fusible links will melt to prevent a fire if alarge current attempts to flow through certain elec-trical systems.In case of a melted fusible link, we recommendyou to have your vehicle inspected.For the fusible links, please refer to “Engine com-partment fuse location table” on page 8-17.

WARNINGl Fusible links must not be replaced by any

other device. Failing to fit the correct fusi-ble link may result in fire in the vehicle,property destruction and serious or fatalinjuries at any time.

FusesE01003002335

Fuse block locationTo prevent damage to the electrical system due toshortcircuiting or overloading, each individual cir-cuit is provided with a fuse.There are fuse blocks in the passenger compart-ment and in the engine compartment.

Passenger compartment (LHD vehicles)The fuse blocks in the passenger compartment arelocated behind the fuse lid in front of the driver’sseat at the position shown in the illustration.Pull the fuse lid to remove it.

Maintenance

8-15OA0X13E4

8

Passenger compartment (RHD vehicles)The fuse boxes in the passenger compartment arelocated behind the glove box at the position shownin the illustration.

1. Open the glove box.2. While pressing the side of the glove box, un-

hook the left and right hooks (A) and lowerthe glove box.

3. Remove the glove box fastener (B), and thenremove the glove box.

Engine compartmentIn the engine compartment, the fuse block is loca-ted as shown in the illustration.While pressing the tab (A or B), pull up the cover.

Type A

Type B

Fuse load capacityE01007700727

The fuse capacity and the names of electrical sys-tems protected by the fuses are indicated on the in-side of the fuse lid (LHD vehicles), the back of theglove box (RHD vehicles) and inside of the fuseblock cover (inside of the engine compartment).

NOTEl Spare fuses are provided in the fuse block of

the engine compartment. Always use a fuseof the same capacity for replacement.

Passenger compartment fuse location tableE01007900846

No. Symbol Electrical system Capacity

1 Tail lamp (left) 7.5 A

2 Cigarette lighter 15 A

3 Ignition coil 10 A

4 Starter motor 7.5 A

Maintenance

8-16 OA0X13E4

8


5 — — —

6 — — —

7 Tail lamp (right) 7.5 A

8 Outside rear-viewmirrors 7.5 A

9 Engine control unit 7.5 A

10 Control unit 7.5 A

11 Rear fog lamp 10 A

12 Central door lock 15 A

13 Room lamp 15 A

14 Rear window wiper 15 A

15 Gauge 7.5 A

16 Relay 7.5 A

17 Heated seat 20 A

18 Option 10 A

19 Heated door mirror 7.5 A

20 Windscreen wiper 20 A

21 Reversing lamps 7.5 A

22 Demister 30 A

23 Heater 30 A

24 — — —


25 Radio 10 A

26 Electronic control-led unit 15 A

l Some fuses may not be installed on your ve-hicle, depending on the vehicle model or spec-ifications.

l The table above shows the main equipmentcorresponding to each fuse.

Engine compartment fuse location tableE01008000860

Type A

No. Sym-bol Electrical system Ca-

pacity

SBF1 Radiator fan motor 40 A*

SBF2 Anti-lock brake system 30 A*

SBF3 Ignition switch 40 A*

SBF4 Electric window control 40 A*

BF1 DC-DC (P/T) 30 A

BF2 DC-DC (AUDIO) 30 A

F1 Headlamp low beam (left) 10 A

F2 Headlamp low beam(right) 10 A

F3 Headlamp high-beam(left) 10 A

F4 Headlamp high-beam(right) 10 A

F5 Horn 10 A

F6 Front fog lamps 15 A

F7 Daytime running lamps 10 A

F8 — — —

F9 — — —

F10 Starter 7.5 A

F11 — — —

F12 Stop lamps (Brake lamps) 15 A

*: Fusible link

Maintenance

8-17OA0X13E4

8

No. Sym-bol Electrical system Ca-

pacity

F13 Ignition coil 7.5 A

F14 Engine control 7.5 A

F15 Alternator 7.5 A

F16 Hazard warning flasher 10 A

F17 Automatic transmission 15 A

F18 Air conditioning 10 A

F19 ETV 15 A

F20 Battery current sensor 7.5 A

F21 CVT oil/pump 15 A

F22 Fuel pump 15 A

F23 Engine 20 A

F24 Automatic transmission 7.5 A

#1 — Spare fuse 20 A

#2 — Spare fuse 30 A*: Fusible link



Type B


SBF1 PTC heater 40 A*



*: Fusible link



The fuse box does not contain spare 7.5 A, 10 A or15 A fuses. If one of these fuses burns out, substi-tute with the following fuse.7.5 A: Outside rear-view mirrors10 A: Option15 A: Cigarette lighterWhen using a substitute fuse, replace with a fuse ofthe correct capacity as soon as possible.

Identification of fuseE01008100366

Capacity Colour

7.5 A Brown

10 A Red

15 A Blue

20 A Yellow

30 A Green (fuse type) / Pink (fusiblelink type)

40 A Green (fusible link type)

Fuse replacementE01007800887

1. Before replacing a fuse, always turn off theelectrical circuit concerned and place the ig-nition switch in the “LOCK” position or putthe operation mode in OFF.

2. Remove the fuse puller (A) from the insideof the fuse box in the engine compartment.

3. Referring to the fuse load capacity table,check the fuse pertaining to the problem.

Maintenance

8-18 OA0X13E4

8

B- Fuse is OKC- Blown fuse

NOTEl If any system does not function but the fuse

corresponding to that system is normal, theremay be a fault in the system elsewhere. Werecommend you to have your vehicle checked.

4. Insert a new fuse of the same capacity by us-ing the fuse puller into the same place at thefuse block.

CAUTIONl If the newly inserted fuse blows again af-

ter a short time, we recommend you tohave the electrical system checked to findthe cause and rectify it.

l Never use a fuse with a capacity largerthan that specified or any substitute, suchas wire, foil, etc.; doing so will cause thecircuit wiring to heat up and could causea fire.

Replacement of lamp bulbsE01003100794

Before replacing a bulb, ensure the lamp is off. Donot touch the glass part of the new bulb with yourbare fingers; the skin oil left on the glass will evap-orate when the bulb gets hot and the vapour willcondense on the reflector and dim the surface.

CAUTIONl Bulbs are extremely hot immediately af-

ter being turned off.When replacing a bulb, wait for it to coolsufficiently before touching it. You couldotherwise be burnt.

l Handle halogen lamp bulbs with care.The gas inside halogen lamp bulbs is high-ly pressurized, so dropping, knocking, orscratching a halogen lamp bulb can causeit to shatter.

l Never hold the halogen lamp bulb with abare hand, dirty glove, etc. The oil fromyour hand could cause the bulb to breakthe next time the headlamps are operated.If the glass surface is dirty, it must becleaned with alcohol, paint thinner, etc.,and refit it after drying it thoroughly.

Maintenance

8-19OA0X13E4

8

NOTEl If you are unsure of how to carry out the

work as required, we recommend you to con-sult a specialist.

l Be careful not to scratch the vehicle bodywhen removing a lamp or lens.

l When it rains or when the vehicle has beenwashed, the inside of the lens sometimes be-comes foggy. This is the same phenomenonas when window glass mists up on a humidday, and does not indicate a functional prob-lem. When the lamp is switched on, the heatwill remove the fog. However, if water gath-ers inside the lamp, we recommend you tohave the lamp checked.

Bulb location and capacityE01003200320

When replacing a bulb, use a new bulb with thesame wattage and colour.

OutsideE01003303032

Front

1- Front turn-signal lamps: 21 W (PY21W)2- Headlamps: 60/55 W (H4)3- Position lamps: 5 W (W5W)4- Type 1

Daytime running lamps: 13 W (P13W)Type 2

Front fog lamps: 35 W (H8)Daytime running lamps: 13 W (P13W)

5- Side turn-signal lamps: 5 W Codes in parentheses indicate bulb types.

NOTEl For the side turn-signal lamp, it is not possi-

ble to repair or replace just the bulb.For repair and replacement, contact aMITSUBISHI MOTORS Authorized ServicePoint.

Rear

6- High-mounted stop lamp (bulb type)*: 5 W(W5W)

7- Licence plate lamps: 5 W (W5W)8- Reversing lamps (passenger’s side): 21 W

(P21W)Rear fog lamp (driver’s side): 21 W (P21W)

9- Rear turn-signal lamps: 21 W (P21W)10- Stop and tail lamps: 21/5 W (P21/5W)

Codes in parentheses indicate bulb types.

NOTEl On a vehicle with a rear spoiler, the high-

mounted stop lamp uses LEDs rather thanbulbs. For repair and replacement, contact aMITSUBISHI MOTORS Authorized ServicePoint.

Maintenance

8-20 OA0X13E4

8

InsideE01003402049

1- Luggage room lamp: 5 W2- Room lamp: 8 W

HeadlampsE01009300336

1. Pull out the connector (A), and then removethe sealing cover (B).


2. Unhook the spring (C), which secures thebulb, and then remove the bulb (D).

3. To install the bulb, perform the removalsteps in reverse.

Position lampsE01003701188

1. Turn the socket (A) anticlockwise to removeit.


2. Pull the bulb out of the socket.


Front turn-signal lampsE01003801091

1. Turn the socket (A) anticlockwise to removeit.


Maintenance

8-21OA0X13E4

8

2. Remove the bulb from the socket by turningit anticlockwise while pressing in.


Front fog lamps* / Daytime runninglamps*

E01004001797

1. To create enough work space, turn the steer-ing wheel all the way in the direction oppo-site to the side you wish to replace.

2. Remove the clips/bolts (A) to turn up the cov-er (B).

3. While pressing the tab (C or D), pull out theconnector.

Type 1

Type 2

C- Daytime running lampD- Front fog lamp

4. Turn the bulb anticlockwise to remove it.

Type 1

Type 2


NOTEl When refitting each of the clips, first insert

part (E) of the clip into the hole and thenpress part (F) into it.

Maintenance

8-22 OA0X13E4

8

Rear combination lampsE01004201539

1. Open the tailgate(Refer to “Tailgate” on page 1-14.)

2. Remove the screws (A) that hold the lamp unit.

3. Move the lamp unit towards the rear of the ve-hicle to unfix the notch (B) and pin (C).

4. Turn the socket anticlockwise to remove it.

D- Reversing lamp (passenger’s side)/Rearfog lamp (driver’s side)

E- Rear turn-signal lampF- Stop and tail lamp

5. Remove the bulb from the socket by turningit anticlockwise while pressing in.


NOTEl When mounting the lamp unit, align the

notch (G) and pin (H) on the lamp unit withthe clip (I) and hole (J) in the body.

Maintenance

8-23OA0X13E4

8

High-mounted stop lamp (bulb type)*E01004500665

1. Open the tailgate.(Refer to “Tailgate” on page 1-14)

2. Insert a straight blade (or minus) screwdriverwith a cloth over its tip at the edge of the cov-er and pry gently to remove the cover (A).

3. Push the 4 hooks (B) and remove the lampunit. (Close the tailgate to cause the lampunit to come out.)

4. Gently close the tailgate, remove the lampunit, and turn the socket anticlockwise to re-move it.

5. Pull the bulb out of the socket.


Licence plate lampsE01004601012

1. Push the lens (A) towards the rear of the ve-hicle to remove it.

2. Pull the bulb out of the lamp unit.


Maintenance

8-24 OA0X13E4

8

Masking the headlampsE01011600059

When entering a country in which vehicles are driv-en on the opposite side of the road to the country inwhich your vehicles is supplied, necessary meas-ures have to be taken to avoid dazzling oncomingtraffic.Mask the headlamps according to the next proce-dure.

1. Turn the headlamp off and wait until the head-lamps got cold.

2. According to the illustrations, prepare thesticker (A) to stick the headlamp surface ofright and left.

NOTEl Use a sticker with a light blocking effect

enough.Using of a sticker without a light blocking ef-fect will not acquire a blocking effect.

3. Seeing from the headlamp front, position (C)of the sticker and the central mark (B) of theheadlamp and stick a sticker along the verti-cal dotted line.

NOTEl Align the vertical dotted line with the line of

the reflector in the headlamp.

Right lens

Left lensLHD RHD

Left lens

Right lens

Maintenance

8-25OA0X13E4

8

OA0X13E4

Vehicle labeling............................................................................9-02Vehicle dimensions.......................................................................9-03Vehicle performance.....................................................................9-05Vehicle weight..............................................................................9-06Engine specifications....................................................................9-08Electrical system...........................................................................9-09Tyres and wheels..........................................................................9-10Clutch pedal..................................................................................9-11Fuel consumption.........................................................................9-12Refill capacities............................................................................9-13

Specifications

OA0X13E4

9

Vehicle labelingE01100103375

Vehicle identification numberThe vehicle identification number is stamped onthe bulkhead as shown in the illustration.

Vehicle information code plateThe vehicle information code plate is located asshown in the illustrations.

The plate shows model code, engine model, trans-mission model and body colour code, etc.

Please use this number when ordering replacementparts.

1- Model code2- Engine model code3- Transmission model code4- Final gear ratio5- Body colour code6- Interior code7- Option code

Vehicle identification number plate(RHD vehicles only)The vehicle identification number is stamped onthe plate riveted to the left front corner of the vehi-cle body. It is visible from outside of the vehiclethrough the windscreen.

Engine numberThe engine number is stamped on the engine cylin-der block as shown in the illustration.


Specifications

9-02 OA0X13E4

9

Vehicle dimensionsE01100202920

1 Front track 1,430 mm

2 Overall width 1,665 mm

3 Front overhang 730 mm

4 Wheel base 2,450 mm

5 Rear overhang 530 mm

6 Overall length 3,710 mm

7 Ground clearance (unladen) 150 mm

8 Overall height (unladen) 1,490 mm

9 Rear track 1,415 mm

Minimum turning radius

Body 4.9 m

Specifications

9-03OA0X13E4

9

Wheel 4.6 m

Specifications

9-04 OA0X13E4

9

Vehicle performanceE01100302572

Maximum speed 1000 models 172 km/h

1200 models M/T 180 km/h

CVT 173 km/h

Specifications

9-05OA0X13E4

9

Vehicle weightE01100405721

1000 models

Kerb weight Without optional parts 845 kg

With full optional parts 897 kg

Maximum gross vehicle weight 1,290 kg

Maximum axle weight Front 730 kg

Rear 670 kg

Maximum roof load 50 kg

Seating capacity 5 persons

1200 models

Item M/T A/T

Kerb weight Without optional parts 845 kg 865 kg

With full optional parts 925 kg 955 kg

Maximum gross vehicle weight 1,340 kg, 1,370 kg* 1,370 kg, 1,400 kg*

Maximum axle weight Front 730 kg

Rear 670 kg, 700 kg*

Maximum towable weight With brake 200 kg

Without brake 100 kg

Maximum trailer-nose weight 25 kg

Maximum roof load 50 kg

Seating capacity 5 persons*: In case of trailer towing

Specifications

9-06 OA0X13E4

9

NOTEl Trailer specifications indicate the manufacturer’s recommendation.

Specifications

9-07OA0X13E4

9

Engine specificationsE01100602937

Item 1000 models 1200 models

Engine model 3A90 3A92No. of cylinders 3 in line 3 in lineTotal displacement 999 cc 1,193 ccBore 75.0 mm 75.0 mmStroke 75.4 mm 90.0 mmCamshaft Double overhead Double overheadMixture preparation Electronic injection Electronic injection

Maximum output (ECC net) 52 kW/6,000 r/min 59 kW/6,000 r/min

Maximum torque (ECC net) 88 Nm/5,000 r/min 106 Nm/4,000 r/min

Specifications

9-08 OA0X13E4

9

Electrical systemE01100802740

Voltage 12 V

Battery Type (JIS) 80D23L, Q-85*

Capacity (5HR) 59 Ah, 55 Ah*

Alternator capacity 95 A

Spark plug type NGK DILFR6A11*: Vehicles equipped with Auto Stop & Go (AS&G) system

NOTEl For vehicles equipped with the Auto Stop & Go (AS&G) system, contact a MITSUBISHI MOTORS Authorized Service Point when replacing the battery.

Specifications

9-09OA0X13E4

9

Tyres and wheelsE01100903201

Tyre 165/65R14 79S 175/55R15 77V

Wheel Size 14x4 1/2J 15x5 J

Offset 46 mm

NOTEl Contact your MITSUBISHI MOTORS Authorized Service Point for details on the combination used on your vehicle.

Specifications

9-10 OA0X13E4

9

Clutch pedalE01102000029

Free play 11 to 16 mm

NOTEl Have the clutch pedal adjusted at a

MITSUBISHI MOTORS Authorized ServicePoint.

Specifications

9-11OA0X13E4

9

Fuel consumptionE01101100788

ItemCombined Urban conditions Extra-urban conditions

CO2 (g/km) Fuel consumption(L/100 km)

Fuel consumption(L/100 km)

Fuel consumption(L/100 km)

1000 models 96, 92* 4.2, 4.0* 5.0, 4.6* 3.6, 3.6*

1200 models

M/T

Vehicle with 14 inchtyres

100, 96* 4.3, 4.1* 5.2, 4.8* 3.8, 3.7*


104, 100* 4.5, 4.3* 5.3, 5.0* 4.0, 3.9*

CVT


100, 95* 4.3, 4.1* 5.1, 4.6* 3.8, 3.8*


107, 101* 4.6, 4.4* 5.5, 4.9* 4.1, 4.0*

*: Vehicles equipped with Auto Stop & Go (AS&G) system

NOTEl The results given do not express or imply any guarantee of the fuel consumption of the particular vehicle.

The vehicle itself has not been tested and there are inevitably differences between individual vehicles of the same model. In addition, this vehicle may incor-porate particular modifications. Furthermore, the driver’s style and road and traffic conditions, as well as the extent to which the vehicle has been driven andthe standard of maintenance, will all affect its fuel consumption.

Specifications

9-12 OA0X13E4

9

Refill capacitiesE01101304632

LHD RHD

No. Item Quantity Lubricants

1 Brake fluid As required Brake fluid DOT 3 or DOT 4

2 Engine coolant M/T 4.0 litres*1 MITSUBISHI MOTORS GENUINE SUPER LONG LIFE COOL-ANT PREMIUM or equivalent*2

CVT 4.6 litres*1

3 Washer fluid 2.5 litres —

4 Engine oil Oil pan 2.8 litresRefer to page 8-05.

Oil filter 0.2 litre

5 CVT fluid 7.0 litres MITSUBISHI MOTORS GENUINE CVTF-J4*1: Includes 0.5 litre in the reservoir*2: Similar high quality ethylene glycol based non-silicate, non-amine, non-nitrate and non-borate coolant with long life hybrid organic acid technology*3: Optional equipment

Specifications

9-13OA0X13E4

9

No. Item Quantity Lubricants

6 Manual transmission oil 1.6 litres MITSUBISHI MOTORS GENUINE NEW MULTI GEAR OIL ECOAPI classification GL-4, SAE 75W-80

7 Refrigerant (air conditioning*3) 250-290 g HFO-1234yf*1: Includes 0.5 litre in the reservoir*2: Similar high quality ethylene glycol based non-silicate, non-amine, non-nitrate and non-borate coolant with long life hybrid organic acid technology*3: Optional equipment

Specifications

9-14 OA0X13E4

9

AAccessory (Installation) 04Accessory socket 5-35Active stability control (ASC) 4-30Air conditioning

Automatic air conditioning 5-06Heater 5-03Important operation tips for the air condition-ing 5-12Manual air conditioning 5-03

Air purifier 5-13Airbag 2-17

Caution for installing the child restraint on vehi-cles with a front passenger airbag 2-09,2-18Front passenger’s airbag OFF indicationlamp 2-19Front passenger’s airbag ON-OFF switch 2-19

Antenna 5-30Anti-lock brake system (ABS) 4-28

Warning lamp 4-29Assist grip 5-39Audio

Error codes 5-27Handling of compact discs 5-29LW/MW/FM electronic tuning radio with CDplayer 5-13

Auto Stop & Go (AS&G) system 4-15Automatic air conditioning 5-06Automatic transmission

Selector lever operation 15,4-21Selector lever positions 4-22

BBattery 8-08

Charge warning lamp 3-13Discharged battery (Emergency starting) 6-02

Disposal information for used batteries 05Specification 9-09

Bonnet 8-04Bottle holder 5-38Brake assist system 4-27Brake

Anti-lock brake 4-28Braking 4-25Fluid 8-07,9-13Parking brake 4-04Warning lamp 3-12

Bulb capacity 8-20

CCapacities 9-13Card holder 5-34Cargo loads 4-34Catalytic converter 8-03Central door locks 1-13Charge warning lamp 3-13Check engine warning lamp 3-12Child restraint 2-09

Caution for installing the child restraint on vehi-cles with a front passenger airbag 2-09,2-18

Child-protection rear doors 1-14Cleaning

Exterior of your vehicle 7-03Interior of your vehicle 7-02

Combination headlamps and dipper switch 3-14Compact spare wheel 6-12Convenient hook 5-39Coolant 9-13Coolant (engine) 8-06Cup holder 5-37

DDaytime running lamps

Bulb capacity 8-20Replacement 8-22

Demister (rear window) 3-23Dimensions 9-03Dipper (High/Low beam change) 3-16Door ajar warning lamp 3-14Doors

Central door locks 1-13Child-protection 1-14Lock and unlock 1-12

Driving, alcohol and drugs 4-02

EEconomical driving 4-02Electric power steering system (EPS) 4-30Electric window control 1-15Electrical system 9-09Electronic immobilizer (Anti-theft starting sys-tem) 1-03Emergency starting 6-02Emergency stop signal system 4-28Engine specifications 9-08Engine switch 4-09Engine

Coolant 8-06Number 9-02Oil 8-05Oil and oil filter 9-13Overheating 6-04Specifications 9-08Used engine oils safety instructions and dispos-al information 05

Error codes 5-27Exterior and interior lamp operation 8-14

FFluid capacities and lubricants 9-13

Alphabetical index

1OA0X13E4

FluidAutomatic transmission fluid 9-13Brake fluid 8-07,9-13Engine coolant 8-06Washer fluid 8-07,9-13

Front fog lampsBulb capacity 8-20Indication lamp 3-11Replacement 8-22Switch 3-18

Front passenger’s airbag ON-OFF switch 2-19Front seat 2-02Front turn-signal lamps


Frozen road warning 3-05Fuel consumption 9-12Fuel remaining warning display 3-06Fuel

Filling the fuel tank 02Fuel remaining display 3-06Fuel remaining warning display 3-06Fuel selection 02Modification/alterations to the electrical sys-tems 04Tank capacity 03

Fuses 8-15Fusible links 8-15

GGarage jack up position 8-03General maintenance 8-14General vehicle data 9-03Genuine parts 05Glove box 5-36

HHazard warning flasher switch 3-18Hazard warning indication lamps 3-11Head restraints 2-04Headlamp levelling switch 3-16Headlamps

Bulb capacity 8-20Headlamp flasher 3-16Replacement 8-21Switch 3-14

Heated mirror 4-07Heated seats 2-03Heater 5-03High coolant temperature warning lamp 3-13High-beam indication lamp 3-11High-mounted stop lamp


Hill start assist 4-26Hinges and latches lubrication 8-15Horn switch 3-24

IIf the vehicle breaks down 6-02Ignition switch 4-08Indication and warning lamps 17,3-10Indication lamps 3-11Information display 3-03Inside rear-view mirror 4-06Instruments 3-02Interior lamps 5-35

JJack 6-05

Storage 6-05

Jump starting (Emergency starting) 6-02

KKeyless entry system 1-03Keyless operation system 1-04Keys 1-02

LLabeling 9-02Lamp monitor buzzer 3-16Leakage (Fuel, engine coolant, oil and exhaustgas) 8-14Licence plate lamps


Link System 5-31Lock and unlock the doors and tailgate 11Lubricants 9-13Luggage room lamp 5-36

Bulb capacity 8-21LW/MW/FM electronic tuning radio with CD play-er 5-13

MManual air conditioning 5-03Manual transmission 4-19Manual window control 1-15Masking the headlamps 8-25Meter illumination control 3-04Mirror

Inside rear-view mirror 4-06Outside rear-view mirrors 4-07

Modification/alterations to the electrical sys-tems 04Multi-information display 3-02

Alphabetical index

2 OA0X13E4

OOil pressure warning lamp 3-13Oil

Engine oil 8-05High coolant temperature warning lamp 3-13

Operation under adverse driving conditions 6-20Outside rear-view mirrors 4-07Overheating 6-04

PParking 4-05

Parking brake 4-04Position lamps


Precautions to observe when using wipers andwashers 3-22Pregnant women restraint 2-08Puncture (Tyre changing) 6-11Puncture

Tyre repair kit 6-06

RRadio

LW/MW/FM electronic tuning radio with CDplayer 5-13

Rear fog lampBulb capacity 8-20Indication lamp 3-11Switch 3-18

Rear seat 2-03Rear shelf panel 5-38Rear turn-signal lamps

Bulb capacity 8-20Replacement 8-21,8-23

Rear window demister switch 3-23Rear-view camera 4-32Rear-view mirror

Inside 4-06Outside 4-07

Replacement of lamp bulbs 8-19Reversing lamps


Roof carrier precaution 4-35Room lamp 5-35

Bulb capacity 8-21Running-in recommendations 4-03

SSafe driving techniques 4-03Seat belt 2-05

Adjustable seat belt anchor 2-07Child restraint 2-09Force limiter 2-08Inspection 2-17Pregnant women restraint 2-08Pretensioner 2-08

SeatAdjustment 2-02Front seat 2-02Heated seats 2-03Rear seat 2-03

SeatsHead restraints 2-04

Service precaution 8-02Side turn-signal lamps


Snow traction device (Tyre chains) 8-12Snow tyres 8-12Spark plug 9-09Specifications 9-02

Starting 4-12Steering

Steering wheel height adjustment 4-06Steering wheel lock 4-11

Stop and tail lampsBulb capacity 8-20Replacement 8-23

Storage spaces 5-36Sun visors 5-34Supplemental restraint system 2-17

Caution for installing the child restraint on vehi-cles with a front passenger airbag 2-09,2-18How the Supplemental Restraint Systemworks 2-17Servicing 2-26Warning lamp 2-25

TTailgate 1-14Tank capacity 03Tools 6-05

Storage 6-05Towing 6-17Trailer towing 4-35Transmission

Automatic transmission 15,4-21Fluid 9-13Manual transmission 4-19

Turn-signal indication lamps 3-11Turn-signal lever 3-17Tyre repair kit 6-06Tyres 8-09

How to change a tyre 6-11Inflation pressures 8-10Size (tyre and wheel) 9-10Snow traction device (Tyre chains) 8-12Snow tyres 8-12Spare wheel information 6-12

Alphabetical index

3OA0X13E4

Tyre repair kit 6-06Tyre rotation 8-11Wheel condition 8-11

UUSB input terminal 5-31Used engine oils safety instructions and disposalinformation 05

VVanity mirror 5-34Vehicle care precautions 7-02Vehicle dimensions 9-03Vehicle identification number 9-02Vehicle information code plate 9-02Vehicle labeling 9-02Vehicle performance 9-05Vehicle weight 9-06Ventilators 5-02

WWasher

Fluid 8-07,9-13Switch 3-19,3-22

Washing 7-03Waxing 7-04Weight 9-06Wheel condition 8-11Wheel

Covers 6-16Specification 9-10

WiperRear window 3-22Windscreen 3-19Wiper blades 8-13

Alphabetical index

4 OA0X13E4

1OA0X13E4 Declaration of Conformity

2 OA0X13E4Declaration of Conformity

3OA0X13E4 Declaration of Conformity

OA0X13E4

OA0X13E4

OA0X13E4

OA0X13E4

OA0X13E4

Documents

MIRAGE - Mitsubishi Motors UK